Professional Documents
Culture Documents
2022aisc360 Prone Draft
2022aisc360 Prone Draft
2022aisc360 Prone Draft
Substantial changes to ANSI/AISC 360 in the 2022 edition that appear in Public Review One Draft
dated August 3, 2020:
• New shear lag factors are provided for slotted round and rectangular
• HSS members connected to a gusset plate and for rectangular HSS members connected two side
gusset plates.
• New provisions are provided compression members with lateral bracing offset from the shear
center (also known as constrained axis torsional buckling).
• Eurocode stress-strain-temperature equations have been incorporated in Appendix 4 (fire) so
users have clearer guidance on that material properties they can use for steel and concrete at
elevated temperatures.
• Appendix 4, Section 4.3, “Design by Qualification Testing,” now includes prescriptive steel fire
protection design equations and related information based on standard ASTM E119 fire tests,
which have also been contained in ASCE-29 and the IBC.
• Sections A4, Structural Design Documents and Specifications, has been expanded to list
information from the Code of Standard Practice that needs to be provided in the structural
design documents.
• A new Section A5, Approvals, has been added to address the review and approval of approval
documents.
• Chapter I, “Design of Composite Members,” has been expanded to include the coupled concrete
filled composite plate shear wall system.
• New provisions added to Chapter I, “Design of Composite Members,” has made this chapter the
single source standard for the design of composite members and systems.
• New provisions have been added for both filled and encased members.
• A new Appendix has been added to allow for the design of filled composite members with
higher strength materials (f’c ≤ 15,000 psi and Fy ≤ 100 ksi) ASTM F3148 (144 ksi) bolts have
been added to the Specification.
AISC 360-xx
_________________________
Specification
for Structural Steel Buildings
_________________________
Public Review Draft dated August 3, 2020
20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
AISC © XXXX
by
All rights reserved. This book or any part thereof must not be
20 NE
The information presented in this publication has been prepared by a balanced
committee following American National Standards Institute (ANSI) consensus
procedures and recognized principles of design and construction. While it is
20 O
believed to be accurate, this information should not be used or relied upon for any
specific application without competent professional examination and verification of
3, W
its accuracy, suitability and applicability by a licensed engineer or architect. The
publication of this information is not a representation or warranty on the part of
E
the American Institute of Steel Construction, its officers, agents, employees or
ST I
committee members, or of any other person named herein, that this information is
U EV
suitable for any general or particular use, or of freedom from infringement of any
patent or patents. All representations or warranties, express or implied, other than
as stated above, are specifically disclaimed. Anyone making use of the information
G R
presented in this publication assumes all liability arising from such use.
AU IC
Caution must be exercised when relying upon standards and guidelines developed
by other bodies and incorporated by reference herein since such material may be
BL
modified or amended from time to time subsequent to the printing of this edition.
The American Institute of Steel Construction bears no responsibility for such
material other than to refer to it and incorporate it by reference at the time of the
PU
1 Symbols
2
3
4 Definitions for the symbols used in this standard are provided here and reflect the
5 definitions provided in the body of this standard. Some symbols may be used
6 multiple times throughout the document. The section or table number shown in the
7 right-hand column of the list identifies the first time the symbol is used in this
8 document. Symbols without text definitions are omitted.
9
10 Symbol Definition Section
11
12
13 ABM Area of the base metal, in.2 (mm2) .......................................................J2.4
14 Ab Nominal unthreaded body area of bolt or threaded part, in.2 (mm2) ....J3.6
15 Ab Nominal body area of undriven rivet, in.2 (mm2).................... App. 5.3.2a
16 Ac Area of concrete, in.2 (mm2) .............................................................. I2.1b
17 Area of concrete slab within effective width, in.2 (mm2) ................... I3.2d
20 NE
Ac
18 Ac Area of concrete in filled composite member, in.2 (mm2) ................... I4.2
19 Ae Effective area, in.2 (mm2) ................................................................... E7.2
20 Effective net area, in.2 (mm2) ................................................................ D2
20 O
Ae
21 Ae Effective net area as defined in Section D3, in.2(mm2) ........................J4.1
22 Ae Summation of the effective areas of the cross section based on the
3, W
23 reduced effective widths, be, de or he, or the area as given by Equations
24 E7-6 or E7-7, in.2 (mm2) .......................................................................E7
E
25 Aev Effective area subjected to shear, in.2 (mm2) .......................................J4.3
ST I
Afn
30 in. 2 (mm2) ......................................................................................... F13.1
31 Area of tension flange, in.2 (mm2) ..................................................... G2.2
AU IC
Aft
32 Ag Gross area of angle, in.2 (mm2) ...................................................... F10.2
33 Ag Gross area of member, in.2 (mm2) .................................................... B4.3a
BL
55 Aw Area of web, the overall depth times the web thickness, dtw, in.2 (mm2)
56 ........................................................................................................... G2.1
57 Aw Area of web or webs, taken as the sum of the overall depth times the web
58 thickness, dtw, in.2 (mm2) ...................................................................... G4
59 Awe Effective area of the weld, in.2 (mm2) ..................................................J2.4
60 A1 Loaded area of concrete, in.2 (mm2) ................................................... I6.3a
61 A1 Area of steel concentrically bearing on a concrete support, in.2 (mm2) . J8
62 A2 Maximum area of the portion of the supporting surface that
63 is geometrically similar to and concentric with the loaded area, in.2
64 (mm2) ................................................................................................. J8
65 B Overall width of rectangular HSS main member, measured 90° to the
66 plane of the connection, in. (mm) ........................................... Table D3.1
67 Bb Overall width of rectangular HSS branch member or plate, measured 90°
68 to the plane of the connection, in. (mm) ............................................ K1.1
69 Be Effective width of rectangular HSS branch member or plate for local
70 yielding of the transverse element, in. (mm) ..................................... K1.1
71 Bep Effective width of rectangular HSS branch member or plate for punching
20 NE
72 shear, in. (mm) ....................................................... K1.1
73 B1 Multiplier to account for P-δ effects ............................................ App. 8.2
74 B2 Multiplier to account for P-Δ effects ........................................... App. 8.2
20 O
75 C HSS torsional constant ....................................................................... H3.1
76 Cb Lateral-torsional buckling modification factor for nonuniform moment
3, W
77 diagrams when both ends of the segment are braced ............................. F1
78 Cf Constant from Table A-3.1 for the fatigue category .................... App. 3.3
E
79 Cm Equivalent uniform moment factor assuming no relative translation of
80 member ends ............................................................................. App. 8.2.1
ST I
U EV
91 D Outside diameter of round HSS main member, in. (mm) .................. K1.1
92 D Nominal dead load, kips (N) .............................................................. B3.9
93 D Nominal dead load rating .......................................................... App. 5.4.1
94 Db Outside diameter of round HSS branch member, in. (mm) ............... K1.1
95 Du A multiplier that reflects the ratio of the mean installed bolt pretension to
96 the specified minimum bolt pretension ................................................J3.8
97 E Modulus of elasticity of steel = 29,000 ksi (200 000 MPa) ... Table B4.1b
98 Ec Modulus of elasticity of concrete = w1.5 c fc′ , ksi
99 ( 0.043w1.5 c fc′ , MPa) ......................................................................... I2.1b
100 Es Modulus of elasticity of steel = 29,000 ksi (200 000 MPa) .............. I2.1b
101 EIeff Effective stiffness of composite section, kip-in.2 (N-mm2) ............... I2.1b
102 Fc Available stress in main member, ksi (MPa) ..................................... K1.1
103 Fca Available axial stress at the point of consideration, determined in
104 accordance with Chapter E for compression or Section D2 for tension,
105 ksi (MPa) .............................................................................................. H2
106 Fcbw, Fcbz Available flexural stress at the point of consideration, determined in
107 accordance with Chapter F, ksi (MPa) .................................................. H2
108 Fcr Buckling stress for the section as determined by analysis, ksi (MPa) ......
109 ........................................................................................................... H3.3
20 NE
127 Fnt Nominal tensile stress from Table J3.2, ksi (MPa) ..............................J3.6
128 Fnt Nominal tensile strength of the driven rivet from Table A-5.3.1, ksi
129 (MPa) ...................................................................................... App. 5.3.2a
20 O
130 F′nt Nominal tensile stress modified to include the effects of shear stress, ksi
131 (MPa) ..................................................................................................J3.7
132 Nominal shear stress from Table J3.2, ksi (MPa) ................................J3.6
3, W
Fnv
133 Fnv Nominal shear strength of the driven rivet from Table A-5.3.1, ksi (MPa) .
134 ................................................................................................ App. 5.3.2a
E
135 Fnw Nominal stress of the weld metal, ksi (MPa) .......................................J2.4
ST I
U EV
136 Fnw Nominal stress of the weld metal in accordance with Chapter J, ksi
137 (MPa) K5
138 FSR Allowable stress range, ksi (MPa) ............................................... App. 3.3
G R
139 FTH Threshold allowable stress range, maximum stress range for indefinite
140 design life from Table A-3.1, ksi (MPa) ...................................... App. 3.3
AU IC
20 NE
183 for stiffener pairs, or about the face in contact with the web plate for
184 single stiffeners, in.4 (mm4) ............................................................... G2.4
185 Ist1 Minimum moment of inertia of transverse stiffeners required for
20 O
186 development of the full shear post buckling resistance of the stiffened
187 web panels, in.4 (mm4) ....................................................................... G2.4
188 Minimum moment of inertia of transverse stiffeners required for
3, W
Ist2
189 development of web shear buckling resistance, in.4 (mm4) ............... G2.4
190 I x, I y Moment of inertia about the principal axes, in.4 (mm4) .........................E4
E
192 Iyeff
193 Iyc Moment of inertia of the compression flange about the y-axis, in.4 (mm4)
194 ............................................................................................................ F4.2
G R
195 Iyt Moment of inertia of the tension flange about the y-axis, in.4 (mm4) .......
196 ................................................................................................ App. 6.3.2a
AU IC
199 Kx Effective length factor for flexural buckling about x-axis .....................E4
200 Ky Effective length factor for flexural buckling about y-axis .....................E4
201 Kz Effective length factor for torsional buckling about the longitudinal axis .
PU
202 ...............................................................................................................E4
203 L Length of member, in. (mm) .............................................................. H3.1
204 L Laterally unbraced length of member, in. (mm) ....................................E2
205 L Length of span, in. (mm) ........................................................ App. 6.3.2a
206 L Length of member between work points at truss chord centerlines, in.
207 (mm) ......................................................................................................E5
208 L Nominal live load .............................................................................. B3.9
209 L Nominal live load rating ........................................................... App. 5.4.1
210 L Nominal occupancy live load, kips (N) .................................... App. 4.1.4
211 L Height of story, in. (mm) .......................................................... App. 7.3.2
212 Lb Length between points that are either braced against lateral displacement
213 of compression flange or braced against twist of the cross section, in.
214 (mm) ................................................................................................... F2.2
215 Lb Laterally unbraced length of member, in. (mm) ............................... F10.2
216 Lb Length between points that are either braced against lateral displacement
217 of the compression region, or between points braced to prevent twist of
218 the cross section, in. (mm) ................................................................ F11.2
219 Lb Largest laterally unbraced length along either flange at the point of load,
220 in. (mm) .............................................................................................J10.4
221 Lbr Unbraced length within the panel under consideration, in. (mm) ..............
20 NE
239 (mm) ................................................................................................... F2.2
240 Lr Limiting laterally unbraced length for the limit state of inelastic lateral-
241 torsional buckling, in. (mm) ............................................................... F2.2
20 O
242 Lr Nominal roof live load .............................................................. App. 5.4.1
243 Lv Distance from maximum to zero shear force, in. (mm) ........................ G5
244 L x, L y, L z Laterally unbraced length of the member for each axis, in. (mm) .........E4
3, W
245 MA Absolute value of moment at quarter point of the unbraced segment, kip-
246 in. (N-mm) ............................................................................................. F1
E
255 Mcr Elastic lateral-torsional buckling moment, kip-in. (N-mm) .............. F10.2
256 Mcx Available lateral-torsional strength for major axis flexure determined in
257 accordance with Chapter F using Cb = 1.0, kip-in. (N-mm) .............. H1.3
PU
258 Mcx Available flexural strength about x-axis for the limit state of tensile
259 rupture of the flange, φMn or Mn/Ω, determined according to Section
260 F13.1, kip-in. (N-mm) .......................................................................... H4
261 Mlt First-order moment using LRFD or ASD load combinations, due to
262 lateral translation of the structure only, kip-in. (N-mm) .............. App. 8.2
263 Mmax Absolute value of maximum moment in the unbraced segment, kip-in.
264 (N-mm) .................................................................................................. F1
265 Mn Nominal flexural strength, kip-in. (N-mm) ............................................ F1
266 Mnt First-order moment using LRFD or ASD load combinations, with the
267 structure restrained against lateral translation, kip-in. (N-mm) ... App. 8.2
268 Mp Plastic moment, kip-in. (N-mm)Table B4.1b
269 Mp Moment corresponding to plastic stress distribution over the composite
270 cross section, kip-in. (N-mm) ....................................................... I3.4b
271 Mpf Plastic moment of a section composed of the flange and a segment of the
272 web with a depth, de, kip-in. (N-mm) ................................................ G2.3
273 Mpm Smaller of Mpf and Mpst, kip-in. (N-mm) ............................................ G2.3
274 Mpst Plastic moment of a section composed of the stiffener plus a length of
275 web equal to de plus the distance from the inside face of the stiffener to
276 the end of the beam, except that the distance from the inside face of the
277 stiffener to the end of the beam shall not exceed 0.84tw E Fy for
278 calculation purposes, kip-in. (N-mm) ................................................ G2.3
279 Mr Required second-order flexural strength using LRFD or ASD load
280 combinations, kip-in. (N-mm) ..................................................... App. 8.2
281 Mr Required flexural strength, determined in accordance with Chapter C,
282 using LRFD or ASD load combinations, kip-in. (N-mm) ................. H1.1
283 Mr Required flexural strength, determined in accordance with Section I1.5,
284 using LRFD or ASD load combinations, kip-in. (N-mm) ...................... I5
285 Mr Required flexural strength of the beam within the panel under
286 consideration using LRFD or ASD load combinations, kip-in. (N-mm) ...
287 ................................................................................................ App. 6.3.1a
288 Mr Largest of the required flexural strengths of the beam within the
289 unbraced lengths adjacent to the point brace using LRFD or ASD load
290 combinations, kip-in. (N-mm)……………………................. App. 6.3.1b
291 Mrx Required flexural strength at the location of the bolt holes, determined in
292 accordance with Chapter C, using LRFD or ASD load combinations,
293 positive for tension in the flange under consideration and negative for
20 NE
294 compression, kip-in. (N-mm) .......................................................... H4
295 Mbr Required flexural strength of the brace, kip-in. (N-mm) ........ App. 6.3.2a
296 Mro Required flexural strength in chord at a joint, on the side of joint with
20 O
297 lower compression stress, kip-in. (N-mm) ............................... Table K2.1
298 Mr-ip Required in-plane flexural strength in branch using LRFD or ASD load
3, W
299 combinations, kip-in. (N-mm) ............................................. Table K4.1
300 Mr-op Required out-of-plane flexural strength in branch using LRFD or ASD
E
301 load combinations, kip-in. (N-mm) ......................................... Table K4.1
ST I
302 Mrx Required flexural strength at the location of the bolt holes, determined in
U EV
306 My Yield moment corresponding to yielding of the tension flange and first
307 yield of the compression flange, kip-in. (N-mm) ............................... I3.4b
AU IC
308 My Yield moment about the axis of bending, kip-in. (N-mm) .................. F9.1
309 My Yield moment calculated using the geometric section modulus, kip-in.
BL
312 Myt Yield moment in the tension flange, kip-in. (N-mm).......................... F4.4
313 M1′ Effective moment at the end of the unbraced length opposite from M2,
314 kip-in. (N-mm)........................................................................ App. 1.3.2c
315 M1 Smaller moment at end of unbraced length, kip-in. (N-mm) ............ F13.5
316 M2 Larger moment at end of unbraced length, kip-in. (N-mm) .............. F13.5
317 Ni Notional load applied at level i, kips (N) ......................................... C2.2b
318 Ni Additional lateral load, kips (N) ............................................... App. 7.3.2
319 Ov Overlap connection coefficient .......................................................... K3.1
320 Pa Required axial strength in chord using ASD load combinations, kips (N)
321 ................................................................................................. Table K2.1
322 Pbr Required end and intermediate point brace strength using LRFD or ASD
323 load combinations, kips (N) ...................................................... App. 6.2.2
324 Pc Available compressive strength, φPn or Pn/Ω, determined in accordance
325 with Chapter E, kips (N) H1.1
326 Pc Available tensile strength, φPn or Pn/Ω, determine in accordance with
327 Chapter D, kips (N)............................................................................ H1.2
328 Pc Available compressive strength in plane of bending, kips (N) .......... H1.3
329 Pc Available tensile or compressive strength, φPn or Pn/Ω, determined in
330 accordance with Chapter D or E, kips (N) ......................................... H3.2
331 Pc Available axial strength for the limit state of tensile rupture of the net
332 section at the location of bolt holes φPn or Pn/Ω, determined in accord-
333 ance with Section D2(b), kips (N) ........................................................ H4
334 Pc Allowable axial strength, determined in accordance with Section I2, kips
335 (N)........................................................................................................... I5
336 Pc Design axial strength, determined in accordance with Section I2, kips
337 (N)........................................................................................................... I5
338 Pcy Available compressive strength out of the plane of bending, kips (N)
339 H1.3
340 Pe Elastic critical buckling load determined in accordance with Chapter C
341 or Appendix 7, kips (N) ..................................................................... I2.1b
342 Pe story Elastic critical buckling strength for the story in the direction of
343 translation being considered, kips (N) ....................................... App 8.2.2
344 Pe1 Elastic critical buckling strength of the member in the plane of bending,
345 kips (N) .................................................................................... App. 8.2.1
346 Plt First-order axial force using LRFD or ASD load combinations, due to
347 lateral translation of the structure only, kips (N) ......................... App. 8.2
20 NE
348 Pmf Total vertical load in columns in the story that are part of moment
349 frames, if any, in the direction of translation being considered, kips (N) .. .
350 .................................................................................................. App. 8.2.2
20 O
351 Pn Nominal axial strength, kips (N) .......................................................... D2
352 Pn Nominal compressive strength, kips (N) ...............................................E1
353 Nominal axial compressive strength of zero length, doubly symmetric,
3, W
Pno
354 axially loaded composite member, kips (N) ...................................... I2.1b
355 Available compressive strength of axially loaded doubly symmetric
E
Pno
356 filled composite members, kips (N) ................................................... I2.2b
ST I
U EV
360 Pnt First-order axial force using LRFD and ASD load combinations, with the
361 structure restrained against lateral translation, kips (N)............... App. 8.2
AU IC
364 lengths adjacent to the point brace, using LRFD or ASD load combina-
365 tions, kips (N) ........................................................................... App. 6.2.2
366 Pr Required axial compressive strength using LRFD or ASD load
PU
387 Pr Required axial strength using LRFD or ASD load combinations, kips (N)
388 ...........................................................................................................J10.6
389 Pro Required axial strength in chord at a joint, on the side of joint with lower
390 compression stress, kips (N) .................................................... Table K2.1
391 Pstory Total vertical load supported by the story using LRFD or ASD load
392 combinations, as applicable, including loads in columns that are not part
393 of the lateral force-resisting system, kips (N) ........................... App. 8.2.2
394 Pu Required axial strength in chord using LRFD load combinations, kips
395 (N)............................................................................................ Table K2.1
396 Pu Required axial strength in compression using LRFD load combinations,
397 kips (N) .................................................................................. App. 1.3.2b
398 Py Axial yield strength of the column, kips (N) ....................................J10.6
399 Qct Available tensile strength, determined in accordance with Section I8.3b,
400 kips (N) .............................................................................................. I8.3c
401 Qcv Available shear strength, determined in accordance with Section I8.3a,
402 kips (N) .............................................................................................. I8.3c
403 Qf Chord-stress interaction parameter ...................................................J10.3
20 NE
404 Qg Gapped truss joint parameter accounting for geometric effects .................
405 ................................................................................................. Table K3.1
406 Qn Nominal shear strength of one steel headed stud or steel channel anchor,
20 O
407 kips (N) ........................................................................................... I3.2d.1
408 Qnt Nominal tensile strength of steel headed stud anchor, kips (N) ......... I8.3b
409 Nominal shear strength of steel headed stud anchor, kips (N) ........... I8.3a
3, W
Qnv
410 Qrt Required tensile strength, kips (N) .................................................... I8.3b
411 Required shear strength, kips (N) ...................................................... I8.3c
E
Qrv
412 R Radius of joint surface, in. (mm) .............................................. Table J2.2
ST I
Ra
414 RFIL Reduction factor for joints using a pair of transverse fillet welds only .....
415 ..................................................................................................... App. 3.3
G R
442 Sc Elastic section modulus to the toe in compression relative to the axis of
443 bending, in.3 (mm3) ........................................................................... F10.3
444 Se Effective section modulus determined with the effective width of the
445 compression flange, in.3 (mm3) ........................................................... F7.2
446 Sip Effective elastic section modulus of welds for in-plane bending, in.3
447 (mm3) .................................................................................................... K5
448 Smin Minimum elastic section modulus relative to the axis of bending, in.3
449 (mm3) .................................................................................................. F12
450 Sx Elastic section modulus taken about the x-axis, in.3 (mm3) ................ F2.2
451 Sx Minimum elastic section modulus taken about the x-axis, in.3 (mm3) .......
452 .......................................................................................................... F13.1
453 Sop Effective elastic section modulus of welds for out-of-plane bending, in.3
454 (mm3) .................................................................................................... K5
455 Sxc, Sxt Elastic section modulus referred to compression and tension flanges,
456 respectively, in.3 (mm3) .......................................................... Table B4.1b
457 Sy Elastic section modulus taken about the y-axis, in.3 (mm3) ................ F6.1
458 T Elevated temperature of steel due to unintended fire exposure,°F (°C) ..... .
20 NE
459 ................................................................................................ App. 4.2.4d
460 Ta Required tension force using ASD load combinations, kips (kN) .......J3.9
461 Tb Minimum fastener tension given in Table J3.1 or J3.1M, kips (kN) ...J3.8
20 O
462 Tc Available torsional strength, φTn or Tn/Ω, determined in accordance with
463 Section H3.1, kip-in. (N-mm) ............................................................ H3.2
3, W
464 Tn Nominal torsional strength, kip-in. (N-mm) ...................................... H3.1
465 Tr Required torsional strength, determined in accordance with Chapter C,
E
466 using LRFD or ASD load combinations, kip-in. (N-mm) ................. H3.2
467 Tu Required tension force using LRFD load combinations, kips (kN) .....J3.9
ST I
U EV
471 .............................................................................................................J4.3
472 Up Stress index for primary members ............................................... App. 2.2
AU IC
473 V′ Nominal shear force between the steel beam and the concrete slab
474 transferred by steel anchors, kips (N) ................................................ I3.2d
BL
475 Vbr Required shear strength of the bracing system in the direction
476 perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the column, kips (N) .................
477 .................................................................................................. App. 6.2.1
PU
497 a Clear distance between transverse stiffeners, in. (mm) ..................... F13.2
498 a Distance between connectors, in. (mm) .............................................. E6.1
499 a Shortest distance from edge of pin hole to edge of member measured
500 parallel to the direction of force, in. (mm) ......................................... D5.1
501 a Half the length of the nonwelded root face in the direction of the
502 thickness of the tension-loaded plate, in. (mm) ........................... App. 3.3
503 a′ Weld length along both edges of the cover plate termination to the beam
504 or girder, in. (mm) ............................................................................ F13.3
505 aw Ratio of two times the web area in compression due to application of
506 major axis bending moment alone to the area of the compression flange
507 components ......................................................................................... F4.2
508 b Full width of leg in compression, in. (mm)....................................... F10.3
509 b Largest clear distance between rows of steel anchors or ties, in. (mm)
510 ............................................................................................. I1.6a
511 b Width of compression element as shown in Table B4.1, in. (mm) .... B4.1
512 b Width of the element, in. (mm)........................................................... E7.1
513 b Width of compression flange as defined in Section B4.1b, in. (mm)
20 NE
514 ............................................................................................................ F7.2
515 b Width of the leg resisting the shear force or depth of tee stem, in. (mm)
516 .............................................................................................................. G3
20 O
517 b Width of leg, in. (mm) ...................................................................... F10.2
518 bcf Width of column flange, in. (mm) .....................................................J10.6
519 Effectivewidth, in. (mm) ..................................................................... E7.1
3, W
be
520 be Effective edge distance for calculation of tensile rupture strength of pin-
521 connected member, in. (mm) ............................................................. D5.1
E
528 bs Stiffener width for one-sided stiffeners; twice the individual stiffener
529 width for pairs of stiffeners, in. (mm) ..................................... App. 6.3.2a
BL
530 c Distance from the neutral axis to the extreme compressive fibers, in.
531 (mm) ...................................................................................... App. 6.3.2a
532 c1 Effective width imperfection adjustment factor determined from Table
PU
553 fc′ Specified compressive strength of concrete, ksi (MPa) ................... I1.3fra
554 Required axial stress at the point of consideration, determined in
555 accordance with Chapter C, using LRFD or ASD load combinations, ksi
556 (MPa) ................................................................................................... H2
557 frbw. frbz Required flexural stress at the point of consideration, determined in
558 accordance with Chapter C, using LRFD or ASD load combinations, ksi
559 (MPa) ................................................................................................... H2
560 frv Required shear stress using LRFD or ASD load combinations, ksi (MPa) .
561 .............................................................................................................J3.7
562 g Transverse center-to-center spacing (gage) between fastener gage lines,
563 in. (mm) ........................................................................................... B4.3b
564 g Gap between toes of branch members in a gapped K-connection,
565 neglecting the welds, in. (mm)........................................................... K3.1
566 h Width of compression element as shown in Table B4.1, in. (mm) .... B4.1
567 h Depth of web, as defined in Section B4.1b, in. (mm) ......................... F7.3
568 h Clear distance between flanges less the fillet at each flange, in. (mm)
569 ........................................................................................................... G2.1
20 NE
570 h For built-up welded sections, the clear distance between flanges, in.
571 (mm) ................................................................................................ G2.1
572 h For built-up bolted sections, the distance between fastener lines, in.
20 O
573 (mm) ................................................................................................ G2.1
574 h Width resisting the shear force, taken as the clear distance between the
575 flanges less the inside corner radius on each side for HSS or the clear
3, W
576 distance between flanges for box sections, in. (mm) ............................ G4
E
577 h Flat width of longer side, as defined in Section B4.1b(d), in. (mm) .. H3.1
578 hc Twice the distance from the center of gravity to the following: the inside
ST I
U EV
579 face of the compression flange less the fillet or corner radius, for rolled
580 shapes; the nearest line of fasteners at the compression flange or the
581 inside faces of the compression flange when welds are used, for built-up
G R
586 hp Twice the distance from the plastic neutral axis to the nearest line of
587 fasteners at the compression flange or the inside face of the compression
588 flange when welds are used, in. (mm) ............................................. B4.1b
PU
589 k Distance from outer face of flange to the web toe of fillet, in. (mm).........
590 ...........................................................................................................J10.2
591 kc Coefficient for slender unstiffened elements ........................... Table B4.1
592 ksc Slip-critical combined tension and shear coefficient ..........................J3.9
593 kv Web plate shear buckling coefficient ................................................ G2.1
594 l Actual length of end-loaded weld, in. (mm) ........................................J2.2
595 l Length of connection, in. (mm) ............................................... Table D3.1
596 lb Bearing length of the load, measured parallel to the axis of the HSS
597 member (or measured across the width of the HSS in the case of loaded
598 cap plates), in. (mm) ......................................................................... K2.1
599 lb Length of bearing, in. (mm) ................................................................... J7
600 la Length of channel anchor, in. (mm)................................................... I8.2b
601 lc Clear distance, in the direction of the force, between the edge of the hole
602 and the edge of the adjacent hole or edge of the material, in. (mm) ..........
603 ...........................................................................................................J3.10
604 le Total effective weld length of groove and fillet welds to HSS for weld
605 strength calculations, in. (mm).............................................................. K5
606 lend Distance from the near side of the connecting branch or plate to end of
607 chord, in. (mm) ................................................................................. K1.1
608 lov Overlap length measured along the connecting face of the chord beneath
609 the two branches, in. (mm) ................................................................ K3.1
610 lp Projected length of the overlapping branch on the chord, in. (mm) ... K3.1
611
612 n Number of braced points within the span ............................... App. 6.3.2a
613 n Threads per inch (per mm) .......................................................... App. 3.4
614 nb Number of bolts carrying the applied tension ......................................J3.9
615 ns Number of slip planes required to permit the connection to slip .........J3.8
616 nSR Number of stress range fluctuations in design life ....................... App. 3.3
617 p Pitch, in. per thread (mm per thread) ........................................... App. 3.4
618 pb Perimeter of the steel-concrete bond interface within the composite cross
619 section, in. (mm) ................................................................................ I6.3c
620 r Radius of gyration, in. (mm) ..................................................................E2
621 r Retention factor depending on bottom flange temperature .... App. 4.2.4d
622 ra Radius of gyration about the geometric axis parallel to the connected leg,
623 in. (mm) .................................................................................................E5
624 ri Least radius of gyration of individual component, in. (mm) .............. E6.1
20 NE
625 ro Polar radius of gyration about the shear center, in. (mm) ......................E4
626 rt Effective radius of gyration for lateral-torsional buckling. For I-shapes
627 with a channel cap or a cover plate attached to the compression flange,
20 O
628 radius of gyration of the flange components in flexural compression plus
629 one-third of the web area in compression due to application of major axis
3, W
630 bending moment alone, in. (mm) ........................................................ F4.2
631 rx Radius of gyration about the x-axis, in. (mm)........................................E4
E
632 ry Radius of gyration about y-axis, in. (mm) .............................................E4
633 rz Radius of gyration about the minor principal axis, in. (mm) .................E5
ST I
U EV
641 t Width of rectangular bar parallel to axis of bending, in. (mm) ......... F11.1
642 t Thickness of connected material, in. (mm) ........................................J3.10
643 t Thickness of plate, in. (mm) .............................................................. D5.1
PU
20 NE
681 β Length reduction factor given by Equation J2-1 ................................J2.2b
682 β Width ratio; the ratio of branch diameter to chord diameter for round
683 HSS; the ratio of overall branch width to chord width for rectangular
20 O
684 HSS ................................................................................................ K1.1
685 βT Overall brace system required stiffness, kip-in./rad (N-mm/rad) .............
3, W
686 ..................................................................................... App. 6.3.2a
687 βbr Required shear stiffness of the bracing system, kip/in. (N/mm) ................
E
688 .................................................................................................. App. 6.2.1
689 βbr Required flexural stiffness of the brace, kip/in. (N/mm) ........ App. 6.3.2a
ST I
U EV
690 βeff Effective width ratio; the sum of the perimeters of the two branch
691 members in a K-connection divided by eight times the chord width .........
692 ........................................................................................................... K1.1
G R
20 NE
735 φv Resistance factor for shear ................................................................... G1
736 φv Resistance factor for steel headed stud anchor in shear ..................... I8.3a
20 O
737 Ω Safety factor ....................................................................................... B3.2
738 ΩB Safety factor for bearing on concrete ................................................. I6.3a
739 Ωb Safety factor for flexure ......................................................................... I5
3, W
740 Ωc Safety factor for compression ................................................................. I5
741 Ωc Safety factor for axially loaded composite columns .......................... I2.1b
E
743 Ωt Safety factor for steel headed stud anchor in tension ......................... I8.3b
744 Ωsf Safety factor for shear on the failure path ......................................... D5.1
745 ΩT Safety factor for torsion ..................................................................... H3.1
G R
750 ρw Maximum shear ratio within the web panels on each side of the
751 transverse stiffener……………………………………………. ........ G2.4
752 ρsr Minimum reinforcement ratio for longitudinal reinforcing ................. I2.1
PU
753 θ Angle between the line of action of the required force and the weld
754 longitudinal axis, degrees ....................................................................J2.4
755 θ Acute angle between the branch and chord, degrees ......................... K3.1
756
1 GLOSSARY
2
3
4 Notes:
5 (1) Terms designated with † are common AISI-AISC terms that are coordinated
6 between the two standards development organizations.
7 (2) Terms designated with * are usually qualified by the type of load effect, for
8 example, nominal tensile strength, available compressive strength, and design
9 flexural strength.
10 (3) Terms designated with ** are usually qualified by the type of component, for
11 example, web local buckling, and flange local bending.
12
13 Active fire protection. Building materials and systems that are activated by a
14 fire to mitigate adverse effects or to notify people to take action to
15 mitigate adverse effects.
16 Allowable strength*†. Nominal strength divided by the safety factor, Rn/Ω.
17 Allowable stress*. Allowable strength divided by the applicable section
20 NE
18 property, such as section modulus or cross-sectional area.
19 Anchor rod. A mechanical device that is either cast or drilled and chemically
20 adhered, grouted or wedged into concrete and/or masonry for the purpose
20 O
21 of the subsequent attachment of structural steel.
22 Applicable building code†. Building code under which the structure is
3, W
23 designed.
24 Approval documents. The structural steel shop drawings, erection drawings,
E
25 and embedment drawings, or where the parties have agreed in the contract
ST I
30 strength of the component under the action of the ASD load combinations.
31 ASD load combination†. Load combination in the applicable building code
AU IC
55 Box section. Square or rectangular doubly symmetric member made with four
56 plates welded together at the corners such that it behaves as a single
57 member.
58 Braced frame†. Essentially vertical truss system that provides resistance to
59 lateral forces and provides stability for the structural system.
60 Bracing. Member or system that provides stiffness and strength to limit the out-
61 of-plane movement of another member at a brace point.
62 Branch member. In an HSS connection, member that terminates at a chord
63 member or main member.
64 Buckling†. Limit state of sudden change in the geometry of a structure or any of
65 its elements under a critical loading condition.
66 Buckling strength. Strength for instability limit states.
67 Built-up member, cross section, section, shape. Member, cross section, section
68 or shape fabricated from structural steel elements that are welded or bolted
69 together.
70 Camber. Curvature fabricated into a beam or truss so as to compensate for
71 deflection induced by loads.
20 NE
72 Charpy V-notch impact test. Standard dynamic test measuring notch toughness
73 of a specimen.
74 Chord member. In an HSS connection, primary member that extends through a
20 O
75 truss connection.
76 Cladding. Exterior covering of structure.
77 Cold-formed steel structural member†. Shape manufactured by press-braking
3, W
78 blanks sheared from sheets, cut lengths of coils or plates, or by roll forming
79 cold- or hot-rolled coils or sheets; both forming operations being performed
E
80 at ambient room temperature, that is, without manifest addition of heat such
ST I
82 Collector. Also known as drag strut; member that serves to transfer loads
83 between floor diaphragms and the members of the lateral force-resisting
G R
84 system.
85 Column. Nominally vertical structural member that has the primary function of
AU IC
20 NE
127 parties that are involved in bidding, fabricating, and erecting structural
128 steel. These documents normally include the design documents, the
129 specifications, and the contract.
20 O
130 Cope. Cutout made in a structural member to remove a flange and conform to
131 the shape of an intersecting member.
132 Cover plate. Plate welded or bolted to the flange of a member to increase cross-
3, W
133 sectional area, section modulus or moment of inertia.
134 Cross connection. HSS connection in which forces in branch members or
E
135 connecting elements transverse to the main member are primarily equili-
ST I
139 structure for the purpose of achieving the desired strength, serviceability,
140 durability, constructability, economy and other desired characteris-
AU IC
141 tics. Design for strength, as used in this Specification, includes analysis to
142 determine required strength and proportioning to have adequate available
143 strength.
BL
144 Design-basis fire. Set of conditions that define the development of a fire and
145 the spread of combustion products throughout a building or portion
PU
146 thereof.
147 Design documents. The graphic and pictorial portions of the contract
148 documents showing the design, location, and dimensions of work. These
149 documents generally include, but are not necessarily limited to, plans,
150 elevations, sections, details, schedules, diagrams, and notes. Where the
151 parties have agreed in the contract documents to provide digital model(s), a
152 dimensionally accurate 3D digital model of the structure that conveys the
153 structural steel requirements given in AISC Code of Standard Practice for
154 Steel Buildings and Bridges, Section 3.1. A combination of drawings and
155 digital models also may be provided.
156 Design load†. Applied load determined in accordance with either LRFD load
157 combinations or ASD load combinations, as applicable.
158 Design strength*†. Resistance factor multiplied by the nominal strength, φRn.
159 Design wall thickness. HSS wall thickness assumed in the determination of
160 section properties.
161 Diagonal stiffener. Web stiffener at column panel zone oriented diagonally to
162 the flanges, on one or both sides of the web.
163 Diaphragm†. Roof, floor or other membrane or bracing system that transfers
164 in-plane forces to the lateral force-resisting system.
20 NE
182 Effective section modulus. Section modulus reduced to account for buckling of
183 slender compression elements.
184 Effective width. Reduced width of a plate or slab with an assumed uniform
20 O
185 stress distribution which produces the same effect on the behavior of a
186 structural member as the actual plate or slab width with its nonuniform
187 stress distribution.
3, W
188 Elastic analysis. Structural analysis based on the assumption that the structure
189 returns to its original geometry on removal of the load.
E
196 End return. Length of fillet weld that continues around a corner in the same
197 plane.
198 Engineer of record. Licensed professional responsible for sealing the design
BL
201 are prepared by the fabricator to show the location and attachment of the
202 individual structural steel shipping pieces. Where the parties have agreed in
203 the contract documents to provide digital model(s), a dimensionally accurate
204 3D digital model produced to convey the information necessary to erect the
205 structural steel, which may be the same digital model as the fabrication
206 model. A combination of drawings and digital models also may be provided.
207 Expansion rocker. Support with curved surface on which a member bears that
208 is able to tilt to accommodate expansion.
209 Expansion roller. Round steel bar on which a member bears that is able to roll
210 to accommodate expansion.
211 Eyebar. Pin-connected tension member of uniform thickness, with forged or
212 thermally cut head of greater width than the body, proportioned to provide
213 approximately equal strength in the head and body.
214 Fabrication documents. The shop drawings of the individual structural steel
215 shipping pieces that are to be produced in the fabrication shop. Where the
216 parties have agreed in the contract documents to provide digital model(s), a
217 dimensionally accurate 3D digital model produced to convey the infor-
218 mation necessary to fabricate the structural steel, which may be the same
219 digital model as the erection model. A combination of drawings and digital
220 models also may be provided.
221 Factored load †. Product of a load factor and the nominal load.
222 Fastener. Generic term for bolts, rivets or other connecting devices.
223 Fatigue†.Limit state of crack initiation and growth resulting from repeated
224 application of live loads.
225 Faying surface. Contact surface of connection elements transmitting a shear
226 force.
227 Filled composite member. Composite member consisting of an HSS or box
228 section filled with structural concrete.
229 Filler metal. Metal or alloy added in making a welded joint.
230 Filler. Plate used to build up the thickness of one component.
231 Fillet weld reinforcement. Fillet welds added to groove welds.
232 Fillet weld. Weld of generally triangular cross section made between
233 intersecting surfaces of elements.
234 Finished surface. Surfaces fabricated with a roughness height value measured
235 in accordance with ANSI/ASME B46.1 that is equal to or less than 500.
236 Fire. Destructive burning, as manifested by any or all of the following: light,
237 flame, heat or smoke.
20 NE
238 Fire barrier. Element of construction formed of fire-resisting materials and
239 tested in accordance with an approved standard fire resistance test, to
240 demonstrate compliance with the applicable building code.
20 O
241 Fire resistance. Property of assemblies that prevents or retards the passage of
242 excessive heat, hot gases or flames under conditions of use and enables the
243 assemblies to continue to perform a stipulated function.
3, W
244 First-order analysis. Structural analysis in which equilibrium conditions are
245 formulated on the undeformed structure; second-order effects are neglect-
E
246 ed.
ST I
247 Fitted bearing stiffener. Stiffener used at a support or concentrated load that fits
U EV
248 tightly against one or both flanges of a beam so as to transmit load through
249 bearing.
G R
250 Flare bevel groove weld. Weld in a groove formed by a member with a curved
251 surface in contact with a planar member.
AU IC
252 Flare V-groove weld. Weld in a groove formed by two members with curved
253 surfaces.
254 Flashover. Transition to a state of total surface involvement in a fire of
BL
257 radius. In the absence of knowledge of the corner radius, the flat width is
258 permitted to be taken as the total section width minus three times the
259 thickness.
260 Flexibility. The ratio of the displacement (or rotation) to the applied force (or
261 moment), which is the inverse of the stiffness.
262 Flexural buckling†. Buckling mode in which a compression member deflects
263 laterally without twist or change in cross-sectional shape.
264 Flexural-torsional buckling†. Buckling mode in which a compression member
265 bends and twists simultaneously without change in cross-sectional shape.
266 Force. Resultant of distribution of stress over a prescribed area.
267 Formed steel deck. In composite construction, steel cold formed into a decking
268 profile used as a permanent concrete form.
269 Fully-restrained moment connection. Connection capable of transferring
270 moment with negligible rotation between connected members.
271 Gage. Transverse center-to-center spacing of fasteners.
272 Gapped connection. HSS truss connection with a gap or space on the chord
273 face between intersecting branch members.
274 Geometric axis. Axis parallel to web, flange or angle leg.
275 Girder filler. In a composite floor system constructed using a formed steel
276 deck, narrow piece of sheet steel used as a fill between the edge of a deck
277 sheet and the flange of a girder.
278 Girder. See Beam.
279 Gouge. Relatively smooth surface groove or cavity resulting from plastic
280 deformation or removal of material.
281 Gravity load. Load acting in the downward direction, such as dead and live
282 loads.
283 Grip (of bolt). Thickness of material through which a bolt passes.
284 Groove weld. Weld in a groove between connection elements. See also AWS
285 D1.1/D1.1M.
286 Gusset plate. Plate element connecting truss members or a strut or brace to a
287 beam or column.
288 Heat flux. Radiant energy per unit surface area.
289 Heat release rate. Rate at which thermal energy is generated by a burning
290 material.
291 High-strength bolt. An ASTM F3125 or F3148 bolt, or an alternative design
20 NE
292 bolt that meets the requirements in RCSC Section 2.13.
293 Horizontal shear. In a composite beam, force at the interface between steel and
294 concrete surfaces.
20 O
295 HSS (hollow structural section). Square, rectangular or round hollow structural
296 steel section produced in accordance with one of the product specifications
297 in Section A3.1a(b).
3, W
298 Inelastic analysis. Structural analysis that takes into account inelastic material
299 behavior, including plastic analysis.
E
300 Initial tension. Minimum bolt tension attained before application of the
ST I
301 required rotation when using the combined method to pretension bolting
U EV
302 assemblies.
303 In-plane instability†. Limit state involving buckling in the plane of the frame or
G R
311 Issuing entity. Any party on a project that issues structural design documents
312 and specifications provided by the engineer of record.
313 Issued for construction. The engineer of record’s designation that the design
314 documents are authorized to be used to construct the steel structure
315 depicted in the design documents, and that these design documents
316 incorporate the information that is to be provided per the requirements of
317 Section A4.
318 Joint†. Area where two or more ends, surfaces, or edges are attached.
319 Categorized by type of fastener or weld used and method of force transfer.
320 Joint eccentricity. In an HSS truss connection, perpendicular distance from
321 chord member center-of-gravity to intersection of branch member work
322 points.
323 k-area. The region of the web that extends from the tangent point of the web
324 and the flange-web fillet (AISC k dimension) a distance 12 in. (38 mm)
325 into the web beyond the k dimension.
326 K-connection. HSS connection in which forces in branch members or
327 connecting elements transverse to the main member are primarily equilib-
328 riated by forces in other branch members or connecting elements on the
329 same side of the main member.
330 Lacing. Plate, angle or other steel shape, in a lattice configuration, that connects
331 two steel shapes together.
332 Lap joint. Joint between two overlapping connection elements in parallel
333 planes.
334 Lateral bracing. Member or system that is designed to inhibit lateral buckling
335 or lateral-torsional buckling of structural members.
336 Lateral force-resisting system. Structural system designed to resist lateral loads
337 and provide stability for the structure as a whole.
338 Lateral load. Load acting in a lateral direction, such as wind or earthquake
339 effects.
340 Lateral-torsional buckling†. Buckling mode of a flexural member involving
341 deflection out of the plane of bending occurring simultaneously with twist
342 about the shear center of the cross section.
343 Leaning column. Column designed to carry gravity loads only, with
344 connections that are not intended to provide resistance to lateral loads.
345 Length effects. Consideration of the reduction in strength of a member based on
346 its unbraced length.
20 NE
347 Lightweight concrete. Structural concrete with an equilibrium density of 115
348 lb/ft3 (1 840 kg/m3) or less, as determined by ASTM C567.
349 Limit state†. Condition in which a structure or component becomes unfit for
20 O
350 service and is judged either to be no longer useful for its intended function
351 (serviceability limit state) or to have reached its ultimate load-carrying
352 capacity (strength limit state).
3, W
353 Load†. Force or other action that results from the weight of building materials,
354 occupants and their possessions, environmental effects, differential
E
359 actual load, for uncertainties in the analysis that transforms the load into a
360 load effect and for the probability that more than one extreme load will
AU IC
385 Moment frame†. Framing system that provides resistance to lateral loads and
386 provides stability to the structural system, primarily by shear and flexure of
387 the framing members and their connections.
388 Negative flexural strength. Flexural strength of a composite beam in regions
389 with tension due to flexure on the top surface.
390 Net area. Gross area reduced to account for removed material.
391 Nominal dimension. Designated or theoretical dimension, as in tables of section
392 properties.
393 Nominal load†. Magnitude of the load specified by the applicable building
394 code.
395 Nominal rib height. In a formed steel deck, height of deck measured from the
396 underside of the lowest point to the top of the highest point.
397 Nominal strength*†. Strength of a structure or component (without the
398 resistance factor or safety factor applied) to resist load effects, as deter-
399 mined in accordance with this specification.
400 Noncompact section. Section that is not able to reach the plastic moment before
401 inelastic local buckling occurs as defined by element width to thickness
20 NE
402 ratio greater than λp and less than or equal to λr.
403 Nondestructive testing. Inspection procedure wherein no material is destroyed
404 and the integrity of the material or component is not affected.
20 O
405 Notch toughness. Energy absorbed at a specified temperature as measured in
406 the Charpy V-notch impact test.
407 Notional load. Virtual load applied in a structural analysis to account for
3, W
408 destabilizing effects that are not otherwise accounted for in the design
409 provisions.
E
414 Panel brace. Brace that controls the relative movement of two adjacent brace
415 points along the length of a beam or column or the relative lateral dis-
AU IC
421 penetration is intentionally less than the complete thickness of the connect-
422 ed element.
423 Partially restrained moment connection. Connection capable of transferring
424 moment with rotation between connected members that is not negligible.
425 Percent elongation. Measure of ductility, determined in a tensile test as the
426 maximum elongation of the gage length divided by the original gage
427 length expressed as a percentage.
428 Pipe. See HSS.
429 Pitch. Longitudinal center-to-center spacing of fasteners. Center-to-center
430 spacing of bolt threads along axis of bolt.
431 Plastic analysis. Structural analysis based on the assumption of rigid-plastic
432 behavior, that is, that equilibrium is satisfied and the stress is at or below
433 the yield stress throughout the structure.
434 Plastic hinge. Fully yielded zone that forms in a structural member when the
435 plastic moment is attained.
436 Plastic moment. Theoretical resisting moment developed within a fully yielded
437 cross section.
438 Plastic stress distribution method. In a composite member, method for
439 determining stresses assuming that the steel section and the concrete in the
440 cross section are fully plastic.
20 NE
458 Prying action. Amplification of the tension force in a bolt caused by leverage
459 between the point of applied load, the bolt, and the reaction of the connect-
460 ed elements.
20 O
461 Punching load. In an HSS connection, component of branch member force
462 perpendicular to a chord.
463 P-δ effect. Effect of loads acting on the deflected shape of a member between
3, W
464 joints or nodes.
465 P-Δ effect. Effect of loads acting on the displaced location of joints or nodes in
E
466 a structure. In tiered building structures, this is the effect of loads acting on
ST I
468 Quality assurance. Monitoring and inspection tasks to ensure that the material
469 provided and work performed by the fabricator and erector meet the
G R
475 Quality assurance plan (QAP). Program in which the agency or firm
476 responsible for quality assurance maintains detailed monitoring and
PU
20 NE
514 the nominal strength, deviations of the actual load from the nominal load,
515 uncertainties in the analysis that transforms the load into a load effect, and
516 for the manner and consequences of failure.
20 O
517 Second-order effect. Effect of loads acting on the deformed configuration of a
518 structure; includes P-δ effect and P-Δ effect.
3, W
519 Seismic force-resisting system. That part of the structural system that has been
520 considered in the design to provide the required resistance to the seismic
E
521 forces prescribed in ASCE/SEI 7.
522 Seismic response modification factor. Factor that reduces seismic load effects
ST I
U EV
526 Service load†. Load under which serviceability limit states are evaluated.
527 Serviceability limit state†. Limiting condition affecting the ability of a structure
AU IC
530 Shear buckling†. Buckling mode in which a plate element, such as the web of a
531 beam, deforms under pure shear applied in the plane of the plate.
532 Shear lag. Nonuniform tensile stress distribution in a member or connecting
PU
553 Slender-element section. Section that is able to only reach a strength limited by
554 local buckling of an element defined by element width to thickness ratio
555 greater than λr.
556 Slip. In a bolted connection, limit state of relative motion of connected parts
557 prior to the attainment of the available strength of the connection.
558 Slip-critical connection. Bolted connection designed to resist movement by
559 friction on the faying surface of the connection under the clamping force of
560 the bolts.
561 Slot weld. Weld made in an elongated hole fusing an element to another
562 element.
563 Snug-tightened joint. Joint with the connected plies in firm contact as specified
564 in Chapter J.
565 Specifications. The portion of the construction documents that consist of the
566 written requirements for materials, standards and workmanship.
567 Specified minimum tensile strength. Lower limit of tensile strength specified for
568 a material as defined by ASTM.
569 Specified minimum yield stress†. Lower limit of yield stress specified for a
20 NE
570 material as defined by ASTM.
571 Splice. Connection between two structural elements joined at their ends to form
572 a single, longer element.
20 O
573 Stability. Condition in the loading of a structural component, frame or structure
574 in which a slight disturbance in the loads or geometry does not produce
575 large displacements.
3, W
576 Steel anchor. Headed stud or hot rolled channel welded to a steel member and
577 embedded in the concrete of a composite member to transmit shear, tension
E
578 or a combination of shear and tension, at the interface of the two materials.
ST I
584 ratio of the applied force (or moment) to the corresponding displacement
585 (or rotation).
586 Story drift. Horizontal deflection at the top of the story relative to the bottom of
BL
20 NE
624 forces develop in the web and compressive forces develop in the transverse
625 stiffeners in a manner similar to a Pratt truss.
626 Thermally cut. Cut with gas, plasma or laser.
20 O
627 Tie plate. Plate element used to join two parallel components of a built-up
628 column, girder or strut rigidly connected to the parallel components and
629 designed to transmit shear between them.
3, W
630 Toe of fillet. Junction of a fillet weld face and base metal. Tangent point of a
631 fillet in a rolled shape.
E
636 ment in the form of closed ties or welded wire fabric providing confine-
637 ment for the concrete surrounding the steel shape.
AU IC
643 mined amount after the bolt has been snug tightened.
644 Unbraced length. Distance between braced points of a member, measured
645 between the centers of gravity of the bracing members.
646 Uneven load distribution. In an HSS connection, condition in which the stress
647 is not distributed uniformly through the cross section of connected
648 elements.
649 Unframed end. The end of a member not restrained against rotation by
650 stiffeners or connection elements.
651 Unstiffened element. Flat compression element with an adjoining out-of-plane
652 element along one edge parallel to the direction of loading.
653 Unrestrained construction. Floor and roof assemblies and individual beams in
654 buildings that are assumed to be free to rotate and expand throughout the
655 range of anticipated elevated temperatures.
656 Weak axis. Minor principal centroidal axis of a cross section.
657 Weathering steel. High-strength, low-alloy steel that, with sufficient
658 precautions, is able to be used in typical atmospheric exposures (not
659 marine) without protective paint coating.
660 Web local crippling†. Limit state of local failure of web plate in the immediate
661 vicinity of a concentrated load or reaction.
662 Web sidesway buckling. Limit state of lateral buckling of the tension flange
663 opposite the location of a concentrated compression force.
664 Weld access hole. An opening that permits access for welding, backgouging, or
665 for insertion of backing.
666 Weld metal. Portion of a fusion weld that has been completely melted during
667 welding. Weld metal has elements of filler metal and base metal melted in
668 the weld thermal cycle.
669 Weld root. See root of joint.
670 Y-connection. HSS connection in which the branch member or connecting
671 element is not perpendicular to the main member and in which forces
672 transverse to the main member are primarily equilibrated by shear in the
673 main member.
674 Yield moment†. In a member subjected to bending, the moment at which the
675 extreme outer fiber first attains the yield stress.
676 Yield point†. First stress in a material at which an increase in strain occurs
677 without an increase in stress as defined by ASTM.
678 Yield strength†. Stress at which a material exhibits a specified limiting
20 NE
679 deviation from the proportionality of stress to strain as defined by ASTM.
680 Yield stress†. Generic term to denote either yield point or yield strength, as
681 applicable for the material.
20 O
682 Yielding†. Limit state of inelastic deformation that occurs when the yield stress
683 is reached.
684 Yielding (plastic moment)†. Yielding throughout the cross section of a member
3, W
685 as the bending moment reaches the plastic moment.
686 Yielding (yield moment)†. Yielding at the extreme fiber on the cross section of
E
687 a member when the bending moment reaches the yield moment.
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU
1 ABBREVIATIONS
2
3 The following abbreviations appear in this Specification. The abbreviations are
4 written out where they first appear within a Section.
5
6 ACI (American Concrete Institute)
7 AHJ (authority having jurisdiction)
8 AISC (American Institute of Steel Construction)
9 AISI (American Iron and Steel Institute)
10 ANSI (American National Standards Institute)
11 ASCE (American Society of Civil Engineers)
12 ASD (allowable strength design)
13 ASME (American Society of Mechanical Engineers)
14 ASNT (American Society for Nondestructive Testing)
15 AWI (associate welding inspector)
16 AWS (American Welding Society)
17 CJP (complete joint penetration)
20 NE
18 CVN (Charpy V-notch)
19 ENA (elastic neutral axis)
20 EOR (engineer of record)
20 O
21 ERW (electric resistance welded)
22 FCAW (flux cored arc welding)
3, W
23 FR (fully restrained)
24 GMAW (gas metal arc welding)
E
25 HSLA (high-strength low-alloy)
26 HSS (hollow structural section)
ST I
U EV
34 PR (partially restrained)
35 PT (penetrant testing)
36 QA (quality assurance)
PU
2 CHAPTER A
3 GENERAL PROVISIONS
4
5 This chapter states the scope of this Specification, lists referenced specifications,
6 codes and standards, and provides requirements for materials and structural design
7 documents.
8
9 The chapter is organized as follows:
10
11 A1. Scope
12 A2. Referenced Specifications, Codes and Standards
13 A3. Material
14 A4. Structural Design Documents and Specifications
20 NE
15
16 A1. SCOPE
17
20 O
18 The Specification for Structural Steel Buildings (ANSI/AISC 360), hereafter
19 referred to as this Specification, shall apply to the design, fabrication,
3, W
20 erection, and quality of the structural steel system or systems with structural
21 steel acting compositely with reinforced concrete, where the steel elements
E
22 are defined in Section 2.1 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel
23 Buildings and Bridges (ANSI/AISC 303), hereafter referred to as the Code of
ST I
U EV
24 Standard Practice.
25
26 This Specification includes the Symbols, the Glossary, Abbreviations,
G R
29 Specification. The phrases “is permitted” and “are permitted” in this document
30 identify provisions that comply with this Specification, but are not mandatory.
31
BL
32 User Note: User notes are intended to provide concise and practical guidance
33 in the application of the Specification provisions.
PU
34
35 This Specification sets forth criteria for the design, fabrication, and erection of
36 structural steel buildings and other structures, where other structures are
37 defined as structures designed, fabricated, and erected in a manner similar to
38 buildings, with building-like vertical and lateral load-resisting-elements.
39 Wherever this Specification refers to the applicable building code and there is
40 none, the loads, load combinations, system limitations, and general design
41 requirements shall be those in ASCE Minimum Design Loads and Associated
42 Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures (ASCE/SEI 7).
43
44 Where conditions are not covered by this Specification, designs are permitted
45 to be based on tests or analysis, subject to the approval of the authority having
46 jurisdiction. Alternative methods of analysis and design are permitted,
47 provided such alternative methods or criteria are acceptable to the authority
48 having jurisdiction.
49
50 User Note: For the design of cold-formed steel structural members, the
51 provisions in the AISI North American Specification for the Design of Cold-
52 Formed Steel Structural Members (AISI S100) are recommended, except for
20 NE
70 Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings do not apply in seismic design
71 category A.
72
20 O
73 2. Nuclear Applications
74
3, W
75 The design, fabrication, erection, and quality of safety-related nuclear
76 structures shall comply with the provisions of this Specification as modified
E
77 by the requirements of the AISC Specification for Safety-Related Steel
78 Structures for Nuclear Facilities (ANSI/AISC N690).
ST I
U EV
79
80 A2. REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS Comment [DC1]: Section A2 is not included in
81 Draft Public Review One.
G R
87 Commentary
88 ACI 318M-14 Metric Building Code Requirements for Structural Con-
PU
20 NE
126 (g) ASTM International (ASTM)
127 A6/A6M-14 Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled
128 Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling
20 O
129 A36/A36M-14 Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
130 A53/A53M-12 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-
3, W
131 Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless
132 A193/A193M-15 Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless
E
133 Steel Bolting Materials for High Temperature or High Pressure
134 Service and Other Special Purpose Applications
ST I
U EV
20 NE
182 High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, with Im-
183 proved Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance
184 A618/A618M-04(2015) Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded
20 O
185 and Seamless High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Tubing
186 A668/A668M-15 Standard Specification for Steel Forgings, Carbon and
3, W
187 Alloy, for General Industrial Use
188 A673/A673M-07(2012) Standard Specification for Sampling Procedure
E
189 for Impact Testing of Structural Steel
190 A709/A709M-13a Standard Specification for Structural Steel for Bridg-
ST I
U EV
191 es
192 A751-14a Standard Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for
193 Chemical Analysis of Steel Products
G R
201 Shapes
202 A1011/A1011M-14 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip,
203 Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-
204 Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High
205 Strength
206 A1043/A1043M-14 Standard Specification for Structural Steel with Low
207 Yield to Tensile Ratio for Use in Buildings
208 A1065/A1065M-15 Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Electric-
209 Fusion (Arc) Welded High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Tubing in
210 Shapes, with 50 ksi [345 MPa] Minimum Yield Point
211 A1066/A1066M-11(2015)e1 Standard Specification for High-Strength
212 Low-Alloy Structural Steel Plate Produced by Thermo-Mechanical
213 Controlled Process (TMCP)
214 A1085/A1085M-13 Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded
215 Carbon Steel Hollow Structural Sections (HSS)
216 C567/C567M-14 Standard Test Method for Determining Density of
217 Structural Lightweight Concrete
218 E119-15 Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction
219 and Materials
20 NE
237 User Note: ASTM F1554 is the most commonly referenced specifica-
238 tion for anchor rods. Grade and weldability must be specified.
239
20 O
240 User Note: ASTM F1852 and F2280 are now included as Grades within
241 ASTM F3125.
3, W
242
243 F3043-14e1 Standard Specification for “Twist Off” Type Tension Con-
E
244 trol Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies, Alloy Steel, Heat Treat-
245 ed, 200 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
ST I
U EV
150 ksi (1040 MPa) Minimum Tensile Strength, Inch and Metric
252 Dimensions
253 F3148-17a Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolt
BL
254 Assemblies, Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 144 ksi Minimum
255 Tensile Strength, Inch Dimensions
PU
256
257 (h) American Welding Society (AWS)
258 AWS A5.1/A5.1M:2012 Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for
259 Shielded Metal Arc Welding
260 AWS A5.5/A5.5M:2014 Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for
261 Shielded Metal Arc Welding
262 AWS A5.17/A5.17M:1997 (R2007) Specification for Carbon Steel
263 Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding
264 AWS A5.18/A5.18M:2005 Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes
265 and Rods for Gas Shielded Arc Welding
266 AWS A5.20/A5.20M:2005 (R2015) Specification for Carbon Steel
267 Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc Welding
268 AWS A5.23/A5.23M:2011 Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes
269 and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding
270 AWS A5.25/A5.25M:1997 (R2009) Specification for Carbon and Low-
271 Alloy Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for Electroslag Welding
272 AWS A5.26/A5.26M:1997 (R2009) Specification for Carbon and Low-
273 Alloy Steel Electrodes for Electrogas Welding
274 AWS A5.28/A5.28M:2005 (R2015) Specification for Low-Alloy Steel
275 Electrodes and Rods for Gas Shielded Arc Welding
20 NE
293 Assurance for Installation of Steel Deck
294
295 A3. MATERIAL
20 O
296
297 1. Structural Steel Materials
3, W
298
299 Material test reports or reports of tests made by the fabricator or a testing
E
300 laboratory shall constitute sufficient evidence of conformity with one of the
301 ASTM standards listed in Section A3.1a. For hot-rolled structural shapes,
ST I
U EV
302 plates, and bars, such tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM
303 A6/A6M; for sheets, such tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM
304 A568/A568M; for tubing and pipe, such tests shall be made in accordance
G R
305 with the requirements of the applicable ASTM standards listed above for
306 those product forms.
307
AU IC
312
313 (a) Hot-rolled structural shapes
314 ASTM A36/A36M
315 ASTM A529/A529M
316 ASTM A572/A572M
317 ASTM A588/A588M
318 ASTM A709/A709M, Grades 36 [250], 50 [345], 50S [345S], 50W
319 [345W], HPS 50W [HPS345W], QST 50 [QST345], QST 50S
320 [QST345S], QST 65 [QST450], QST 70 [QST485]
321 ASTM A913/A913M
322 ASTM A992/ A992M
323 ASTM A1043/A1043M
324
325 (b) Hollow structural sections (HSS)
326 ASTM A53/A53M Grade B
327 ASTM A500/A500M
328 ASTM A501/A501M
329 ASTM A618/A618M
330 ASTM A847/A847M
331 ASTM A1065/A1065M
20 NE
349 ASTM A572/A572M
350 ASTM A709/A709M
351
20 O
352 (e) Sheets
353 ASTM A606/A606M
3, W
354 ASTM A1011/A1011M SS, HSLAS, AND HSLAS-F
355
E
356 User Note: Plates, sheets, strips and bars are different products, however,
357 design rules do not make a differentiation between these products.
ST I
U EV
358
359 1b. Unidentified Steel
360
G R
361 Unidentified steel, free of injurious defects, is permitted to be used only for
362 members or details whose failure will not reduce the strength of the structure,
363 either locally or overall. Such use shall be subject to the approval of the
AU IC
366 User Note: Unidentified steel may be used for details where the precise
367 mechanical properties and weldability are not of concern. These are
PU
388
389 User Note: Additional requirements for rolled heavy-shape welded joints are
390 given in Sections J1.5, J1.6, J2.6 and M2.2.
391
392 1d. Built-Up Heavy Shapes
393
394 Built-up cross sections consisting of plates with a thickness exceeding 2 in.
395 (50 mm) are considered built-up heavy shapes. Built-up heavy shapes used as
396 members subject to primary (computed) tensile forces due to tension or
397 flexure and spliced or connected to other members using complete-joint-
398 penetration groove welds that fuse through the thickness of the plates, shall
399 be specified as follows. The structural design documents shall require that
400 the steel be supplied with Charpy V-notch impact test results in accordance
401 with ASTM A6/A6M, Supplementary Requirement S5, Charpy V-Notch
402 Impact Test. The impact test shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM
403 A673/A673M, Frequency P, and shall meet a minimum average value of 20
404 ft-lb (27 J) absorbed energy at a maximum temperature of +70°F (+21°C).
20 NE
405
406 When a built-up heavy shape is welded to the face of another member using
407 groove welds, these requirements apply only to the shape that has weld metal
20 O
408 fused through the cross section.
409
3, W
410 User Note: Additional requirements for built-up heavy-shape welded joints
411 are given in Sections J1.5, J1.6, J2.6 and M2.2.
E
412
413 2. Steel Castings and Forgings
ST I
U EV
414
415 Steel castings and forgings shall conform to an ASTM standard intended for
416 structural applications and shall provide strength, ductility, weldability and
G R
417 toughness adequate for the purpose. Test reports produced in accordance with
418 the ASTM reference standards shall constitute sufficient evidence of
AU IC
422
423 Bolt, washer and nut material conforming to one of the following ASTM
PU
444
445 (c) Washers
446 ASTM F436
447 ASTM F436M
448 ASTM F844
449
450 (d) Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators
451 ASTM F959
452 ASTM F959M
453
454 Manufacturer’s certification shall constitute sufficient evidence of conformity
455 with the standards.
456
457 4. Anchor Rods and Threaded Rods
458
459 Anchor rod and threaded rod material conforming to one of the following
460 ASTM specifications is approved for use under this Specification:
20 NE
461
462 ASTM A36/A36M
463 ASTM A193/A193M
20 O
464 ASTM A354
465 ASTM A449
3, W
466 ASTM A572/A572M
467 ASTM A588/A588M
E
468 ASTM F1554
469
ST I
U EV
470 User Note: ASTM F1554 is the preferred material specification for anchor
471 rods.
472
G R
473 ASTM A449 material is permitted for high-strength anchor rods and threaded
474 rods of any diameter.
475
AU IC
476 Threads on anchor rods and threaded rods shall conform to Class 2A, Unified
477 Coarse Thread Series of ASME B1.1 except for anchor rods over 1 in.
BL
478 diameter are permitted to conform to Class 2A, 8UN Thread Series.
479
PU
499
500 Manufacturer’s certification shall constitute sufficient evidence of conformity
501 with the standards.
502
503 6. Headed Stud Anchors
504
505 Steel headed stud anchors shall conform to the requirements of the Structural
506 Welding Code—Steel (AWS D1.1/D1.1M).
507
508 Manufacturer’s certification shall constitute sufficient evidence of conformity
509 with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
510
511 A4. STRUCTURAL DESIGN DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS
512
513 The issuing entity shall obtain authorization from the engineer of record prior
514 to each issuance of the structural design documents and specifications. When
515 authorized, the documents that are released shall be clearly identified with
20 NE
516 the authorized purpose and shall include the date of release.
517
518 Structural design documents and specifications issued for construction of all
20 O
519 or a portion of the work shall be clearly legible and drawn to an identified
520 scale that is appropriate to clearly convey the information. They shall be
3, W
521 based on the consideration of the design loads, forces, and deformations to be
522 resisted by the structural frame in the completed project and give the
E
523 following information, as applicable, to define the scope of the work to be
524 fabricated and erected:
ST I
U EV
525
526 (a) Information as required by the applicable building code
527 (b) Statement of the method of design used: LRFD or ASD
G R
528 (c) The section, size, material grade, and location of all members
529 (d) All geometry and work points necessary for layout
AU IC
533 diaphragm elements that provide for lateral strength and stability in the
534 completed structure
PU
535 (h) Design provisions for initial imperfections, if different than specified
536 in Chapter C for stability design
537 (i) Fabrication and erection tolerances not included in or different from
538 the Code of Standard Practice
539 (j) Any special erection conditions or other considerations that are
540 required by the design concept, such as identification of a condition
541 when the structural steel frame in the fully erected and fully connected
542 state requires interaction with nonstructural steel elements for strength
543 or stability, the use of shores, jacks, or loads that must be adjusted as
544 erection progresses to set or maintain camber, position within speci-
545 fied tolerances, or prestress
546 (k) Preset elevation requirements, if any, at free ends of cantilevered
547 members relative to their fixed-end elevations
548 (l) Column differential shortening information, including performance
549 requirements for monitoring and adjusting for column differential
550 shortening
551 (m) Requirements for all connections and member reinforcement
552 (n) Joining requirements between elements of built-up members
553 (o) Camber requirements for members, including magnitude, direction,
554 and location
555 (p) Requirements for material grade, size, capacity, and detailing of steel
556 headed stud anchors as specified in Chapter I
557 (q) Anticipated deflections and the associated loading conditions for
558 major structural elements (such as transfer girders and trusses) that
559 support columns and hangers
560 (r) Requirements for openings in structural steel members for other trades
561 (s) Shop painting and surface preparation requirements as required for the
562 design of bolted connections
563 (t) Requirements for approval documents in addition to what is specified
564 in the Code of Standard Practice Section 4.
565 (u) Charpy V-Notch toughness (CVN) requirements for rolled heavy
566 shapes or built-up heavy shapes, if different than what is required in
567 Section A3
568 (v) Identification of members and joints subjected to fatigue
569 (w) Identification of members and joints requiring nondestructive testing
570 in addition to what is required in Chapter N
571 (x) Additional project requirements, as deemed appropriate by the
20 NE
572 engineer of record, that impact the life safety of the structure
573
574 When structural steel connection design is delegated, the design documents
20 O
575 shall include:
576
3, W
577 (a) Design requirements for the delegated design
578 (b) Requirements for substantiating connection information
E
579
580 User Note: For projects that require consideration of seismic provisions,
ST I
U EV
588 shall review and approve, reject, or provide review comments on the
589 approval documents.
590
PU
1 CHAPTER B
2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
3
4 This chapter addresses general requirements for the design of steel structures
5 applicable to all chapters of this Specification.
6
7 The chapter is organized as follows:
8
9 B1. General Provisions
10 B2. Loads and Load Combinations
11 B3. Design Basis
12 B4. Member Properties
13 B5. Fabrication and Erection
14 B6. Quality Control and Quality Assurance
15 B7. Evaluation of Existing Structures
20 NE
16
17 B1. GENERAL PROVISIONS
20 O
18 The design of members and connections shall be consistent with the intended
19 behavior of the structural system and the assumptions made in the structural
3, W
20 analysis.
21 B2. LOADS AND LOAD COMBINATIONS
E
22 The loads, nominal loads, and load combinations shall be those stipulated by
ST I
U EV
23 the applicable building code. In the absence of a building code, the loads,
24 nominal loads, and load combinations shall be those stipulated in Minimum
25 Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures
G R
26 (ASCE/SEI 7).
27 User Note: When using ASCE/SEI 7 for design according to Section B3.1
AU IC
20 NE
65 each structural component equals or exceeds the required strength determined
66 on the basis of the ASD load combinations. All provisions of this Specifica-
67 tion, except those of Section B3.1, shall apply.
20 O
68 Design shall be performed in accordance with Equation B3-2:
3, W
Rn
69 Ra ≤ (B3-2)
Ω
E
70 where
ST I
U EV
74 R n Ω = allowable strength
AU IC
75
76 The nominal strength, Rn, and the safety factor, Ω, for the applicable limit
BL
80
81 The required strength of structural members and connections shall be
82 determined by structural analysis for the applicable load combinations, as
83 stipulated in Section B2.
84 Design by elastic or inelastic analysis is permitted. Requirements for
85 analysis are stipulated in Chapter C and Appendix 1.
86
87 4. Design of Connections and Supports
88
89 Connection elements shall be designed in accordance with the provisions of
90 Chapters J and K. The forces and deformations used in design of the
91 connections shall be consistent with the intended performance of the
92 connection and the assumptions used in the design of the structure. Self-
93 limiting inelastic deformations of the connections are permitted.
94 At points of support, beams, girders, and trusses shall be restrained against
95 rotation about their longitudinal axis unless it can be shown by analysis that
96 the restraint is not required.
20 NE
111 the structure, the connection may be assumed to allow no relative rota-
112 tion. An FR connection shall have sufficient strength and stiffness to
113 maintain the initial angle between the connected members at the strength
20 O
114 limit states.
115 (b) Partially Restrained (PR) Moment Connections
3, W
116 Partially restrained (PR) moment connections transfer moments, but the
E
117 relative rotation between connected members is not negligible. In the
118 analysis of the structure, the moment-rotation response characteristics of
ST I
U EV
128 Diaphragms and collectors shall be designed for forces that result from loads,
129 as stipulated in Section B2. They shall be designed in conformance with the
130 provisions of Chapters C through K, as applicable.
131
132 6. Design of Anchorages to Concrete
133
134 Anchorage between steel and concrete acting compositely shall be designed
135 in accordance with Chapter I. The design of column bases, and anchor rods
136 shall be in accordance with Chapter J.
137
138 7. Design for Stability
139
140 The structure and its elements shall be designed for stability in accordance
141 with Chapter C.
142
143 8. Design for Serviceability
144
145 The overall structure and the individual members and connections shall be
146 evaluated for serviceability limit states in accordance with Chapter L.
147
20 NE
164 not less than 10 kips in either case.
165
20 O
166 (c) End connections of members bracing columns shall have a nominal
167 tensile strength equal to or greater than (i) 1% of two-thirds of the re-
3, W
168 quired column axial strength at that level for design according to Section
169 B3.1 (LRFD) or (ii) 1% of the required column axial strength at that
E
171
172 The strength requirements for structural integrity in this section shall be
173 evaluated independently of other strength requirements. For the purpose of
G R
179 The roof system shall be investigated through structural analysis to ensure
180 stability and strength under ponding conditions unless the roof surface is
181 configured to prevent the accumulation of water.
182 Ponding stability and strength analysis shall consider the effect of the
183 deflections of the roof’s structural framing under all loads (including dead
184 loads) present at the onset of ponding and the subsequent accumulation of
185 rainwater and snowmelt.
186 The nominal strength and resistance or safety factors for the applicable limit
187 states are specified in Chapters D through K.
188 11. Design for Fatigue
189
190 For members and their connections subjected to repeated loading, fatigue
191 shall be considered in accordance with Appendix 3. Fatigue need not be
192 considered for seismic effects or for the effects of wind loading on typical
193 building lateral force-resisting systems and building enclosure components.
194
195 12. Design for Fire Conditions
196
197 Two methods of design for fire conditions are provided in Appendix 4: (a) by
198 analysis and (b) by qualification testing. Compliance with the fire-protection
199 requirements in the applicable building code shall be deemed to satisfy the
200 requirements of Appendix 4.
201
202 This section is not intended to create or imply a contractual requirement for
203 the engineer of record responsible for the structural design or any other
204 member of the design team.
205 User Note: Design by qualification testing is the prescriptive method
206 specified in most building codes. Traditionally, on most projects where the
207 architect is the prime professional, the architect has been the responsible
208 party to specify and coordinate fire protection requirements. Design by
209 analysis is a newer engineering approach to fire-protection. Designation of
210 the person(s) responsible for designing for fire conditions is a contractual
211 matter to be addressed on each project.
212 13. Design for Corrosion Effects
20 NE
213 Where corrosion could impair the strength or serviceability of a structure,
214 structural components shall be designed to tolerate corrosion or shall be
215 protected against corrosion.
20 O
216
3, W
217 B4. MEMBER PROPERTIES
218
E
219 1. Classification of Sections for Local Buckling
220
ST I
U EV
224 exceed λr from Table B4.1a. If the width-to-thickness ratio of any compres-
225 sion element exceeds λr, the section is a slender-element section.
AU IC
226
227 For members subject to flexure, sections are classified as compact,
BL
231 elements shall not exceed the limiting width-to-thickness ratios, λp, from
232 Table B4.1b. If the width-to-thickness ratio of one or more compression
233 elements exceeds λp, but does not exceed λr from Table B4.1b, the section is
234 noncompact. If the width-to-thickness ratio of any compression element
235 exceeds λr, the section is a slender-element section.
236
237 For cases where the web and flange are not continuously attached,
238 consideration of element slenderness must account for the unattached length
239 of the elements and the appropriate plate buckling boundary conditions.
240
241 User Note: The Commentary discusses element slenderness when web and
242 flange are not continuously attached.
243
244 1a. Unstiffened Elements
245
246 For unstiffened elements supported along only one edge parallel to the
247 direction of the compression force, the width shall be taken as follows:
248
249 (a) For flanges of I-shaped members and tees, the width, b, is one-half the
250 full-flange width, bf.
251
252 (b) For legs of angles and flanges of channels and zees, the width, b, is the
253 full leg or flange width.
254
255 (c) For plates, the width, b, is the distance from the free edge to the first row
256 of fasteners or line of welds.
257
258 (d) For stems of tees, d is the full depth of the section.
259
260 User Note: Refer to Table B4.1 for the graphic representation of unstiffened
261 element dimensions.
262
263 1b. Stiffened Elements
264
265 For stiffened elements supported along two edges parallel to the direction of
20 NE
266 the compression force, the width shall be taken as follows:
267
268 (a) For webs of rolled sections, h is the clear distance between flanges less
20 O
269 the fillet at each flange; hc is twice the distance from the centroid to the
270 inside face of the compression flange less the fillet or corner radius.
271
3, W
272 (b) For webs of built-up sections, h is the distance between adjacent lines of
273 fasteners or the clear distance between flanges when welds are used, and
E
274 hc is twice the distance from the centroid to the nearest line of fasteners
ST I
275 at the compression flange or the inside face of the compression flange
U EV
276 when welds are used; hp is twice the distance from the plastic neutral
277 axis to the nearest line of fasteners at the compression flange or the
G R
278 inside face of the compression flange when welds are used.
279
AU IC
280 (c) For flange plates in built-up sections, the width, b, is the distance
281 between adjacent lines of fasteners or lines of welds.
282
BL
283 (d) For flanges of rectangular hollow structural sections (HSS), the width, b,
284 is the clear distance between webs less the inside corner radius on each
PU
285 side. For webs of rectangular HSS, h is the clear distance between the
286 flanges less the inside corner radius on each side. If the corner radius is
287 not known, b and h shall be taken as the corresponding outside dimen-
288 sion minus three times the thickness. The thickness, t, shall be taken as
289 the design wall thickness, per Section B4.2.
290
291 (e) For flanges or webs of box sections and other stiffened elements, the
292 width, b, is the clear distance between the elements providing stiffening.
293
294 (f) For perforated cover plates, b is the transverse distance between the
295 nearest line of fasteners, and the net area of the plate is taken at the
296 widest hole.
297
298 (g) For round hollow structural sections (HSS), the width shall be taken as
299 the outside diameter, D, and the thickness, t, shall be taken as the design
300 wall thickness, as defined in Section B4.2.
301
302 User Note: Refer to Table B4.1 for the graphic representation of stiffened
303 element dimensions.
304
305 For tapered flanges of rolled sections, the thickness is the nominal value
306 halfway between the free edge and the corresponding face of the web.
307
308 2. Design Wall Thickness for HSS
309
310 The design wall thickness, t, shall be used in calculations involving the wall
311 thickness of hollow structural sections (HSS). The design wall thickness, t,
312 shall be taken equal to the nominal thickness for box sections and HSS
313 produced according to ASTM A1065/A1065M or ASTM A1085/A1085M.
314 For HSS produced according to other standards approved for use under this
315 Specification, the design wall thickness, t, shall be taken equal to 0.93 times
316 the nominal wall thickness.
317 User Note: A pipe can be designed using the provisions of this Specification
318 for round HSS sections as long as the pipe conforms to ASTM A53/A53M
319 Grade B and the appropriate limitations of this Specification are used.
320
20 NE
321
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU
322
TABLE B4.1a
Width-to-Thickness Ratios: Compression Elements
Members Subject to Axial Compression
Limiting
Case
Width-to- Width-to-Thickness
Description of Thickness Ratio λr (nonslender/
Element Ratio slender) Examples
1 Flanges of rolled
I-shaped
sections, plates
projecting from
rolled I-shaped
sections, E
0.56
outstanding legs b/t Fy
of pairs of angles
connected with
continuous
20 NE
contact, flanges
of channels, and
Unstiffened Elements
flanges of tees
20 O
2 Flanges of built- [a]
up I-shaped
sections and
3, W
plates or angle b/t kc E
legs projecting 0.64
Fy
E
from built-up I-
shaped sections
ST I
U EV
3 Legs of single
angles, legs of
double angles E
with separators, b/t 0.45
G R
elements
4 Stems of tees E
0.75
BL
d/t
Fy
5 Webs of doubly
PU
symmetric rolled E
and built-up I- h/tw 1.49
shaped sections Fy
and channels
6 Walls of E
rectangular HSS b/t 1.40
Fy
Stiffened Elements
7 Flange cover
plates plates
between lines of E
b/t 1.40
fasteners or Fy
welds
9 Round HSS
E
D/t 0.11
Fy
[a]
kc = 4 h tw , but shall not be taken less than 0.35 nor greater than 0.76 for calculation purposes.
323
TABLE B4.1b
Width-to-Thickness Ratios: Compression Elements
Members Subject to Flexure
Width- Limiting
to- Width-to-Thickness Ratio
Thick- λp λr
Case
FL
20 NE
Fy
12 Legs of single
angles E E
0.54 0.91
20 O
b/t
3, W Fy Fy
13 Flanges of all I-
shaped sections
and channels in
E
E E
flexure about the b/t 0.38 1.0
Fy Fy
ST I
minor axis
U EV
14 Stems of tees
E E
d/t 0.84 1.52
G R
Fy Fy
324
AU IC
BL
PU
325
TABLE B4.1b
Width-to-Thickness Ratios: Compression Elements
Members Subject to Flexure
Limiting
Width-to-Thickness Ratio
Width-
to-
Thick- λp λr
Case
20 NE
singly
symmetric I- hc E
shaped hp Fy E
sections hc/tw 2 5.70
20 O
Mp Fy
0.54 − 0.09
My
≤ λr
3, W
17 Flanges of
E
Unstiffened Elements
rectangular E E
HSS b/t 1.12 1.40
ST I
Fy Fy
U EV
18 Flange cover
plates
G R
between lines E E
of fasteners or b/t 1.12 1.40
Fy Fy
welds
AU IC
19 Webs of
BL
rectangular E E
HSS and box h/t 2.42 5.70
Fy Fy
sections
PU
20 Round HSS
E E
D/t 0.07 0.31
Fy Fy
21 Flanges of
box sections E E
b/t 1.12 1.49
Fy Fy
4
[a]
kc = but shall not be taken less than 0.35 nor greater than 0.76 for calculation purposes.
h tw
[b]
FL = 0.7Fy for slender web I-shaped members and major-axis bending of compact and noncompact web built-up I-
shaped members with Sxt Sxc ≥ 0.7 ; and FL = Fy Sx t Sxc ≥ 0.5Fy for major-axis bending of compact and noncompact
web built-up I-shaped members with Sxc Sxt < 0.7 , where Sxc ,Sxt = elastic section modulus referred to compression
and tension flanges, respectively, in.3 (mm3).
[c]
M y is the moment at yielding of the extreme fiber. Mp = FyZx, plastic moment, kip-in. (N-mm), where Zx = plastic section
modulus taken about the x-axis, in.3 (mm3)
E = modulus of elasticity of steel = 29,000 ksi (200 000 MPa) ENA = elastic neutral axis
Fy = specified minimum yield stress, ksi (MPa) PNA = plastic neutral axis
326
327
20 NE
345 holes in the chain, and adding, for each gage space in the chain, the quantity
346 s 2 4g ,
347
20 O
348 where
349 g = transverse center-to-center spacing (gage) between fastener gage
3, W
350 lines, in. (mm)
351 s = longitudinal center-to-center spacing (pitch) of any two
E
352 consecutive holes, in. (mm)
ST I
353
U EV
354 For angles, the gage for holes in opposite adjacent legs shall be the sum of
355 the gages from the back of the angles less the thickness.
356
G R
357 For slotted HSS welded to a gusset plate, the net area, An, is the gross area
358 minus the product of the thickness and the total width of material that is
AU IC
361 In determining the net area across plug or slot welds, the weld metal shall not
362 be considered as adding to the net area.
363
PU
364 For members without holes, the net area, An, is equal to the gross area, Ag.
365
366 B5. FABRICATION AND ERECTION
367
368 Fabrication documents, fabrication, shop painting, and erection shall satisfy
369 the requirements stipulated in Chapter M.
370
371 User Note: Refer to Code of Standard Practice Section 4 addresses
372 requirements for fabrication and erection documents. Code of Standard
373 Practice Section 4.4 addresses the approval process for fabrication approval
374 documents.
375
376 B6. QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE
377
378 Quality control and quality assurance activities shall satisfy the requirements
379 stipulated in Chapter N.
380
381
20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU
1 CHAPTER C
20 NE
15 consideration of member imperfections and/or inelasticity directly within the
16 analysis and provides for a more detailed evaluation of the limit states. Appendix 7
17 provides the effective length method and a first-order elastic method.
20 O
18
19 C1. GENERAL STABILITY REQUIREMENTS
3, W
20
21 Stability shall be provided for the structure as a whole and for each of its
E
22 elements. The effects of all of the following on the stability of the structure
23 and its elements shall be considered: (a) flexural, shear and axial member
ST I
U EV
29 and (e) uncertainty in system, member, and connection strength and stiffness.
30 All load-dependent effects shall be calculated at a level of loading
BL
34 Any rational method of design for stability that considers all of the listed
35 effects is permitted; this includes the methods identified in Sections C1.1 and
36 C1.2.
37
38 User Note: See Commentary Section C1 and Table C-C1.1 for an
39 explanation of how requirements (a) through (e) of Section C1 are satisfied in
40 the methods of design listed in Sections C1.1 and C1.2.
41
42 1. Direct Analysis Method of Design
43
44 The direct analysis method of design is permitted for all structures, and can
45 be based on either elastic or inelastic analysis. For design by elastic analysis,
46 required strengths shall be calculated in accordance with Section C2 and the
47 calculation of available strengths in accordance with Section C3. For design
48 by advanced analysis, the provisions of Section 1.1 and Sections 1.2 or 1.3 of
49 Appendix 1 shall be satisfied.
50
20 NE
69
70 (a) The analysis shall consider flexural, shear, and axial member
20 O
71 deformations, and all other component and connection deformations
72 that contribute to displacements of the structure. The analysis shall
73 incorporate reductions in all stiffnesses that are considered to contrib-
3, W
74 ute to the stability of the structure, as specified in Section C2.3.
75
E
76 (b) The analysis shall be a second-order analysis that considers both P-Δ
ST I
107 (d) For design by LRFD, the second-order analysis shall be carried out
108 under LRFD load combinations. For design by ASD, the second-
109 order analysis shall be carried out under 1.6 times the ASD load com-
110 binations, and the results shall be divided by 1.6 to obtain the required
111 strengths of components.
112
113 2. Consideration of Initial System Imperfections
114
115 The effect of initial imperfections in the position of points of intersection of
116 members on the stability of the structure shall be taken into account either by
117 direct modeling of these imperfections in the analysis as specified in Section
118 C2.2a or by the application of notional loads as specified in Section C2.2b.
119
120 User Note: The imperfections required to be considered in this section are
121 imperfections in the locations of points of intersection of members (system
122 imperfections). In typical building structures, the important imperfection of
123 this type is the out-of-plumbness of columns. Consideration of initial out-of-
20 NE
124 straightness of individual members (member imperfections) is not required in
125 the structural analysis when using the provisions of this section; it is
126 accounted for in the compression member design provisions of Chapter E and
20 O
127 need not be considered explicitly in the analysis as long as it is within the
128 limits specified in the Code of Standard Practice. Appendix 1, Section 1.2,
129 provides an extension to the direct analysis method that includes modeling of
3, W
130 member imperfections (initial out-of-straightness) within the structural
131 analysis.
E
132
ST I
134
135 In all cases, it is permissible to account for the effect of initial system
G R
138 from their nominal locations. The magnitude of the initial displacements
139 shall be the maximum amount considered in the design; the pattern of initial
140 displacements shall be such that it provides the greatest destabilizing effect.
BL
141
142 User Note: Initial displacements similar in configuration to both displace-
PU
143 ments due to loading and anticipated buckling modes should be considered in
144 the modeling of imperfections. The magnitude of the initial displacements
145 should be based on permissible construction tolerances, as specified in the
146 Code of Standard Practice or other governing requirements, or on actual
147 imperfections if known.
148
149 In the analysis of structures that support gravity loads primarily through
150 nominally vertical columns, walls or frames, where the ratio of maximum
151 second-order story drift to maximum first-order story drift (both determined
152 for LRFD load combinations or 1.6 times ASD load combinations, with
153 stiffnesses adjusted as specified in Section C2.3) in all stories is equal to or
154 less than 1.7, it is permissible to include initial system imperfections in the
155 analysis for gravity-only load combinations and not in the analysis for load
156 combinations that include applied lateral loads.
157
158 2b. Use of Notional Loads to Represent Imperfections
159
160 For structures that support gravity loads primarily through nominally vertical
161 columns, walls, or frames, it is permissible to use notional loads to represent
162 the effects of initial system imperfections in the position of points of
20 NE
180 where
181 α = 1.0 (LRFD); α = 1.6 (ASD)
182 Ni = notional load applied at level i, kips (N)
20 O
183 Yi = gravity load applied at level i from the LRFD load combina-
184 tion or ASD load combination, as applicable, kips (N)
3, W
185
186 User Note: The use of notional loads can lead to additional (generally
E
187 small) fictitious base shears in the structure. The correct horizontal
188 reactions at the foundation may be obtained by applying an additional
ST I
U EV
189 horizontal force at the base of the structure, equal and opposite in di-
190 rection to the sum of all notional loads, distributed among vertical
191 load-carrying elements in the same proportion as the gravity load sup-
G R
192 ported by those elements. The notional loads can also lead to addi-
193 tional overturning effects, which are not fictitious.
AU IC
194
195 (b) The notional load at any level, Ni, shall be distributed over that level in
BL
196 the same manner as the gravity load at the level. The notional loads
197 shall be applied in the direction that provides the greatest destabilizing
198 effect.
PU
199
200 User Note: For most building structures, the requirement regarding
201 notional load direction may be satisfied as follows: for load combina-
202 tions that do not include lateral loading, consider two alternative or-
203 thogonal directions of notional load application, in a positive and a
204 negative sense in each of the two directions, in the same direction at
205 all levels; for load combinations that include lateral loading, apply all
206 notional loads in the direction of the resultant of all lateral loads in the
207 combination.
208
209 (c) The notional load coefficient of 0.002 in Equation C2-1 is based on a
210 nominal initial story out-of-plumbness ratio of 1/500; where the use of
211 a different maximum out-of-plumbness is justified, it is permissible to
212 adjust the notional load coefficient proportionally.
213
214 User Note: An out-of-plumbness of 1/500 represents the maximum
215 tolerance on column plumbness specified in the Code of Standard
216 Practice. In some cases, other specified tolerances, such as those on
217 plan location of columns, will govern and will require a tighter plumb-
218 ness tolerance.
219
220 (d) For structures in which the ratio of maximum second-order drift to
221 maximum first-order drift (both determined for LRFD load combina-
222 tions or 1.6 times ASD load combinations, with stiffnesses adjusted as
223 specified in Section C2.3) in all stories is equal to or less than 1.7, it is
224 permissible to apply the notional load, Ni, only in gravity-only load
225 combinations and not in combinations that include other lateral loads.
226
227 3. Adjustments to Stiffness
228
229 The analysis of the structure to determine the required strengths of
230 components shall use reduced stiffnesses, as follows:
231
232 (a) A factor of 0.80 shall be applied to all stiffnesses that are considered
233 to contribute to the stability of the structure. It is permissible to apply
234 this reduction factor to all stiffnesses in the structure.
235
20 NE
236 User Note: Applying the stiffness reduction to some members and
237 not others can, in some cases, result in artificial distortion of the struc-
238 ture under load and possible unintended redistribution of forces. This
20 O
239 can be avoided by applying the reduction to all members, including
240 those that do not contribute to the stability of the structure.
241
3, W
242 (b) An additional factor, τb, shall be applied to the flexural stiffnesses of
243 all members whose flexural stiffnesses are considered to contribute to
E
245 defined as follows (see Section I1.5 for the definition of τb for compo-
U EV
254 (C2-2b)
255 where
256 α = 1.0 (LRFD); α = 1.6 (ASD)
257 Pr = required axial compressive strength using LRFD or ASD load
258 combinations, kips (N)
259 Pns = cross-section compressive strength; for nonslender-element
260 sections, Pns = FyAg, and for slender-element sections, Pns =
261 FyAe, where Ae is as defined in Section E7 with Fcr = Fy, kips
262 (N)
263
264 User Note: Taken together, Sections (a) and (b) require the use of 0.8
265 τb times the nominal elastic flexural stiffness and 0.8 times other
266 nominal elastic stiffnesses for structural steel members in the analysis.
267
268 (c) In structures to which Section C2.2b is applicable, in lieu of using τb <
269 1.0, where αPr Pns > 0.5 , it is permissible to use τb = 1.0 for all
270 noncomposite members if a notional load of 0.001αYi [where Yi is as
271 defined in Section C2.2b(a)] is applied at all levels, in the direction
272 specified in Section C2.2b(b), in all load combinations. These notion-
273 al loads shall be added to those, if any, used to account for the effects
274 of initial imperfections in the position of points of intersection of
275 members and shall not be subject to the provisions of Section
276 C2.2b(d).
277
278 (d) Where components comprised of materials other than structural steel
279 are considered to contribute to the stability of the structure, and the
280 governing codes and specifications for the other materials require
281 greater reductions in stiffness, such greater stiffness reductions shall
282 be applied to those components.
283
284 C3. CALCULATION OF AVAILABLE STRENGTHS
285
286 For the direct analysis method of design, the available strengths of members
287 and connections shall be calculated in accordance with the provisions of
288 Chapters D through K, as applicable, with no further consideration of overall
289 structure stability. The effective length for flexural buckling of all members
20 NE
290 shall be taken as the unbraced length unless a smaller value is justified by
291 rational analysis.
292
20 O
293 Bracing intended to define the unbraced lengths of members shall have
294 sufficient stiffness and strength to control member movement at the braced
295 points.
3, W
296
297 User Note: Methods of satisfying this bracing requirement are provided in
E
299 that is included in the design of the lateral force-resisting system of the
U EV
1 CHAPTER D
20 NE
15 • Chapter H Members subject to combined axial tension and flexure
16 • J3 Threaded rods
17 • J4.1 Connecting elements in tension
20 O
18 • J4.3 Block shear rupture strength at end connections of tension members
19
3, W
20 D1. SLENDERNESS LIMITATIONS
21
E
22 There is no maximum slenderness limit for members in tension.
ST I
23
U EV
24 User Note: For members designed on the basis of tension, the slenderness
25 ratio, L/r, preferably should not exceed 300. This suggestion does not apply
26 to rods or hangers in tension.
G R
27
28 D2. TENSILE STRENGTH
AU IC
29
30 The design tensile strength, φtPn, and the allowable tensile strength, Pn/Ωt, of
BL
31 tension members shall be the lower value obtained according to the limit
32 states of tensile yielding in the gross section and tensile rupture in the net
PU
33 section.
34
35 (a) For tensile yielding in the gross section
36
37 Pn = Fy Ag (D2-1)
52 Where connections use plug, slot or fillet welds in holes or slots, the effective
53 net area through the holes shall be used in Equation D2-2.
54
55 D3. EFFECTIVE NET AREA
56
57 The gross area, Ag, and net area, An, of tension members shall be determined
58 in accordance with the provisions of Section B4.3.
59
60 The effective net area of tension members shall be determined as
61
62 Ae = AnU (D3-1)
63
64 where U, the shear lag factor, is determined as shown in Table D3.1.
65
66 For open cross sections such as W, M, S, C, or HP shapes, WTs, STs, and
67 single and double angles, the shear lag factor, U, need not be less than the
68 ratio of the gross area of the connected element(s) to the member gross area.
20 NE
69 This provision does not apply to closed sections, such as HSS sections, nor to
70 plates.
71
20 O
72 D4. BUILT-UP MEMBERS
73
3, W
74 For limitations on the longitudinal spacing of connectors between elements in
75 continuous contact consisting of a plate and a shape, or two plates, see
E
76 Section J3.5.
77
ST I
U EV
78 Lacing, perforated cover plates, or tie plates without lacing are permitted to be
79 used on the open sides of built-up tension members. Tie plates shall have a
80 length not less than two-thirds the distance between the lines of welds or
G R
85
86 User Note: The longitudinal spacing of connectors between components
87 should preferably limit the slenderness ratio in any component between the
PU
88 connectors to 300.
89
90
TABLE D3.1
Shear Lag Factors for Connections
to Tension Members
Case Description of Element Shear Lag Factor, U Examples
1 All tension members where the tension load
is transmitted directly to each of the cross-
sectional elements by fasteners or welds U = 1.0 –
(except as in Cases 4, 5 and 6).
2 All tension members, except HSS, where the
tension load is transmitted to some but not
all of the cross-sectional elements by
fasteners or by longitudinal welds in x
combination with transverse welds. U = 1−
l
Alternatively, Case 7 is permitted for W, M, S
and HP shapes and Case 8 is permitted for
angles.
3 All tension members where the tension load
20 NE
U = 1.0 and
is transmitted only by transverse welds to
some but not all of the cross-sectional
An = area of the directly –
elements. connected elements
20 O
[a]
4 Plates, angles, channels with welds at heels,
tees, and W-shapes with connected
elements, where the tension load is 3l 2 x
3, W
U= 1−
transmitted by longitudinal welds only. See 2 2 l
Case 2 for definition of x . 3l + w
E
x= − tp
U EV
−10
x 3.2
U = 1 +
AU IC
l
2b 2 + tH − 2t 2
BL
x =b−
2 H + 4b − 4t
x
PU
U = 1−
l
6 Rectangular HSS with two side gusset BU B + HU H
plates. U=
H +B
3l 2
UB = 2
3l + B 2
3l 2
UH = 2
3l + H 2
7 W-, M-, S- or HP- with flange
shapes, or tees cut connected with 2
bf ≥ d, U = 0.90
from these shapes. (If three or more 3 –
U is calculated per fasteners per line in 2
Case 2, the larger the direction of bf < d, U = 0.85
3
value is permitted to loading
be used.) with web connected –
with four or more
fasteners per line in U = 0.70
the direction of
loading
20 NE
92 D5. PIN-CONNECTED MEMBERS
93
94 1. Tensile Strength
20 O
95
96 The design tensile strength, φtPn, and the allowable tensile strength, Pn/Ωt, of
97 pin-connected members, shall be the lower value determined according to the
3, W
98 limit states of tensile rupture, shear rupture, bearing and yielding.
99
E
101
102 Pn = Fu (2tbe ) (D5-1)
103
G R
129
130 2. Dimensional Requirements
131
132 Pin-connected members shall meet the following requirements:
133
134 (a) The pin hole shall be located midway between the edges of the member in
135 the direction normal to the applied force.
136 (b)When the pin is expected to provide for relative movement between
137 connected parts while under full load, the diameter of the pin hole shall
138 not be more than 1/32 in. (1 mm) greater than the diameter of the pin for
139 pins less than 3 in. in diameter and not more than 1/16 in. (2 mm) greater
140 than the diameter of the pin for pins of 3 in. (75 mm) in diameter or
141 greater.
142 (c)The width of the plate at the pin hole shall not be less than 2be + d and the
143 minimum extension, a, beyond the bearing end of the pin hole, parallel to
144 the axis of the member, shall not be less than 1.33be.
145 (d)The corners beyond the pin hole are permitted to be cut at 45° to the axis
20 NE
146 of the member, provided the net area beyond the pin hole, on a plane
147 perpendicular to the cut, is not less than that required beyond the pin hole
148 parallel to the axis of the member.
20 O
149
150 D6. EYEBARS
151
3, W
152 1. Tensile Strength
153
E
155 with Section D2, with Ag taken as the gross area of the eyebar body.
156
157 For calculation purposes, the width of the body of the eyebars shall not
G R
165 holes, and have circular heads with the periphery concentric with the pin
166 hole.
167
168 (b) The radius of transition between the circular head and the eyebar body
169 shall not be less than the head diameter.
170
171 (c) The pin diameter shall not be less than seven-eighths times the eyebar
172 body width, and the pin-hole diameter shall not be more than 1/32 in. (1
173 mm) greater than the pin diameter.
174
175 (d) For steels having Fy greater than 70 ksi (485 MPa), the hole diameter shall
176 not exceed five times the plate thickness, and the width of the eyebar
177 body shall be reduced accordingly.
178
179 (e) A thickness of less than 1/2 in. (13 mm) is permissible only if external
180 nuts are provided to tighten pin plates and filler plates into snug contact.
181
182 (f) The width from the hole edge to the plate edge perpendicular to the
183 direction of applied load shall be greater than two-thirds and, for the
184 purpose of calculation, not more than three-fourths times the eyebar body
185 width.
20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU
1 CHAPTER E
20 NE
14 E7. Members with Slender Elements
15
16 User Note: For cases not included in this chapter, the following sections apply:
20 O
17 • H1 – H2 Members subject to combined axial compression and flexure
18 • H3 Members subject to axial compression and torsion
3, W
19 • I2 Composite axially loaded members
20 • J4.4 Compressive strength of connecting elements
E
21
22 E1. GENERAL PROVISIONS
ST I
U EV
23
24 The design compressive strength, φc Pn , and the allowable compressive strength,
G R
27 the applicable limit states of flexural buckling, torsional buckling, and flexural-
28 torsional buckling.
BL
29
30 φc = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωc = 1.67 (ASD)
PU
31
32
33
LB
E3 FB
E7 FB
E4 TB
TB
LB
E3 FB
E7 FB
E4 FTB
FTB
20 NE
LB
E3 FB E7
FB
20 O LB
3, W
E3 FB E7
FB
E
LB
E3 FB
E7 FB
ST I
E4 FTB
FTB
U EV
E6 LB
FB E6
E3 FB
G R
FTB E7
E4 FTB
AU IC
E5 E5
BL
PU
E3 FB N/A N/A
34
20 NE
52 E3. FLEXURAL BUCKLING OF MEMBERS WITHOUT SLENDER
53 ELEMENTS
54
20 O
55 This section applies to nonslender-element compression members, as defined in
56 Section B4.1, for elements in axial compression.
3, W
57
58 User Note: When the torsional effective length is larger than the lateral effective
E
59 length, Section E4 may control.
ST I
60
U EV
61 The nominal compressive strength, Pn, shall be determined based on the limit state
62 of flexural buckling:
63
G R
64 Pn = Fn Ag (E3-1)
AU IC
65
66 The nominal stress, Fn, is determined as follows:
BL
67
Lc E Fy
68 (a) When ≤ 4.71 (or ≤ 2.25)
PU
r Fy Fe
Fy
69 Fn = 0.658 Fe Fy (E3-2)
70
Lc E Fy
71 (b) When > 4.71 (or > 2.25)
r Fy Fe
72
73 Fn = 0.877 Fe (E3-3)
74
75 where
76 Ag = gross area of member, in.2 (mm2)
77 E = modulus of elasticity of steel = 29,000 ksi (200 000 MPa)
78 Fe = elastic buckling stress determined according to Equation E3-4; or as
79 specified in Appendix 7, Section 7.2.3(b); or through an elastic buckling
80 analysis, as applicable, ksi (MPa)
π2 E
81 = 2
(E3-4)
Lc
r
82
83 Fy = specified minimum yield stress of the type of steel being used, ksi (MPa)
84 r = radius of gyration, in. (mm)
85
86 User Note: The two inequalities for calculating the limits of applicability of
87 Sections E3(a) and E3(b), one based on Lc r and one based on Fy Fe , provide
88 the same result for flexural buckling.
89
90 E4. TORSIONAL AND FLEXURAL-TORSIONAL BUCKLING OF SINGLE
91 ANGLES AND MEMBERS WITHOUT SLENDER ELEMENTS
92
93 This section applies to singly symmetric and unsymmetric members, certain
94 doubly symmetric members, such as cruciform or built-up members, and doubly
20 NE
95 symmetric members when the torsional unbraced length exceeds the lateral
96 unbraced length, all without slender elements. These provisions also apply to
97 single angles with b t > 0.71 E Fy , where b is the width of the longest leg and t is
20 O
98 the thickness.
3, W
99 The nominal compressive strength, Pn, shall be determined based on the limit
100 states of torsional and flexural-torsional buckling:
E
101
ST I
U EV
102 Pn = Fn Ag (E4-1)
103
104 The nominal stress, Fn, shall be determined according to Equation E3-2 or E3-3,
G R
105 using the torsional or flexural-torsional elastic buckling stress, Fe, determined as
106 follows:
AU IC
107
108 (a) For doubly symmetric members twisting about the shear center
BL
109
π 2 ECw 1
110 Fe = + GJ (E4-2)
PU
2
Lcz Ix + Iy
111
112 (b) For singly symmetric members twisting about the shear center where y is the
113 axis of symmetry
114
Fey + Fez 4 Fey Fez H
115 Fe = 1 − 1 − (E4-3)
2H ( Fey + Fez )2
116
117 User Note: For singly symmetric members with the x-axis as the axis of
118 symmetry, such as channels, Equation E4-3 is applicable with Fey replaced by
119 Fex.
120
121 (c) For unsymmetric members twisting about the shear center, Fe is the lowest root
122 of the cubic equation
2 2
xo y
123 ( Fe − Fex ) ( Fe − Fey ) ( Fe − Fez ) − Fe2 ( Fe − Fey ) − Fe2 ( Fe − Fex ) o = 0
ro ro
124 (E4-4)
125 where
126 Cw = warping constant, in.6 (mm6)
π2 E
127 Fex = 2
(E4-5)
Lcx
r
x
π2 E
128 Fey = 2
(E4-6)
Lcy
ry
π 2 EC w 1
129 = (E4-7)
L 2 + GJ A r 2
Fez
cz g o
130 G = shear modulus of elasticity of steel = 11,200 ksi (77 200 MPa)
131 H = flexural constant
x2 + y 2
132 = 1− o 2 o (E4-8)
20 NE
ro
133 I x, I y = moment of inertia about the principal axes, in.4 (mm4)
134 J = torsional constant, in.4 (mm4)
20 O
135 Kx = effective length factor for flexural buckling about x-axis
136 Ky = effective length factor for flexural buckling about y-axis
3, W
137 Kz = effective length factor for torsional buckling about the
138 longitudinal axis
E
139 Lcx = KxLx = effective length of member for buckling about x-axis, in.
140 (mm)
ST I
U EV
141 Lcy = KyLy = effective length of member for buckling about y-axis, in.
142 (mm)
143 Lcz = KzLz = effective length of member for buckling about longitudinal
G R
146 ro = polar radius of gyration about the shear center, in. (mm)
Ix + I y
ro2 2 2
BL
147 = xo + yo + (E4-9)
Ag
148 rx = radius of gyration about x-axis, in. (mm)
PU
20 NE
180
181 User Note: Bracing offset from the shear center is often referred to as constrained-
182 axis torsional buckling and is discussed further in the Commentary. Members that
20 O
183 buckle in this mode will exhibit twisting because the braces restrain only lateral
184 movement.
3, W
185
186 E5. SINGLE-ANGLE COMPRESSION MEMBERS
E
187
188 The nominal compressive strength, Pn, of single-angle members shall be the lowest
ST I
U EV
189 value based on the limit states of flexural buckling in accordance with Section E3
190 or Section E7, as applicable, or flexural-torsional buckling in accordance with
191 Section E4. Flexural-torsional buckling need not be considered when
G R
192 b t ≤ 0.71 E Fy .
AU IC
195 ratios specified in Section E5(a) or E5(b), provided that the following
196 requirements are met:
197
PU
198 (1) Members are loaded at the ends in compression through the same one leg.
199 (2) Members are attached by welding or by connections with a minimum of two
200 bolts.
201 (3) There are no intermediate transverse loads.
202 (4) Lc r as determined in this section does not exceed 200.
203 (5) For unequal leg angles, the ratio of long leg width to short leg width is less
204 than 1.7.
205
206 Single-angle members that do not meet these requirements or the requirements
207 described in Section E5(a) or (b) shall be evaluated for combined axial load and
208 flexure using the provisions of Chapter H.
209 (a) For angles that are individual members or are web members of planar trusses
210 with adjacent web members attached to the same side of the gusset plate or
211 chord
212 (1) For equal-leg angles or unequal-leg angles connected through the longer
213 leg
L
214 (i) When ≤ 80
ra
Lc L
215 = 72 + 0.75 (E5-1)
r ra
L
216 (ii) When > 80
ra
217
Lc L
218 = 32 + 1.25 (E5-2)
r ra
219 (2) For unequal-leg angles connected through the shorter leg, Lc r from
Equations E5-1 and E5-2 shall be increased by adding 4 ( bl bs ) – 1 , but
2
220
221 Lc r of the members shall not be taken as less than 0.95L rz .
222
223 (b) For angles that are web members of box or space trusses with adjacent web
20 NE
224 members attached to the same side of the gusset plate or chord
225 (1) For equal-leg angles or unequal-leg angles connected through the longer
20 O
226 leg
L
3, W
227 (i) When ≤ 75
ra
E
Lc L
228 = 60 + 0.8 (E5-3)
ST I
r ra
U EV
L
229 (ii) When > 75
ra
G R
Lc L
230 = 45 + (E5-4)
r ra
AU IC
231
232 (2) For unequal-leg angles with leg length ratios less than 1.7 and connected
BL
233 through the shorter leg, Lc r from Equations E5-3 and E5-4 shall be
increased by adding 6 ( bl bs ) –1 , but Lc r of the member shall not be
2
234
PU
20 NE
269 (a) For intermediate connectors that are bolted snug-tight
20 O
270
2 2
Lc Lc a
3, W
271 = + (E6-1)
m
r r o ri
E
272
273
ST I
U EV
274 (b) For intermediate connectors that are welded or are connected by means of
275 pretensioned bolts with Class A or B faying surfaces
G R
a
276 (1) When ≤ 40
ri
AU IC
Lc Lc
277 = (E6-2a)
BL
r m r o
278
PU
a
279 (2) When > 40
ri
2 2
Lc Lc K i a
280 = + (E6-2b)
m
r r o ri
281
282 where
Lc
283 = modified slenderness ratio of built-up member
r m
Lc
284 = slenderness ratio of built-up member acting as a unit in the
r o
285 buckling direction being addressed
286 Lc = effective length of built-up member, in. (mm)
287
288 Ki = 0.50 for angles back-to-back
289 = 0.75 for channels back-to-back
290 = 0.86 for all other cases
Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, xx, 2022
PUBLIC REVIEW ONE Draft August 3, 2020
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
E-9
20 NE
307 for a distance equal to 1-1/2 times the maximum width of the member.
308 Along the length of built-up compression members between the end
20 O
309 connections required in the foregoing, longitudinal spacing of intermittent
310 welds or bolts shall be adequate to provide the required strength. For
3, W
311 limitations on the longitudinal spacing of fasteners between elements in
312 continuous contact consisting of a plate and a shape, or two plates, see Section
E
313 J3.5. Where a component of a built-up compression member consists of an
314 outside plate, the maximum spacing shall not exceed the thickness of the
ST I
U EV
315 thinner outside plate times 0.75 E / Fy , nor 12 in. (300 mm), when
316 intermittent welds are provided along the edges of the components or when
G R
317 fasteners are provided on all gage lines at each section. When fasteners are
318 staggered, the maximum spacing of fasteners on each gage line shall not
AU IC
319 exceed the thickness of the thinner outside plate times 1.12 E / Fy nor 18 in.
320 (460 mm).
BL
321 (c) Open sides of compression members built up from plates or shapes shall be
322 provided with continuous cover plates perforated with a succession of access
PU
323 openings. The unsupported width of such plates at access openings, as defined
324 in Section B4.1, is assumed to contribute to the available strength provided the
325 following requirements are met:
326 (1) The width-to-thickness ratio shall conform to the limitations of Section
327 B4.1.
328 User Note: It is conservative to use the limiting width-to-thickness ratio
329 for Case 7 in Table B4.1a with the width, b, taken as the transverse
330 distance between the nearest lines of fasteners. The net area of the plate is
331 taken at the widest hole. In lieu of this approach, the limiting width-to-
332 thickness ratio may be determined through analysis.
333 (2) The ratio of length (in direction of stress) to width of hole shall not
334 exceed 2.
335 (3) The clear distance between holes in the direction of stress shall be not less
336 than the transverse distance between nearest lines of connecting fasteners
337 or welds.
338 (4) The periphery of the holes at all points shall have a minimum radius of 1-
339 1/2 in. (38 mm).
340 (d) As an alternative to perforated cover plates, lacing with tie plates is permitted
341 at each end and at intermediate points if the lacing is interrupted. Tie plates
342 shall be as near the ends as practicable. In members providing available
343 strength, the end tie plates shall have a length of not less than the distance
344 between the lines of fasteners or welds connecting them to the components of
345 the member. Intermediate tie plates shall have a length not less than one-half
346 of this distance. The thickness of tie plates shall be not less than one-fiftieth of
347 the distance between lines of welds or fasteners connecting them to the
348 segments of the members. In welded construction, the welding on each line
349 connecting a tie plate shall total not less than one-third the length of the plate.
350 In bolted construction, the spacing in the direction of stress in tie plates shall
351 be not more than six diameters and the tie plates shall be connected to each
352 segment by at least three fasteners.
353 (e) Lacing, including flat bars, angles, channels or other shapes employed as
354 lacing, shall be so spaced that L r of the flange element included between
355 their connections shall not exceed three-fourths times the governing
356 slenderness ratio for the member as a whole. Lacing shall be proportioned to
20 NE
357 provide a shearing strength normal to the axis of the member equal to 2% of
358 the available compressive strength of the member. For lacing bars arranged in
20 O
359 single systems, L r shall not exceed 140. For double lacing, this ratio shall
360 not exceed 200. Double lacing bars shall be joined at the intersections. For
3, W
361 lacing bars in compression, L is permitted to be taken as the unsupported
362 length of the lacing bar between welds or fasteners connecting it to the
E
363 components of the built-up member for single lacing, and 70% of that distance
364 for double lacing.
ST I
U EV
365 User Note: The inclination of lacing bars to the axis of the member shall
366 preferably be not less than 60º for single lacing and 45º for double lacing.
367 When the distance between the lines of welds or fasteners in the flanges is
G R
368 more than 15 in. (380 mm), the lacing should preferably be double or made of
369 angles.
AU IC
371
372 E7. MEMBERS WITH SLENDER ELEMENTS
PU
373
374 This section applies to slender-element compression members, as defined in
375 Section B4.1 for elements in axial compression.
376
377 The nominal compressive strength, Pn, shall be the lowest value based on the
378 applicable limit states of flexural buckling, torsional buckling, and flexural-
379 torsional buckling in interaction with local buckling.
380
381 Pn = Fn Ae (E7-1)
382 where
383 Ae = summation of the effective areas of the cross section based on reduced
384 effective widths, be, de or he, or the area as given by Equations E7-6 or
385 E7-7, in.2 (mm2)
386 Fn = nominal stress determined in accordance with Section E3 or E4, ksi
387 (MPa). For single angles, determine Fn in accordance with Section E3
388 only.
389
390 User Note: The effective area, Ae, may be determined by deducting from the gross
391 area, Ag, the reduction in area of each slender element determined as ( b – be ) t .
392
393 1. Slender Element Members Excluding Round HSS
394
395 The effective width, be, (for tees, this is de; for webs, this is he) for slender
396 elements is determined as follows:
397
Fy
398 (a) When λ ≤ λ r
Fn
399 be = b (E7-2)
400
Fy
401 (b) When λ > λ r
Fn
402
F Fel
403 be = b 1 − c1 el (E7-3)
Fn Fn
20 NE
404
405 where
406 b = width of the element (for tees this is d; for webs this is h), in. (mm)
20 O
407 c1 = effective width imperfection adjustment factor determined from Table E7.1
1 − 1 − 4c1
3, W
408 c2 = (E7-4)
2c1
E
409 λ = width-to-thickness ratio for the element as defined in Section B4.1
410 λr = limiting width-to-thickness ratio as defined in Table B4.1a
ST I
U EV
2
λ
411 Fel = c2 r Fy (E7-5)
λ
G R
414
Table E7.1
BL
0.038 E 2
426 Ae = + Ag (E7-7)
Fy ( D / t ) 3
427
428 where
429 D = outside diameter of round HSS, in. (mm)
430 t = thickness of wall, in. (mm)
20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU
1
2 CHAPTER F
20 NE
16 Noncompact or Slender Flanges Bent about Their Major Axis
17 F4. Other I-Shaped Members with Compact or Noncompact Webs Bent
18 about Their Major Axis
20 O
19 F5. Doubly Symmetric and Singly Symmetric I-Shaped Members with
20 Slender Webs Bent about Their Major Axis
3, W
21 F6. I-Shaped Members and Channels Bent about Their Minor Axis
22 F7. Square and Rectangular HSS and Box Sections
E
23 F8. Round HSS
24 F9. Tees and Double Angles Loaded in the Plane of Symmetry
ST I
U EV
30 User Note: For cases not included in this chapter, the following sections apply:
31 • Chapter G Design provisions for shear
BL
40
TABLE USER NOTE F1.1
Selection Table for the Application
of Chapter F Sections
Section in Cross Flange Web Limit
Chapter F Section Slenderness Slenderness States
F2 C C Y, LTB
CFY,LTB,
F4 C, NC, S C, NC
20 NE
FLB, TFY
20 O
CFY,LTB,
F5 C, NC, S S
FLB, TFY
3, W
E
F6 C, NC, S N/A Y, FLB
ST I
U EV
Y, FLB,
F7 C, NC, S C, NC, S
G R
WLB, LTB
AU IC
F8 N/A N/A Y, LB
BL
Y, LTB,
F9 C, NC, S N/A
FLB, WLB
PU
Y, LTB,
F10 N/A N/A
LLB
Unsymmetrical
shapes, All limit
F12 N/A N/A
other than single states
angles
Y = yielding, CFY = compression flange yielding, LTB = lateral-torsional buckling, FLB =
flange local buckling, WLB = web local buckling, TFY = tension flange yielding, LLB = leg
local buckling, LB = local buckling, C = compact, NC = noncompact, S = slender, N/A = not
applicable
41
20 NE
58
59 The lateral-torsional buckling modification factor, Cb, for nonuniform
60 moment diagrams when both ends of the segment are braced is deter-
20 O
61 mined as follows:
62
3, W
12.5M max
63 Cb = (F1-1)
2.5M max + 3M A + 4 M B + 3M C
E
64 where
ST I
66 kip-in. (N-mm)
67 MA = absolute value of moment at quarter point of the unbraced
68 segment, kip-in. (N-mm)
G R
73
74 User Note: For doubly symmetric members with no transverse loading
PU
75 between brace points, Equation F1-1 reduces to 1.0 for the case of equal
76 end moments of opposite sign (uniform moment), 2.27 for the case of
77 equal end moments of the same sign (reverse curvature bending), and to
78 1.67 when one end moment equals zero. For singly symmetric members, a
79 more detailed analysis for Cb is presented in the Commentary. The
80 Commentary provides additional equations for Cb that provide improved
81 characterization of the effects of a variety of member boundary conditions.
82
83 For cantilevers where warping is prevented at the support and where the
84 free end is unbraced, Cb = 1.0.
85
86 (d) In singly symmetric members subject to reverse curvature bending, the
87 lateral-torsional buckling strength shall be checked for both flanges. The
88 available flexural strength shall be greater than or equal to the maximum
89 required moment causing compression within the flange under consider-
90 ation.
91
92 F2. DOUBLY SYMMETRIC COMPACT I-SHAPED MEMBERS AND
93 CHANNELS BENT ABOUT THEIR MAJOR AXIS
94
104 The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the lower value obtained
105 according to the limit states of yielding (plastic moment) and lateral-torsional
106 buckling.
107 1. Yielding
108
109 M n = M p = Fy Z x (F2-1)
20 NE
110
111 where
112 Fy = specified minimum yield stress of the type of steel being used, ksi
20 O
113 (MPa)
114 Zx = plastic section modulus about the x-axis, in.3 (mm3)
115
3, W
116 2. Lateral-Torsional Buckling
E
117 (a) When Lb ≤ Lp , the limit state of lateral-torsional buckling does not
ST I
118 apply.
U EV
Lb − L p
120 M n = Cb M p − ( M p − 0.7 Fy S x ) ≤ M p (F2-2)
Lr − L p
AU IC
2
π πE
140 M cr = Cb EI y GJ + I y Cw
Lb Lb
141 The advantage of Equations F2-3 and F2-4 is that the form is very similar
142 to the expression for lateral-torsional buckling of singly symmetric
143 sections given in Equations F4-4 and F4-5.
144
145 Lp, the limiting laterally unbraced length for the limit state of yielding,
146 in. (mm), is:
E
147 L p = 1.76ry (F2-5)
Fy
148
149 Lr, the limiting unbraced length for the limit state of inelastic lateral-
150 torsional buckling, in. (mm), is:
151
20 NE
2 2
E Jc Jc 0.7 Fy
152 Lr = 1.95rts + + 6.76 (F2-6)
0.7 Fy S x ho S x ho E
20 O
153 where
3, W
154 ry = radius of gyration about y-axis, in. (mm)
E
I y Cw
155 rts2 = (F2-7)
ST I
Sx
U EV
158
AU IC
ho Iy
PU
162 c= (F2-8b)
2 Cw
163 where
164 Iy = moment of inertia about the y-axis, in.4 (mm4)
165
166 User Note:
I y ho2
167 For doubly symmetric I-shapes with rectangular flanges, Cw = , and
4
168 thus, Equation F2-7 becomes
I y ho
169 rts2 =
2S x
170 rts may be approximated accurately to conservatively as the radius of
171 gyration of the compression flange plus one-sixth of the web:
bf
172 rts =
1 htw
12 1 +
6 bf t f
173
174 F3. DOUBLY SYMMETRIC I-SHAPED MEMBERS WITH COMPACT
175 WEBS AND NONCOMPACT OR SLENDER FLANGES BENT
176 ABOUT THEIR MAJOR AXIS
177
178 This section applies to doubly symmetric I-shaped members bent about their
179 major axis having compact webs and noncompact or slender flanges as
180 defined in Section B4.1 for flexure.
181
182 User Note: The following shapes have noncompact flanges for Fy = 50 ksi
183 (345 MPa): W21×48, W14×99, W14×90, W12×65, W10×12, W8×31,
184 W8×10, W6×15, W6×9, W6×8.5, and M4×6. All other ASTM A6 W, S, and
185 M shapes have compact flanges for Fy ≤ 50 ksi (345 MPa).
186
187 The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the lower value obtained
188 according to the limit states of lateral-torsional buckling and compression
20 NE
189 flange local buckling.
190
191 1. Lateral-Torsional Buckling
192
20 O
For lateral-torsional buckling, the provisions of Section F2.2 shall apply.
3, W
193 2. Compression Flange Local Buckling
E
194
ST I
λ − λ pf
196 M n = M p − ( M p − 0.7 Fy S x ) (F3-1)
λ rf − λ pf
G R
197
AU IC
0.9 Ek c S x
200 Mn = (F3-2)
λ2
PU
201 where
4
202 kc = and shall not be taken less than 0.35 nor greater than 0.76 for
h tw
203 calculation purposes
204 h = distance as defined in Section B4.1b, in. (mm)
bf
2t
205 λ = f
206 bf = width of the flange, in. (mm)
207 tf = thickness of the flange, in. (mm)
208 λpf = λp is the limiting width-to-thickness ratio for a compact flange as
209 defined in Table B4.1b
210 λrf = λr is the limiting width-to-thickness ratio for a noncompact flange as
211 defined in Table B4.1b
212
213 F4. OTHER I-SHAPED MEMBERS WITH COMPACT OR
214 NONCOMPACT WEBS BENT ABOUT THEIR MAJOR AXIS
215
216 This section applies to doubly symmetric I-shaped members bent about their
217 major axis with noncompact webs and singly symmetric I-shaped members
218 with webs attached to the mid-width of the flanges, bent about their major
219 axis, with compact or noncompact webs, as defined in Section B4.1 for
220 flexure.
221
222 User Note: I-shaped members for which this section is applicable may be
223 designed conservatively using Section F5.
224
225 The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the lowest value obtained
226 according to the limit states of compression flange yielding, lateral-torsional
227 buckling, compression flange local buckling, and tension flange yielding.
228
229 1. Compression Flange Yielding
230
231 Mn = RpcMyc (F4-1)
232 where
20 NE
233 Myc = FySxc = yield moment in the compression flange, kip-in. (N-mm)
234 Rpc = web plastification factor, determined in accordance with Section
20 O
235 F4.2(c)(6)
236 Sxc = elastic section modulus referred to compression flange, in.3 (mm3)
237
3, W
238 2. Lateral-Torsional Buckling
E
239 (a) When Lb ≤ Lp, the limit state of lateral-torsional buckling does not apply.
ST I
U EV
Lr − L p
242 (c) When Lb > Lr
AU IC
244 where
245 (1) Myc, the yield moment in the compression flange, kip-in. (N-mm), is:
PU
258 (3) FL, nominal compression flange stress above which the inelastic
259 buckling limit states apply, ksi (MPa), is determined as follows:
260
S xt
261 (i) When ≥ 0.7
S xc
262 FL = 0.7 Fy (F4-6a)
263
S xt
264 (ii) When < 0.7
S xc
S xt
265 FL = Fy ≥ 0.5 Fy (F4-6b)
S xc
266 where
267 Sxt = elastic section modulus referred to tension flange, in.3 (mm3)
268
269 (4) Lp, the limiting laterally unbraced length for the limit state of yieling,
270 in. (mm) is:
20 NE
E
271 L p = 1.1rt (F4-7)
Fy
20 O
272
273 (5) Lr, the limiting unbraced length for the limit state of inelastic lateral-
3, W
274 torsional buckling, in. (mm), is:
275
E
2 2
ST I
E J J FL
U EV
hc
280 (a) When ≤ λ pw
BL
tw
Mp
281 R pc = (F4-9a)
PU
M yc
hc
282 (b) When > λ pw
tw
Mp Mp λ − λ pw M p
283 R pc = − − 1 ≤ (F4-9b)
M yc M yc λ rw − λ pw M yc
284
285 (ii) When I yc I y ≤ 0.23
286 Rpc = 1.0 (F4-10)
287
288 where
289 Mp = FyZx ≤ 1.6FySx
290 hc = twice the distance from the centroid to the following: the in-
291 side face of the compression flange less the fillet or corner
292 radius, for rolled shapes; the nearest line of fasteners at the
293 compression flange or the inside face of the compression
294 flange when welds are used, for built-up sections, in. (mm)
hc
295 =
tw
296 λpw = λp, the limiting width-to-thickness ratio for a compact web
297 as defined in Table B4.1b
298 λrw = λr, the limiting width-to-thickness ratio for a noncompact
299 web as defined in Table B4.1b
300
301 (7) rt, the effective radius of gyration for lateral-torsional buckling, in.
302 (mm), is determined as follows:
303 (i) For I-shapes with a rectangular compression flange
304
b fc
305 rt = (F4-11)
1
12 1 + aw
6
306
307 where
20 NE
hc t w
308 aw = (F4-12)
b fc t fc
20 O
309 bfc = width of compression flange, in. (mm)
310 tfc = thickness of compression flange, in. (mm)
3, W
311 tw = thickness of web, in. (mm)
312
E
313 (ii) For I-shapes with a channel cap or a cover plate attached to the
314 compression flange
ST I
U EV
315
316 rt = radius of gyration of the flange components in flexural
317 compression plus one-third of the web area in compres-
G R
320
321 3. Compression Flange Local Buckling
BL
322
323 (a) For sections with compact flanges, the limit state of local buckling does
324 not apply.
PU
336 λpf = λp, the limiting width-to-thickness ratio for a compact flange as
337 defined in Table B4.1b
338 λrf = λr, the limiting width-to-thickness ratio for a noncompact flange
339 as defined in Table B4.1b
340
341 4. Tension Flange Yielding
342
343 (a) When Sxt ≥ Sxc, the limit state of tension flange yielding does not apply.
344
345 (b) When Sxt < Sxc
346
347 Mn = RptMyt (F4-15)
348 where
349 M yt = Fy Sxt = yield moment in the tension flange, kip-in. (N-mm)
350
351 Rpt, the web plastification factor corresponding to the tension flange
352 yielding limit state, is determined as follows:
20 NE
353
354 (1) When Iyc/Iy > 0.23
20 O
hc
≤ λ pw
355 t
(i) When w
3, W
Mp
356 R pt = (F4-16a)
M yt
E
ST I
hc
U EV
Mp Mp λ − λ pw M p
G R
358 R pt = − − 1 ≤ (F4-16b)
M yt M yt λ rw − λ pw M yt
AU IC
359
BL
362 where
363 Mp = FyZx ≤ 1.6FySx
h
364 λ= c
tw
365 λpw = λp, the limiting width-to-thickness ratio for a compact web as
366 defined in Table B4.1b
367 λrw = λr, the limiting width-to-thickness ratio for a noncompact web
368 as defined in Table B4.1b
369
370 F5. DOUBLY SYMMETRIC AND SINGLY SYMMETRIC I-SHAPED
371 MEMBERS WITH SLENDER WEBS BENT ABOUT THEIR MAJOR
372 AXIS
373
374 This section applies to doubly symmetric and singly symmetric I-shaped
375 members with slender webs attached to the mid-width of the flanges and bent
376 about their major axis as defined in Section B4.1 for flexure.
377
378 The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the lowest value obtained
379 according to the limit states of compression flange yielding, lateral-torsional
380 buckling, compression flange local buckling, and tension flange yielding.
381
382 1. Compression Flange Yielding
383
384 M n = Rpg Fy S xc (F5-1)
385
386 2. Lateral-Torsional Buckling
387
388 M n = Rpg Fcr S xc (F5-2)
389 (a) When Lb ≤ Lp, the limit state of lateral-torsional buckling does not apply.
390
391 (b) When Lp < Lb ≤ Lr
392
Lb − L p
Fcr = Cb Fy − ( 0.3Fy ) ≤ Fy
20 NE
393 (F5-3)
Lr − L p
394
20 O
395 (c) When Lb > Lr
Cb π2 E
396 Fcr = ≤ Fy (F5-4)
3, W
2
Lb
r
t
E
397
ST I
U EV
398 where
399 Lp is defined by Equation F4-7
E
G R
πrt
0.7 Fy
400 Lr = (F5-5)
AU IC
aw
405 R pg = 1 − − 5.7 ≤ 1.0 (F5-6)
1, 200 + 300aw tw Fy
406
407 and
408 aw is defined by Equation F4-12, but shall not exceed 10
409
410 3. Compression Flange Local Buckling
412 (a) For sections with compact flanges, the limit state of compression flange
413 local buckling does not apply.
414 (b) For sections with noncompact flanges
λ− λ pf
415 Fcr = Fy − ( 0.3Fy ) (F5-8)
λ rf − λ pf
416 (c) For sections with slender flanges
0.9 Ekc
417 Fcr = 2 (F5-9)
bf
2t f
418 where
419 kc = 4 and shall not be taken less than 0.35 nor greater than
h tw
420 0.76 for calculation purposes
b fc
421 λ =
2t fc
422 λpf = λp, the limiting width-to-thickness ratio for a compact flange as
423 defined in Table B4.1b
424 λrf = λr, the limiting width-to-thickness ratio for a noncompact flange
425 as defined in Table B4.1b
426
427 4. Tension Flange Yielding
20 NE
428
429 (a) When Sxt ≥ Sxc, the limit state of tension flange yielding does not
430 apply.
20 O
431
432 (b) When Sxt < Sxc
3, W
433
Mn = Fy Sxt
E
434 (F5-10)
435
ST I
U EV
439 This section applies to I-shaped members and channels bent about their
440 minor axis.
AU IC
441
442 The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the lower value obtained
BL
443 according to the limit states of yielding (plastic moment) and flange local
444 buckling.
445
PU
446 1. Yielding
Mn = M p = Fy Z y ≤ 1.6Fy Sy
447 (F6-1)
448 where
449 Sy = elastic section modulus taken about the y-axis, in.3 (mm3)
450 Zy = plastic section modulus taken about the y-axis, in.3 (mm3)
451
452 2. Flange Local Buckling
453 (a) For sections with compact flanges, the limit state of flange local
454 buckling does not apply.
455 User Note: For Fy = 50 ksi (345 MPa), all current ASTM A6 W, S, M,
456 C, and MC shapes except W21x48, W14x99, W14x90, W12x65,
457 W10x12, W8x31, W8x10, W6x15, W6x9, W6x8.5, and M4x6 have
458 compact flanges.
λ − λ pf
460 M n = M p − ( M p − 0.7 Fy S y ) (F6-2)
λ −λ
rf pf
461 (c) For sections with slender flanges
462 M n = Fcr S y (F6-3)
463 where
0.70 E
464 Fcr = 2
(F6-4)
b
tf
465 b = for flanges of I-shaped members, half the full flange width, bf ;
466 for flanges of channels, the full nominal dimension of the
467 flange, in. (mm)
468 tf = thickness of the flange, in. (mm)
b
469 λ =
tf
20 NE
470 λpf = λp, the limiting width-to-thickness ratio for a compact flange as
471 defined in Table B4.1b
20 O
472 λrf = λr, the limiting width-to-thickness ratio for a noncompact flange
473 as defined in Table B4.1b
3, W
474
475 F7. SQUARE AND RECTANGULAR HSS AND BOX SECTIONS
E
476
ST I
477 This section applies to square and rectangular HSS, and box sections bent
U EV
478 about either axis, having compact, noncompact, or slender webs or flanges,
479 as defined in Section B4.1 for flexure.
G R
480 The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the lowest value obtained
481 according to the limit states of yielding (plastic moment), flange local
AU IC
482 buckling, web local buckling, and lateral-torsional buckling under pure
483 flexure.
BL
484
485 1. Yielding
PU
486
487 M n = M p = Fy Z (F7-1)
488
489 where
490 Z = plastic section modulus about the axis of bending, in.3 (mm3)
491
492 2. Flange Local Buckling
493
494 (a) For compact sections, the limit state of flange local buckling does not
495 apply.
496 (b) For sections with noncompact flanges
497
λ − λ pf
498 M n = M p − ( M p − Fy S ) ≤Mp (F7-2)
λ rf − λ pf
499 where
500 S = elastic section modulus about the axis of bending, in.3 (mm3)
501 b = width of compression flange as defined in Section B4.1b, in. (mm)
502 tf = thickness of the flange, in. (mm)
b
503 λ =
tf
504 λpf = λp, the limiting width-to-thickness ratio for a compact flange as
505 defined in Table B4.1b
506 λrf = λr, the limiting width-to-thickness ratio for a noncompact flange
507 as defined in Table B4.1b
508
509 (c) For sections with slender flanges
510
511 M n = Fy Se (F7-3)
512
513 where
514 Se = effective section modulus determined with the effective width,
515 be, of the compression flange taken as:
516
517 (1) For HSS
20 NE
518
E 0.38 E
519 be = 1.92t f 1 − ≤ b (F7-4)
20 O
Fy b /tf Fy
520
3, W
521 (2) For box sections
522
E
E 0.34 E
ST I
Fy b/tf Fy
524 3. Web Local Buckling
G R
525
526 (a) For compact sections, the limit state of web local buckling does not
AU IC
527 apply.
528 (b) For sections with noncompact webs
BL
529
530
λ − λ pw
PU
547
548 User Note: Box sections with slender webs and slender flanges are not
549 addressed in this Specification.
550
551 User Note: There are no HSS with slender webs.
552
553 4. Lateral-Torsional Buckling
554
555 (a) When Lb ≤ Lp , the limit state of lateral-torsional buckling does not
556 apply.
557
558 (b) When Lp < Lb ≤ Lr
Lb − L p
559 M n = Cb M p − ( M p − 0.7 Fy S x ) ≤ M p (F7-10)
Lr − L p
560 (c) When Lb > Lr
20 NE
JAg
561 M n = 2 ECb ≤Mp (F7-11)
Lb ry
20 O
562 where
563 Ag = gross area of member, in.2 (mm2)
564 Lp , the limiting laterally unbraced length for the limit state of yielding,
3, W
565 in. (mm), is:
566
E
JAg
ST I
Mp
568
569 Lr, the limiting laterally unbraced length for the limit state of inelastic
G R
JAg
572 Lr = 2 Ery (F7-13)
BL
0.7 Fy S x
573
PU
574 User Note: Lateral-torsional buckling will not occur in square sections or
575 sections bending about their minor axis. In HSS sizes, deflection will usually
576 control before there is a significant reduction in flexural strength due to
577 lateral-torsional buckling. The same is true for box sections, and lateral-
578 torsional buckling will usually only be a consideration for sections with high
579 depth-to-width ratios.
580
581 F8. ROUND HSS
0.45E
582 This section applies to round HSS having D/t ratios of less than .
Fy
583 The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the lower value obtained
584 according to the limit states of yielding (plastic moment) and local buckling.
585 1. Yielding
586 M n = M p = Fy Z (F8-1)
587
588 2. Local Buckling
589
590 (a) For compact sections, the limit state of flange local buckling does
591 not apply.
592
593 (b) For noncompact sections
0.021E
594 Mn = + Fy S (F8-2)
D
t
595 (c) For sections with slender walls
596
597 M n = Fcr S (F8-3)
598 where
599 D = outside diameter of round HSS, in. (mm)
0.33E
600 Fcr = (F8-4)
D
t
20 NE
601 t = design wall thickness of HSS member, in. (mm)
602
603 F9. TEES AND DOUBLE ANGLES LOADED IN THE PLANE OF
20 O
604 SYMMETRY
605
3, W
606 This section applies to tees and double angles loaded in the plane of
607 symmetry.
E
608 The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the lowest value obtained
ST I
610 buckling, flange local buckling, and local buckling of tee stems and double
611 angle web legs.
G R
612
613 1. Yielding
614
AU IC
615 Mn = Mp (F9-1)
BL
616 where
617
618 (a) For tee stems and web legs in tension
PU
619
620 M p = Fy Z x ≤ 1.6M y (F9-2)
621
622 where
623 My = yield moment about the axis of bending, kip-in. (N-mm)
624 = FySx (F9-3)
625
626 (b) For tee stems in compression
627
628 Mp = My (F9-4)
629
630 (c) For double angles with web legs in compression
631
632 M p = 1.5M y (F9-5)
633
634 2. Lateral-Torsional Buckling
635
636 (a) For stems and web legs in tension
637
638 (1) When Lb ≤ Lp , the limit state of lateral-torsional buckling does not
639 apply.
640
L p < Lb ≤ Lr
641 (2) When
Lb − L p
642 Mn = M p − (M p − M y ) (F9-6)
Lr − L p
643 (3) When Lb > Lr
644
645 M n = M cr (F9-7)
646 where
E
647 Lp = 1.76ry (F9-8)
Fy
E IyJ Fy dS
648 Lr = 1.95 2.36 x + 1 (F9-9)
20 NE
y x
F S E J
649 Mcr =
1.95 E
(
I y J B + 1 + B2 ) (F9-10)
20 O
Lb
d Iy
3, W
650 B = 2.3 (F9-11)
Lb J
E
651 d = depth of tee or width of web leg in tension, in. (mm)
652
ST I
U EV
653 (b) For stems and web legs in compression anywhere along the unbraced
654 length, Mcr is given by Equation F9-10 with
655
G R
d Iy
656 B = −2.3 (F9-12)
Lb J
AU IC
657 where
658 d = depth of tee or width of web leg in compression, in. (mm)
BL
659
660 (1) For tee stems
PU
661
662 Mn = Mcr ≤ M y (F9-13)
663
664 (2) For double-angle web legs, Mn shall be determined using Equations
665 F10-2 and F10-3 with Mcr determined using Equation F9-10 and My
666 determined using Equation F9-3.
667
668 3. Flange Local Buckling of Tees and Double-Angle Legs
669
670 (a) For tee flanges
671 (1) For sections with a compact flange in flexural compression, the limit
672 state of flange local buckling does not apply.
673
674 (2) For sections with a noncompact flange in flexural compression
675
λ − λ pf
676 M n = M p − ( M p − 0.7 Fy S xc ) ≤ 1.6M y (F9-14)
λ rf − λ pf
677
20 NE
690
691 (b) For double-angle flange legs
692
20 O
693 The nominal flexural strength, Mn, for double angles with the flange legs
694 in compression shall be determined in accordance with Section F10.3,
695 with Sc referred to the compression flange.
3, W
696
697 4. Local Buckling of Tee Stems and Double-Angle Web Legs in Flexural
E
698 Compression
ST I
699
U EV
702
703 where
AU IC
704 Sx = elastic section modulus taken about the x-axis, in.3 (mm3)
705
BL
d E
≤ 0.84
tw Fy
708 (1) When
709
710 Fcr = Fy (F9-17)
711
E d E
0.84 < ≤ 1.52
Fy tw Fy
712 (2) When
713
d Fy
714 Fcr = 1.43 − 0.515 Fy (F9-18)
tw E
715
d E
> 1.52
tw Fy
716 (3) When
717
1.52 E
718 Fcr = 2
(F9-19)
d
t
w
719
720 (b) For double-angle web legs
721
722 The nominal flexural strength, Mn, for double angles with the web legs in
723 compression shall be determined in accordance with Section F10.3, with
724 Sc taken as the elastic section modulus.
725
726 F10. SINGLE ANGLES
727
728 This section applies to single angles with and without continuous lateral
729 restraint along their length.
730
731 Single angles with continuous lateral-torsional restraint along the length
20 NE
732 are permitted to be designed on the basis of geometric axis (x, y) bending.
733 Single angles without continuous lateral-torsional restraint along the length
734 shall be designed using the provisions for principal axis bending except
20 O
735 where the provision for bending about a geometric axis is permitted.
736 If the moment resultant has components about both principal axes, with or
3, W
737 without axial load, or the moment is about one principal axis and there is
738 axial load, the combined stress ratio shall be determined using the provi-
E
739 sions of Section H2.
ST I
740 User Note: For geometric axis design, use section properties computed
U EV
741 about the x- and y-axis of the angle, parallel and perpendicular to the legs.
742 For principal axis design, use section properties computed about the major
G R
747 User Note: For bending about the minor principal axis, only the limit
748 states of yielding and leg local buckling apply.
PU
749 1. Yielding
750
751 Mn = 1.5My (F10-1)
752
753 2. Lateral-Torsional Buckling
754
755 For single angles without continuous lateral-torsional restraint along the
756 length
My
757 (a) When ≤ 1.0
M cr
My
758 M n = 1.92 − 1.17 M y ≤ 1.5M y (F10-2)
M cr
My
759 (b) When > 1.0
M cr
0.17 M cr
760 M n = 0.92 − M cr (F10-3)
My
761
762 where
763 Mcr, the elastic lateral-torsional buckling moment, is determined as
764 follows:
765
766 (1) For bending about the major principal axis of single angles
767
9 EAg rz tCb
2
β r β r
768 M cr = 1 + 4.4 w z + 4.4 w z (F10-4)
8 Lb Lb t Lb t
769 where
770 Cb is computed using Equation F1-1 with a maximum value of 1.5
771 Ag = gross area of angle, in.2(mm2)
772 Lb = laterally unbraced length of member, in. (mm)
20 NE
773 rz = radius of gyration about the minor principal axis, in. (mm)
774 t = thickness of angle leg, in. (mm)
775 βw = section property for single angles about major principal axis,
20 O
776 in. (mm). βw is positive with short legs in compression and
777 negative with long legs in compression for unequal-leg an-
3, W
778 gles, and zero for equal-leg angles. If the long leg is in
779 compression anywhere along the unbraced length of the
E
781
U EV
782 User Note: The equation for βw and values for common angle
783 sizes are listed in the Commentary.
G R
784
785 (2) For bending about one of the geometric axes of an equal-leg angle
786 with no axial compression
AU IC
787
788 (i) With no lateral-torsional restraint:
BL
789
790 (a) With maximum compression at the toe
PU
0.58 Eb 4 tCb
2
Lb t
791 M cr = 1 + 0.88 2 − 1 (F10-5a)
Lb 2 b
792 (b) With maximum tension at the toe
0.58Eb4tCb
2
1 + 0.88 b + 1
Lt
793 M cr = (F10-5b)
Lb 2 b2
794 where
795 My shall be taken as 0.80 times the yield moment calculated
796 using the geometric section modulus.
797 b = width of leg, in. (mm)
798
799 (ii) With lateral-torsional restraint at the point of maximum
800 moment only:
801
802 Mcr shall be taken as 1.25 times Mcr computed using Equation
803 F10-5a or F10-5b.
804
805 My shall be taken as the yield moment calculated using the ge-
806 ometric section modulus.
807
808 User Note: Mn may be taken as My for single angles with their vertical leg
809 toe in compression, and having a span-to-depth ratio less than or equal to
2
1.64 E t Fy
810 − 1.4
Fy b E
811
812 3. Leg Local Buckling
813
814 The limit state of leg local buckling applies when the toe of the leg is in
815 compression.
816
817 (a) For compact sections, the limit state of leg local buckling does not apply.
818 (b) For sections with noncompact legs
20 NE
b Fy
819 M n = Fy S c 2.43 − 1.72 (F10-6)
t E
20 O
820 (c) For sections with slender legs
821
3, W
822 M n = Fcr S c (F10-7)
823 where
E
0.71E
824 Fcr = (F10-8)
ST I
2
b
U EV
t
825 Sc = elastic section modulus to the toe in compression relative to the
G R
826 axis of bending, in.3 (mm3). For bending about one of the geometric
827 axes of an equal-leg angle with no lateral-torsional restraint, Sc shall be
AU IC
830
831 F11. RECTANGULAR BARS AND ROUNDS
832
PU
833 This section applies to rectangular bars bent about either geometric axis, and
834 rounds.
835
836 The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the lower value obtained
837 according to the limit states of yielding (plastic moment) and lateral-torsional
838 buckling.
839
840 1. Yielding
841
842 For rectangular bars
843 Mn = M p = Fy Z ≤ 1.5Fy Sx (F11-1)
844
845 For rounds
846 Mn = M p = Fy Z ≤ 1.6Fy Sx (F11-2)
847
848
849 2. Lateral-Torsional Buckling
850
Lb d 0.08 E
851 (a) For rectangular bars with ≤ bent about their major axis,
t2 Fy
852 rectangular bars bent about their minor axis, and rounds, the limit state of
853 lateral-torsional buckling does not apply.
854
0.08 E Lb d 1.9 E
855 (b) For rectangular bars with < 2 ≤ bent about their major
Fy t Fy
856 axis
857
L d Fy
858 M n = Cb 1.52 − 0.274 b2 M y ≤ M p (F11-3)
t E
859 where
860 Lb = length between points that are either braced against lateral
861 displacement of the compression region, or between points
862 braced to prevent twist of the cross section, in. (mm)
863
20 NE
Lb d 1.9 E
864 (c) For rectangular bars with > bent about their major axis
t2 Fy
20 O
865 M n = Fcr S x ≤ M p (F11-4)
866 where
3, W
1.9 ECb
867 Fcr = (F11-5)
Lb d
E
t2
ST I
U EV
868
869 F12. UNSYMMETRICAL SHAPES
870
G R
871 This section applies to all unsymmetrical shapes except single angles.
872
AU IC
873 The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the lowest value obtained
874 according to the limit states of yielding (yield moment), lateral-torsional
BL
878 where
879 Smin = minimum elastic section modulus relative to the axis of bending,
880 in.3 (mm3)
881
882 User Note: The design provisions within this section can be overly
883 conservative for certain shapes, unbraced lengths, and moment diagrams. To
884 improve economy, the provisions of Appendix 1.3 are recommended as an
885 alternative for determining the nominal flexural strength of members of
886 unsymmetrical shape.
887
888 1. Yielding
889
890 Fn = Fy (F12-2)
891
892 2. Lateral-Torsional Buckling
893
894 Fn = Fcr ≤ Fy (F12-3)
895 where
20 NE
913 This section applies to rolled or built-up shapes and cover-plated beams with
914 holes, proportioned on the basis of flexural strength of the gross section.
20 O
915 In addition to the limit states specified in other sections of this Chapter, the
916 nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be limited according to the limit state of
3, W
917 tensile rupture of the tension flange.
(a) When Fu Afn ≥ Yt Fy Afg , the limit state of tensile rupture does not apply.
E
918
919
ST I
U EV
920 (b) When Fu Afn < Yt Fy Afg , the nominal flexural strength, M n , at the
921 location of the holes in the tension flange shall not be taken greater than
G R
922
Fu A fn
923 Mn = Sx (F13-1)
AU IC
Afg
924 where
BL
925 Afg = gross area of tension flange, calculated in accordance with Section
926 B4.3a, in.2 (mm2)
PU
927 Afn = net area of tension flange, calculated in accordance with Section
928 B4.3b, in.2 (mm2)
929 Fu = specified minimum tensile strength, ksi (MPa)
930 Sx = minimum elastic section modulus taken about the x-axis, in.3
931 (mm3)
932 Yt = 1.0 for Fy/Fu ≤ 0.8
933 = 1.1 otherwise
934
935 2. Proportioning Limits for I-Shaped Members
936
937 Singly symmetric I-shaped members shall satisfy the following limit:
938
I yc
939 0.1 ≤ ≤ 0.9 (F13-2)
Iy
940
941 I-shaped members with slender webs shall also satisfy the following limits:
942
a
943 (a) When ≤ 1.5
h
944
h E
945 t = 12.0 (F13-3)
w max Fy
946
a
947 (b) When > 1.5
h
948
h 0.40 E
949 t = (F13-4)
w max Fy
950
951 where
952 a = clear distance between transverse stiffeners, in. (mm)
953
954 In unstiffened girders, h/tw shall not exceed 260. The ratio of 2 times the web
955 area in compression to the compression flange area, aw, as defined by
956 Equation F4-12, shall not exceed 10.
20 NE
957
958 3. Cover Plates
20 O
959
960 For members with cover plates, the following provisions apply:
961
3, W
962 (a) Flanges of welded beams or girders are permitted to be varied in
963 thickness or width by splicing a series of plates or by the use of cover
E
964 plates.
ST I
965
U EV
966 (b) High-strength bolts or welds connecting flange to web, or cover plate to
967 flange, shall be proportioned to resist the total horizontal shear resulting
G R
968 from the bending forces on the girder. The longitudinal distribution of
969 these bolts or intermittent welds shall be in proportion to the intensity of
AU IC
975 proportioned to transmit to the web any loads applied directly to the
976 flange, unless provision is made to transmit such loads by direct bearing.
977
978 (d) Partial-length cover plates shall be extended beyond the theoretical
979 cutoff point and the extended portion shall be attached to the beam or
980 girder by high-strength bolts in a slip-critical connection or fillet welds.
981 The attachment shall, at the applicable strength given in Sections J2.2,
982 J3.8 or B3.11, develop the cover plate’s portion of the flexural strength
983 in the beam or girder at the theoretical cutoff point.
984
985 (e) For welded cover plates, the welds connecting the cover plate
986 termination to the beam or girder shall be continuous welds along both
987 edges of the cover plate in the length a′, defined in the following, and
988 shall develop the cover plate’s portion of the available strength of the
989 beam or girder at the distance a′ from the end of the cover plate.
990
991 (1) When there is a continuous weld equal to or larger than three-fourths
992 of the plate thickness across the end of the plate
993
994 a′ = w (F13-5)
995
996 where
997 w = width of cover plate, in. (mm)
998
999 (2) When there is a continuous weld smaller than three-fourths of the
1000 plate thickness across the end of the plate
1001
1002 a′ = 1.5w (F13-6)
1003
1004 (3) When there is no weld across the end of the plate
1005
1006 a′ = 2w (F13-7)
1007
1008 4. Built-Up Beams
1009
1010 Where two or more beams or channels are used side by side to form a flexural
1011 member, they shall be connected together in compliance with Section E6.2.
20 NE
1012 When concentrated loads are carried from one beam to another or distributed
1013 between the beams, diaphragms having sufficient stiffness to distribute the
1014 load shall be welded or bolted between the beams.
20 O
1015
1016
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU
1 CHAPTER G
20 NE
15 G6. Doubly Symmetric and Singly Symmetric Members Subject to Minor-
16 Axis Shear
17 G7. Beams and Girders with Web Openings
20 O
18
19 User Note: For cases not included in this chapter, the following sections apply:
3, W
20 • H3.3 Unsymmetric sections
E
21 • J4.2 Shear strength of connecting elements
22 • J10.6 Web panel zone shear
ST I
U EV
23
24 G1. GENERAL PROVISIONS
25
G R
26 The design shear strength, φvVn, and the allowable shear strength, Vn/Ωv, shall
27 be determined as follows:
AU IC
28
29 (a) For all provisions in this chapter except Section G2.1(a)
BL
30
31 φv = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωv = 1.67 (ASD)
32
PU
33 (b) The nominal shear strength, Vn, shall be determined according to Sections
34 G2 through G7.
35
36 G2. I-SHAPED MEMBERS AND CHANNELS
37
38 This section addresses the determination of shear strength for I-shaped
39 members and channels. Section G2.1 is applicable for webs with and without
40 transverse stiffeners. Alternatively, Sections G2.2 and G2.3 may be used for
41 webs with transverse stiffeners. Transverse stiffeners, or components
42 providing equivalent restraint of out-of-plane deformation of the web, shall be
43 provided at the member ends and at supports.
44
45 1. Shear Strength of Webs without Tension Field Action
46
47 The nominal shear strength, Vn, is:
48
49 Vn = 0.6FyAwCv1 (G2-1)
50
51 where
52 Fy = specified minimum yield stress of the type of steel being used, ksi
53 (MPa)
54 Aw = area of web, the overall depth times the web thickness, dtw, in.2 (mm2)
55
56 (a) For webs of rolled I-shaped members with h tw ≤ 2.24 E Fy
57 φv = 1.00 (LRFD) Ωv= 1.50 (ASD)
58
59 and
60
61 Cv1 = 1.0 (G2-2)
62
63 where
64 E = modulus of elasticity of steel = 29,000 ksi (200 000 MPa)
65 h = clear distance between flanges less the fillet at each flange, in.
66 (mm)
67 tw = thickness of web, in. (mm)
68
20 NE
69 User Note: All current ASTM A6 W, S, and HP shapes except
70 W44x230, W40x149, W36x135, W33x118, W30x90, W24x55,
71 W16x26, and W12x14 meet the criteria stated in Section G2.1(a) for Fy
20 O
72 = 50 ksi (345 MPa).
73
3, W
74 (b) For all other I-shaped members and channels
75
E
76 (1) The web shear strength coefficient, Cv1, is determined as follows:
ST I
77
U EV
82 where
83 h = for built-up welded sections, the clear distance be-
BL
87
88 (ii) When h tw > 1.10 kv E / Fy
89
1.10 kv E / Fy
90 Cv1 = (G2-4)
h / tw
91
92 (2) The web plate shear buckling coefficient, kv, is determined as fol-
93 lows:
94 (i) For webs without transverse stiffeners
95
96 kv = 5.34
97
98 (ii) For webs with transverse stiffeners
5
99 kv = 5 + (G2-5)
( a / h )2
100 = 5.34 when a / h > 3.0
101 where
20 NE
117 (1) When 2 Aw ( Afc + Aft ) ≤ 2.5 , h b fc ≤ 6.0 and h b ft ≤ 6.0
20 O
1 − Cv 2
118 Vn = 0.6 Fy Aw Cv 2 + (G2-7)
2
1.15 1 + ( a / h )
3, W
119
120 (2) Otherwise
E
121
ST I
U EV
1 − Cv 2
122 Vn = 0.6 Fy Aw Cv 2 + (G2-8)
1.15 a / h + 1 + ( a / h )
2
G R
123
AU IC
124 where
125 The web shear buckling coefficient, Cv2, is determined as follows:
BL
126
127 (i) When h / t w ≤ 1.10 kv E / Fy
PU
128
129 Cv2 = 1.0 (G2-9)
130
131 (ii) When 1.10 kv E / Fy < h / tw ≤ 1.37 kv E / Fy
132
1.10 kv E / Fy
133 Cv2 = (G2-10)
h / tw
134
135 (iii) When h / t w > 1.37 kv E / Fy
136
1.51kv E
137 Cv2 = 2
(G2-11)
( h / tw ) Fy
138
139 Afc = area of compression flange, in.2 (mm2)
140 Aft = area of tension flange, in.2 (mm2)
141 bfc = width of compression flange, in. (mm)
142 bft = width of tension flange, in. (mm)
20 NE
158
159 where
( ) ≤ 1.0
20 O
2.8 M pf + M pm + M pst + M pm
160 βv = (G2-13)
h Fywtw (1 − Cv 2 )
3, W
161
E
162 and
163 Fyw = specified minimum yield stress of the web material, ksi
ST I
U EV
164 (MPa)
165 Mpf = plastic moment of a section composed of the flange and a
166 segment of the web with the depth, de, kip-in. (N-mm)
G R
169 length of web equal to de plus the distance from the inside
170 face of the stiffener to the end of the beam, except that the
BL
171 distance from the inside face of the stiffener to the end of the
172 beam shall not exceed 0.84tw E Fy for calculation purpos-
PU
191 User Note: An approach for I-shaped members with unequal flange areas is
192 discussed in the commentary.
193
194 4. Transverse Stiffeners
195
196 For transverse stiffeners, the following shall apply.
197
198 (a) Transverse stiffeners are not required where h tw ≤ 2.54 E Fy , or
199 where the available shear strength provided in accordance with Section
200 G2.1 for kv = 5.34 is greater than the required shear strength.
201 (b) Transverse stiffeners are permitted to be stopped short of the tension
202 flange, provided bearing is not needed to transmit a concentrated load or
203 reaction. The weld by which transverse stiffeners are attached to the
204 web shall be terminated not less than four times nor more than six times
205 the web thickness from the near toe of the web-to-flange weld or web-to-
206 flange fillet. When single stiffeners are used, they shall be attached to
207 the compression flange to resist any twist of the flange.
20 NE
208 (c) Bolts connecting stiffeners to the girder web shall be spaced not more
209 than 12 in. (300 mm) on center. If intermittent fillet welds are used, the
20 O
210 clear distance between welds shall not be more than 16 times the web
211 thickness nor more than 10 in. (250 mm).
3, W
212
E
213 (d) ( b t )st ≤ 0.56 (G2-16)
E
Fyst
ST I
(e) I st ≥ I st 2 + ( I st1 − I st 2 ) ρw
U EV
214 (G2-17)
215
216 where
G R
217
218 Fyst = specified minimum yield stress of the stiffener material, ksi
AU IC
219 (MPa)
220 Ist = moment of inertia of the transverse stiffeners about an axis in
BL
221 the web center for stiffener pairs, or about the face in contact
222 with the web plate for single stiffeners, in.4 (mm4)
PU
1.5
h 4 ρ1.3
st Fyw
223 Ist1 = (G2-18)
40 E
224 = minimum moment of inertia of the transverse stiffeners
225 required for development of the full shear post buckling re-
226 sistance of the stiffened web panels, Vr = Vc1, in.4 (mm4)
2.5
227 Ist2 = 2
− 2 b p tw3 ≥ 0.5b p tw3 (G2-19)
( a h )
228 = minimum moment of inertia of the transverse stiffeners
229 required for development of the web shear buckling re-
230 sistance, Vr = Vc2, in.4 (mm4)
231 V c1 = available shear strength calculated with Vn as defined in
232 Section G2.1 or G2.2, as applicable, kips (N)
233 Vc 2 = available shear strength, kips (N), calculated with
234 Vn = 0.6Fy AwCv2
235 Vr = required shear strength in the panel being considered, kips
236 (N)
237 bp = smaller of the dimension a and h, in. (mm)
20 NE
253 The nominal shear strength, Vn , of a single-angle leg or a tee stem is:
254
20 O
255 Vn = 0.6 Fy btCv 2 (G3-1)
256 where
3, W
257 Cv2 = web shear buckling strength coefficient, as defined in Section G2.2
258 with h/tw =b/t and kv =1.2
E
259 b = width of the leg resisting the shear force or depth of the tee stem, in.
260 (mm)
ST I
U EV
289 = for built-up bolted sections, the distance between fastener lines, in.
290 (mm)
291 t = web thickness, as defined in Section B4.2, in. (mm)
292
293 G5. ROUND HSS
294
295 The nominal shear strength, Vn, of round HSS, according to the limit states of
296 shear yielding and shear buckling, shall be determined as:
297
298 Vn = Fcr Ag 2 (G5-1)
299 where
300 Fcr shall be the larger of
1.60E
301 Fcr = 5
(G5-2a)
Lv D 4
D t
302
20 NE
303 and
0.78E
304 Fcr = 3
(G5-2b)
20 O
D 2
t
3, W
305
306 but shall not exceed 0.6Fy
E
307 Ag = gross area of member, in.2 (mm2)
ST I
312 User Note: The shear buckling equations, Equations G5-2a and G5-2b,
313 will control for D/t over 100, high-strength steels, and long lengths. For
AU IC
314 standard sections, shear yielding will usually control and Fcr = 0.6Fy.
315
BL
318
319 For doubly and singly symmetric members loaded in the minor axis without
320 torsion, the nominal shear strength, Vn, for each shear resisting element is:
321
322 Vn = 0.6 Fy b f t f Cv 2 (G6-1)
323
324 where
325 Cv2 = web shear buckling strength coefficient, as defined in Section G2.2
326 with h/tw =bf/2tf for I-shaped members and tees, or h/tw =bf/tf for
327 channels, and kv = 1.2
328 bf = width of flange, in. (mm)
329 tf = thickness of flange, in. (mm)
330
331 User Note: Cv2 = 1.0 for all ASTM A6 W, S, M, and HP shapes, when
332 Fy ≤ 70 ksi (485 MPa).
333
334 G7. BEAMS AND GIRDERS WITH WEB OPENINGS
335
336 The effect of all web openings on the shear strength of steel and composite
337 beams shall be determined. Reinforcement shall be provided when the
338 required strength exceeds the available strength of the member at the
339 opening.
340
20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU
1 CHAPTER H
20 NE
14
15 H1. DOUBLY AND SINGLY SYMMETRIC MEMBERS SUBJECT TO FLEXURE AND AXIAL FORCE
16
20 O
17 1. Doubly and Singly Symmetric Members Subject to Flexure and Compression
18
19
3, W
The interaction of flexure and compression in doubly symmetric members and singly symmetric members
20 constrained to bend about a geometric axis (x and/or y) shall be limited by Equations H1-1a and H1-1b.
E
21 User Note: Section H2 is permitted to be used in lieu of the provisions of this section.
ST I
U EV
Pr
22 (a) When ≥ 0.2
Pc
G R
Pr 8 M rx M ry
23 + + ≤ 1.0 (H1-1a)
Pc 9 M cx M cy
AU IC
24
Pr
BL
26 + + ≤ 1.0 (H1-1b)
2 Pc M cx M cy
27 where
28 Pr = required compressive strength, determined in accordance with Chapter C, using LRFD or ASD load
29 combinations, kips (N)
30 Pc = available compressive strength, φPn or Pn Ω , determined in accordance with Chapter E, kips (N)
31 Mr = required flexural strength, determined in accordance with Chapter C, using LRFD or ASD load
32 combinations, kip-in. (N-mm)
33 Mc = available flexural strength, φM n or M n Ω , determined in accordance with Chapter F, kip-in. (N-
34 mm)
35 x = subscript relating symbol to major axis bending
36 y = subscript relating symbol to minor axis bending
37
38
39 2. Doubly and Singly Symmetric Members Subject to Flexure and Tension
40
41 The interaction of flexure and tension in doubly symmetric members and singly symmetric members
42 constrained to bend about a geometric axis (x and/or y) shall be limited by Equations H1-1a and H1-1b,
43 where
44 Pr = required tensile strength, determined in accordance with Chapter C, using LRFD or ASD load
45 combinations, kips (N)
46 Pc = available tensile strength, φPn or Pn Ω , determined in accordance with Chapter D, kips (N)
47
αPr
48 For doubly symmetric members, Cb in Chapter F is permitted to be multiplied by 1+ when axial
Pey
49 tension acts concurrently with flexure,
50
51 where
π2 EI y
52 Pey = (H1-2)
L2b
53 α = 1.0 (LRFD); α = 1.6 (ASD)
20 NE
54
55 and
56
20 O
E = modulus of elasticity of steel = 29,000 ksi (200 000 MPa)
57 Iy = moment of inertia about the y-axis, in.4 (mm4)
58 Lb = length between points that are either braced against lateral displacement of the compression
3, W
59 flange or braced against twist of the cross section, in.4 (mm4)
60
E
61 3. Doubly Symmetric Rolled Compact Members Subject to Single-Axis Flexure and Compression
ST I
62
U EV
63 For doubly symmetric rolled compact members, with the effective length for torsional buckling less than or
64 equal to the effective length for y-axis flexural buckling, Lcz ≤ Lc y , subjected to flexure and compression
G R
65 with moments primarily about their major axis, it is permissible to address the two independent limit states,
66 in-plane instability and out-of-plane buckling or lateral-torsional buckling, separately in lieu of the combined
AU IC
69 where
70 Lcy = effective length for buckling about the y-axis, in. (mm)
71 Lcz = effective length for buckling about the longitudinal axis, in. (mm)
PU
72
73 For members with M ry M cy ≥ 0.05 , the provisions of Section H1.1 shall be followed.
74 (a) For the limit state of in-plane instability, Equations H1-1a and H1-1b shall be used with Pc taken as the
75 available compressive strength in the plane of bending and Mcx taken as the available flexural strength
76 based on the limit state of yielding.
77
78 (b) For the limit state of out-of-plane buckling and lateral-torsional buckling
2
Pr Pr M rx
79 1.5 − 0.5 + ≤ 1.0 (H1-3)
Pcy Pcy Cb M cx
80 where
81 Pcy = available compressive strength out of the plane of bending, kips (N)
82 Cb = lateral-torsional buckling modification factor determined from Section F1
83 Mcx = available lateral-torsional strength for major axis flexure determined in accordance with
84 Chapter F using Cb = 1.0 , kip-in. (N-mm)
Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, xx, 2022
PUBLIC REVIEW ONE Draft Dated August 3, 2020
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
H-3
85
86 User Note: In Equation H1-3, C b M cx may be larger than φb M px in LRFD or M px Ωb in ASD. The
87 yielding resistance of the beam-column is captured by Equations H1-1a and H1-1b.
88
89 H2. UNSYMMETRIC AND OTHER MEMBERS SUBJECT TO FLEXURE AND AXIAL FORCE
90
91 This section addresses the interaction of flexure and axial stress for shapes not covered in Section H1. It is
92 permitted to use the provisions of this Section for any shape in lieu of the provisions of Section H1.
f ra f rbw f rbz
93 + + ≤ 1.0 (H2-1)
Fca Fcbw Fcbz
94
95 where
96 fra = required axial stress at the point of consideration, determined in accordance with Chapter C,
97 using LRFD or ASD load combinations, ksi (MPa)
98 Fca = available axial stress at the point of consideration, determined in accordance with Chapter E
20 NE
99 for compression or Section D2 for tension, ksi (MPa)
100 frbw, frbz = required flexural stress at the point of consideration, determined in accordance with Chapter
101 C, using LRFD or ASD load combinations, ksi (MPa).
20 O
102 Fcbw, Fcbz = available flexural stress at the point of consideration, determined in accordance with Chapter
103 F, ksi (MPa)
3, W
104 Use the section modulus, S, for the specific location in the cross section and consider the
105 sign of the stress.
E
106 w = subscript relating symbol to major principal axis bending
ST I
108
109 User Note: The subscripts w and z refer to the principal axes of the unsymmetric cross section. For doubly
110 symmetric cross sections, these can be replaced by the x and y subscripts.
G R
111 Equation H2-1 shall be evaluated using the principal bending axes by considering the sense of the flexural
AU IC
112 stresses at the critical points of the cross section. The flexural terms are either added to or subtracted from the
113 axial term as applicable. When the axial force is compression, second-order effects shall be included
114
BL
A more detailed analysis of the interaction of flexure and tension is permitted in lieu of Equation H2-1.
117
118 H3. MEMBERS SUBJECT TO TORSION AND COMBINED TORSION, FLEXURE, SHEAR, AND/OR
119 AXIAL FORCE
120
121 1. Round and Rectangular HSS Subject to Torsion
122
123 The design torsional strength, φT Tn , and the allowable torsional strength, Tn ΩT , for round and rectangular
124 HSS according to the limit states of torsional yielding and torsional buckling shall be determined as follows:
125
126 Tn = Fcr C (H3-1)
127
128 φT = 0.90 (LRFD) ΩT = 1.67 (ASD)
129
130 where
131 C = HSS torsional constant, in.3 (mm3)
132
133 The critical stress, Fcr, shall be determined as follows:
134
135 (a) For round HSS, Fcr shall be the larger of
136
1.23E
137 (1) 5
(H3-2a)
L D 4
D t
138
139 and
0.60 E
140 (2) Fcr = 3
(H3-2b)
D 2
t
141
142 but shall not exceed 0.6Fy ,
20 NE
143
144 where
20 O
145 D = outside diameter, in. (mm)
146 L = length of member, in. (mm)
147
3, W
t = design wall thickness defined in Section B4.2, in. (mm)
148
149
E
(b) For rectangular HSS
150
ST I
U EV
153
154 (2) When 2.45 E / Fy < h / t ≤ 3.07 E / Fy
AU IC
155 Fcr =
(
0.6 Fy 2.45 E / Fy ) (H3-4)
BL
h
t
PU
156
157 (3) When 3.07 E / Fy < h / t ≤ 260
0.458π2 E
158 Fcr = 2
(H3-5)
h
t
159
160 where
161 h = flat width of longer side, as defined in Section B4.1b(d), in. (mm)
162
163 User Note: The torsional constant, C, may be conservatively taken as:
2
π(D − t) t
164 For round HSS: C =
2
165 For rectangular HSS: C = 2( B − t )( H − t )t − 4.5(4 − π)t 3
166
167 2. HSS Subject to Combined Torsion, Shear, Flexure and Axial Force
168
169 When the required torsional strength, Tr, is less than or equal to 20% of the available torsional strength, Tc,
170 the interaction of torsion, shear, flexure and/or axial force for HSS may be determined by Section H1 and the
171 torsional effects may be neglected. When Tr exceeds 20% of Tc, the interaction of torsion, shear, flexure
172 and/or axial force shall be limited, at the point of consideration, by
2
Pr M rx M ry Vr Tr
173 Pc + M cx + M cy + Vc + Tc ≤ 1.0 (H3-6)
174
175 where
176 Pr = required axial strength, determined in accordance with Chapter C, using LRFD or ASD load
177 combinations, kips (N)
178 Pc = available tensile or compressive strength, φPn or Pn Ω , determined in accordance with Chapter D
179 or E, kips (N)
180 Mr = required flexural strength, determined in accordance with Chapter C, using LRFD or ASD load
181 combinations, kip-in. (N-mm)
20 NE
182 Mc = available flexural strength, φM n or M n Ω , determined in accordance with Chapter F, kip-in. (N-
183 mm)
184
20 O
Vr = required shear strength, determined in accordance with Chapter C, using LRFD or ASD load
185 combinations, kips (N)
186 Vc = available shear strength, φVn or Vn Ω , determined in accordance with Chapter G, kips (N)
3, W
187 Tr = required torsional strength, determined in accordance with Chapter C, using LRFD or ASD load
E
188 combinations, kip-in. (N-mm)
189 Tc = available torsional strength, φTn or Tn Ω , determined in accordance with Section H3.1, kip-in.
ST I
U EV
190 (N-mm)
191
192 3. Non-HSS Members Subject to Torsion and Combined Stress
G R
193
194 The available torsional strength for non-HSS members shall be the lowest value obtained according to the
AU IC
195 limit states of yielding under normal stress, shear yielding under shear stress, or buckling, determined as
196 follows:
BL
199 (a) For the limit state of yielding under normal stress
200
201 Fn = Fy (H3-7)
202
203 (b) For the limit state of shear yielding under shear stress
204
205 Fn = 0.6Fy (H3-8)
206
207 (c) For the limit state of buckling
208
209 Fn = Fcr (H3-9)
210
211 where
212 Fcr = buckling stress for the section as determined by analysis, ksi (MPa)
213
214
Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, xx, 2022
PUBLIC REVIEW ONE Draft Dated August 3, 2020
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
H-6
20 NE
231 negative for compression, kip-in. (N-mm)
232 Mcx = available flexural strength about x-axis for the limit state of tensile rupture of the flange, φM n or
233
20 O
M n Ω , determined according to Section F13.1. When the limit state of tensile rupture in flexure
234 does not apply, use the plastic moment, Mp, determined with bolt holes not taken into consideration,
235
3, W
kip-in. (N-mm)
236
E
237
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU
1 CHAPTER I
20 NE
16 I1. General Provisions
17 I2. Axial Force
18 I3. Flexure
20 O
19 I4. Shear
20 I5. Combined Flexure and Axial Force
3, W
21 I6. Load Transfer
22 I7. Composite Diaphragms and Collector Beams
E
23 I8. Steel Anchors
24
ST I
U EV
30
31 1. Concrete and Steel Reinforcement
BL
32
33 The design, detailing and material properties related to the concrete and
34 reinforcing steel portions of composite construction shall comply with the
PU
53 Note that the design basis for ACI 318 is strength design. Designers using
54 ASD for steel must be conscious of the different load factors.
55
56 2. Nominal Strength of Composite Sections
57
58 The nominal strength of composite sections shall be determined in accordance
59 with either the plastic stress distribution method, the strain compatibility
60 method, the elastic stress distribution method, or the effective stress-strain
61 method, as defined in this section.
62
63 The tensile strength of the concrete shall be neglected in the determination of
64 the nominal strength of composite members.
65
66 Local buckling effects shall be evaluated for filled composite members, as
67 defined in Section I1.4. Local buckling effects need not be evaluated for
68 encased composite columns or composite plate shear walls.
69
20 NE
70 2a. Plastic Stress Distribution Method
71
72 For the plastic stress distribution method, the nominal strength shall be
20 O
73 computed assuming that steel components have reached a stress of Fy in either
74 tension or compression, and concrete components in compression due to axial
3, W
75 force and/or flexure have reached a stress of 0.85 f c′ , where f c′ is the
76 specified compressive strength of concrete, ksi (MPa). For round HSS filled
E
83 For the strain compatibility method, a linear distribution of strains across the
84 section shall be assumed, with the maximum concrete compressive strain
BL
85 equal to 0.003 in./in. (mm/mm). The stress-strain relationships for steel and
86 concrete shall be obtained from tests or from published results.
87
PU
88 User Note: The strain compatibility method can be used to determine nominal
89 strength for irregular sections and for cases where the steel does not exhibit
90 elasto-plastic behavior. General guidelines for the strain compatibility method
91 for encased members subjected to axial load, flexure or both are given in
92 AISC Design Guide 6, Load and Resistance Factor Design of W-Shapes
93 Encased in Concrete, and ACI 318.
94
95 2c. Elastic Stress Distribution Method
96
97 For the elastic stress distribution method, the nominal strength shall be
98 determined from the superposition of elastic stresses for the limit state of
99 yielding or concrete crushing.
100
101 2d. Effective Stress-Strain Method
102
103 For the effective stress-strain method, the nominal strength shall be computed
104 assuming strain compatibility, and effective stress-strain relationships for
105 steel and concrete components accounting for the effects of local buckling,
106 yielding, interaction and concrete confinement.
107
20 NE
123 materials shall be in accordance with Appendix X.
124 4. Classification of Filled Composite Sections for Local Buckling
20 O
125
126 For compression, filled composite sections are classified as compact,
3, W
127 noncompact or slender. For a section to qualify as compact, the maximum
128 width-to-thickness ratio of its compression steel elements shall not exceed the
E
129 limiting width-to-thickness ratio, λ p , from Table I1.1a. If the maximum
ST I
131 λ p , but does not exceed λ r from Table I1.1a, the filled composite section is
132 noncompact. If the maximum width-to-thickness ratio of any compression
G R
133 steel element exceeds λ r , the section is slender. The maximum permitted
134 width-to-thickness ratio shall be as specified in the table.
AU IC
135
136 For flexure, filled composite sections are classified as compact, noncompact
BL
140 thickness ratio of one or more steel compression elements exceeds λp, but
141 does not exceed λ r from Table I1.1b, the section is noncompact. If the width-
142 to-thickness ratio of any steel element exceeds λ r , the section is slender. The
143 maximum permitted width-to-thickness ratio shall be as specified in the table.
144
145 Refer to Section B4.1b for definitions of width, b and D, and thickness, t, for
146 rectangular and round HSS sections and box sections of uniform thickness.
147
148 User Note: All current ASTM A1085 and ASTM A500 Grade C square HSS
149 sections are compact according to the limits of Table I1.1a and Table I1.1b,
150 except HSS7×7×1/8, HSS8×8×1/8, HSS10x10x3/16 and HSS12×12×3/16,
151 which are noncompact for both axial compression and flexure, and
152 HSS9x9x1/8, which is slender for both axial compression and flexure.
153
154 All current ASTM A500 Grade C round HSS sections are compact according
155 to the limits of Table I1.1a and Table I1.1b for both axial compression and
156 flexure, with the exception of HSS6.625x0.125, HSS7.000x0.125,
157 HSS10.000x0.188, HSS14.000x0.250, HSS16.000×0.250, and
158 HSS20.000x0.375, which are noncompact for flexure.
159
160
TABLE I1.1a
Limiting Width-to-Thickness Ratios for Compression Steel Elements in
Composite Members Subject to Axial Compression
for Use with Section I2.2
Width-to- λp λr
Description of Thickness Compact/ Noncompact/ Maximum
Element Ratio Noncompact Slender Permitted
Walls of
Rectangular
HSS and Box 2.26
E
3.00
E
5.00
E
b/t
Sections Fy Fy Fy
of Uniform
Thickness
0.15E 0.19E 0.31E
Round HSS D/t
20 NE
Fy Fy Fy
161
TABLE I1.1b
20 O
Limiting Width-to-Thickness Ratios for Compression Steel Elements in
Composite Members Subject to Flexure
3, W
for Use with Section I3.4
Width-to- λp λr
E
Description of Thickness Compact/ Noncompact/ Maximum
ST I
Flanges of
Rectangular E E E
HSS and Box b/t 2.26 3.00 5.00
G R
Sections of Fy Fy Fy
Uniform Thickness
AU IC
Webs of
Rectangular
HSS and Box E E E
BL
162
163
164 5. Stiffness for Calculation of Required Strengths
165
166 For the direct analysis method of design, the required strengths of encased
167 composite members, filled composite members, and composite plate shear
168 walls shall be determined using the provisions of Section C2 and the following
169 requirements:
170
171 (1) The nominal flexural stiffness of encased and filled composite members
172 subject to net compression shall be taken as the effective stiffness of the
173 composite section, EIeff, as defined in Section I2.
174
175 (2) The nominal axial stiffness of encased and filled composite members
176 subject to net compression shall be taken as the summation of the elastic
177 axial stiffnesses of each component.
178
179 (3) Stiffness of encased and filled composite members subject to net tension
180 shall be taken as the stiffness of the bare steel members in accordance
181 with Chapter C.
182
183 (4) The stiffness reduction parameter, τb, shall be taken as 0.8 for encased
184 and filled composite.
185
186 User Note: Taken together, the stiffness reduction factors require the use
187 of 0.64EIeff for the flexural stiffness and 0.8 times the nominal axial
188 stiffness of encased composite members and filled composite members
189 subject to net compression in the analysis.
190
191 Stiffness values appropriate for the calculation of deflections and for use
192 with the effective length method are discussed in the Commentary.
193
194 (5) The flexural, axial, and shear stiffnesses of composite plate shear walls
20 NE
195 shall be calculated as follows:
196
197 ( EI )eff = Es I s + 0.35Ec Ic (I1-1)
20 O
198 ( EA)eff = Es As + 0.45Ec Ac (I1-2)
199 (GA)eff = Gs Asw + Gc Ac (I1-3)
3, W
200 where
E
201 Ac = area of concrete, in.2 (mm2)
202 As = area of steel section, in.2 (mm2)
ST I
U EV
203 Asw = area of steel plates in the direction of in-plane shear, in.2
204 (mm2)
205 Ec = modulus of elasticity of concrete
G R
206 = w1.5
c f c′ , ksi ( 0.043w1.5
c f c′ , MPa)
207 Es = modulus of elasticity of steel
AU IC
212 = 0.4 Ec
213 Ic = moment of inertia of the concrete section about the elastic
214 neutral axis of the composite section, in.4 (mm4)
215 Is = moment of inertia of steel shape about the elastic neutral axis
216 of the composite section, in.4 (mm4)
217 wc = weight of concrete per unit volume (90 ≤ wc ≤ 155 lb/ft3 or
218 1500 ≤ wc ≤ 2500 kg/m3)
219
220 6. Requirements for Composite Plate Shear Walls
221 The opposing steel plates shall be connected to each other using ties
222 consisting of bars, structural shapes, or built-up members. For filled
223 composite plate shear walls, the steel plates shall be anchored to the concrete
224 using ties or a combination of ties and steel anchors.
225
226 6a. Slenderness Requirement
227 The slenderness ratio of the plates, b/t, shall be limited as follows:
b E
228 ≤ 1.2 (I1-4)
t Fy
229 where
230 b = largest clear distance between rows of steel anchors or ties, in. (mm)
231 t = plate thickness, in. (mm)
232
233 6b. Tie Bar Requirement
234 Tie bars shall have spacing no greater than 1.0 times the wall thickness, tsc
235 The tie bar spacing to plate thickness ratio, S/t, shall be limited as follows:
S Es
236 ≤ 1.0 (I1-5)
t 2α + 1
4
t t
237 α = 1.7 sc − 2 (I1-6)
dtie
20 NE
t
238 where
20 O
239 S = largest clear spacing of the ties, in. (mm)
240 t = plate thickness, in. (mm)
3, W
241 tsc = thickness of composite plate shear wall, in. (mm)
242 dtie = effective diameter of the tie bar, in. (mm)
E
243
244 I2. AXIAL FORCE
ST I
U EV
245
246 This section applies to encased composite members, filled composite
247 members, and composite plate shear walls subject to axial force.
G R
248
249 1. Encased Composite Members
AU IC
250
251 1a. Limitations
BL
252
253 For encased composite members, the following limitations shall be met:
254
PU
255 (a) The cross-sectional area of the steel core shall comprise at least 1% of
256 the total composite cross section.
257 (b) Concrete encasement of the steel core shall be reinforced with
258 continuous longitudinal bars and lateral ties or spirals.
259 Detailing of longitudinal reinforcing, including bar spacing and con-
260 crete cover requirements, shall conform to ACI 318.
261 Transverse reinforcement shall consist of a minimum of either a No. 3
262 (10 mm) bar spaced at a maximum of 12 in. (300 mm) on center, or a
263 No. 4 (13 mm) bar or larger spaced at a maximum of 16 in. (400 mm)
264 on center shall be used. Deformed wire or welded wire reinforcement
265 of equivalent area are permitted.
266 Maximum spacing of lateral ties shall not exceed 0.5 times the least
267 column dimension. Refer to ACI 318 for concrete cover requirements.
268 (c) The minimum reinforcement ratio for continuous longitudinal
269 reinforcing, ρsr, shall be 0.004, where ρsr is given by:
Asr
270 ρsr = (I2-1)
Ag
271 where
272 Ag = gross area of composite member, in.2 (mm2)
273 Asr = area of continuous reinforcing bars, in.2 (mm2)
274
275 (d) The maximum reinforcement ratio for continuous longitudinal
276 reinforcing, ρsr, shall be based on ACI 318 with the gross area of con-
277 crete Ag assumed in the calculations.
278
279 User Note: Refer to ACI 318 for additional longitudinal steel, lateral tie, and
280 spiral reinforcing provisions. Refer to Section I4 for shear requirements.
281
282 1b. Compressive Strength
283
284 The design compressive strength, φcPn, and allowable compressive strength,
285 Pn/Ωc, of doubly symmetric axially loaded encased composite members shall
20 NE
286 be determined for the limit state of flexural buckling based on member
287 slenderness as follows:
288
20 O
289 φc = 0.75 (LRFD) Ωc =2.00 (ASD)
290
3, W
Pno
291 (a) When ≤ 2.25
E
Pe
292
ST I
U EV
Pno
293
Pn = Pno 0.658 Pe (I2-2)
G R
294
AU IC
Pno
295 (b) When > 2.25
Pe
BL
296
297 Pn = 0.877Pe (I2-3)
PU
298
299 where
300 Pno = Fy As + Fysr Asr + 0.85 f c′ Ac (I2-4)
301 Pe = elastic critical buckling load determined in accordance with
302 Chapter C or Appendix 7, kips (N)
303 = π2 ( EI eff ) Lc 2 (I2-5)
304 Ac = area of concrete, in.2 (mm2)
305 As = cross-sectional area of steel section, in.2 (mm2)
306 Ec = modulus of elasticity of concrete
1.5
307 = wc fc′ , ksi ( 0.043w1.5
c fc′ , MPa)
308 EIeff = effective stiffness of composite section, kip-in.2 (N-mm2)
309 = EsIs +EsIsr +C1EcIc (I2-6)
310 C1 = coefficient for calculation of effective rigidity of an encased
311 composite compression member
A + Asr
312 = 0.25 + 3 s ≤ 0.7 (I2-7)
Ag
313 Es = modulus of elasticity of steel
20 NE
331 the bare steel member, as required by Chapter E.
332
333 1c. Tensile Strength
20 O
334
335 The available tensile strength of axially loaded encased composite members
336 shall be determined for the limit state of yielding as:
3, W
337
E
338 Pn = Fy As + Fysr Asr (I2-8)
ST I
339
U EV
343
344 Load transfer requirements for encased composite members shall be
AU IC
350 be met:
351
352 (a) Clear spacing between the steel core and longitudinal reinforcing shall be
353 a minimum of 1.5 reinforcing bar diameters, but not less than 1.5 in. (38
354 mm).
355
356 (b) If the composite cross section is built up from two or more encased steel
357 shapes, the shapes shall be interconnected with lacing, tie plates or
358 comparable components to prevent buckling of individual shapes due to
359 loads applied prior to hardening of the concrete.
360
361 User Note: Refer to ACI 318 for additional longitudinal steel, lateral tie, and
362 spiral reinforcing provisions. Refer to Section I4 for shear requirements.
363
364 2. Filled Composite Members
365
366 2a. Limitations
367
368 For filled composite members, the following limitations shall be met:
369
370 (a) The cross-sectional area of the steel section shall comprise at least 1%
371 of the total composite cross section.
372 (b) Filled composite members shall be classified for local buckling
373 according to Section I1.4.
374 (c) Minimum longitudinal reinforcement is not required. If longitudinal
375 reinforcement is provided, internal transverse reinforcement is not
376 required for strength; however, minimum internal transverse rein-
377 forcement shall be provided for constructability. A minimum of either
378 a No. 3 (10 mm) bar spaced at a maximum of 12 in. (300 mm) on cen-
379 ter, or a No. 4 (13 mm) bar or larger spaced at a maximum of 16 in.
380 (400 mm) on center shall be used. Deformed wire or welded wire
381 reinforcement of equivalent area are permitted.
382 (d) If longitudinal reinforcing steel is provided for strength, the maximum
383 reinforcement ratio shall be based on ACI 318 requirements for the
384 gross area of concrete
20 NE
385 User Note: Refer to ACI 318 for additional longitudinal steel, lateral tie, and
386 spiral reinforcing provisions. Refer to Section I4 and Section I4 Commentary
20 O
387 for shear in concrete filled members.
388
3, W
389 2b. Compressive Strength
390
E
391 The available compressive strength of axially loaded doubly symmetric filled
ST I
392 composite members shall be determined for the limit state of flexural buckling
U EV
396
397 Pno = Pp (I2-9a)
AU IC
398
BL
399 where
E
400 Pp = Fy As + C2 f c′ Ac + Asr s (I2-9b)
Ec
PU
401 C2 = 0.85 for rectangular sections and 0.95 for round sections
402
403 (b) For noncompact sections
404
Pp − Py
(λ − λ p )
2
405 Pno = Pp − (I2-9c)
(λ r − λ p )
2
406
407 where
408 λ, λp and λr are width-to-thickness ratios determined from Table
409 I1.1a
410
411 Pp is determined from Equation I2-9b
412
E
413 Py = F y As + 0.7 f c′ Ac + Asr s (I2-9d)
Ec
414
415 (c) For slender sections
E
416 Pno = Fcr As + 0.7 f c′ Ac + Asr s (I2-9e)
Ec
417
418 where
419 (1) For rectangular filled sections
9 Es
420 Fcr = 2
(I2-10)
b
t
421
422 (2) For round filled sections
0.72 Fy
423 Fcr = 0.2
(I2-11)
D Fy
t E
s
424
425 The effective stiffness of the composite section, EIeff, for all sections shall be:
20 NE
426
427 EIeff = EsIs + EsIsr +C3EcIc (I2-12)
20 O
428
429 where
430 C3 = coefficient for calculation of effective rigidity of filled composite
3, W
431 compression member
A + Asr
E
432 = 0.45 + 3 s ≤ 0.9 (I2-13)
ST I
Ag
U EV
433
434 The available compressive strength need not be less than specified for the
435 bare steel member, as required by Chapter E.
G R
436
437 2c. Tensile Strength
AU IC
438
439 The available tensile strength of axially loaded filled composite members
BL
462
463 (a) The steel plates shall comprise at least 1% but no more than 10% of the
464 total composite cross-section area.
465 (b) The steel plates shall satisfy the slenderness requirements of Section
466 I1.6.
467 (c) Walls without flange (closure) plates or boundary elements are not
468 permitted.
469 (d) The height-to-length ratio of the wall shall be greater than or equal to 3.
470
20 NE
475 accordance with Section I2.1b. The value of flexural stiffness from Section
476 I1.5 shall be used along with the section axial load capacity, Pno, determined
477 as follows:
20 O
478
479 Pno = Fy As + 0.85 fc' Ac (I2-15)
3, W
480
481 φc = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωt = 1.67 (ASD)
E
482
ST I
484
485 The available tensile strength of axially loaded composite plate shear walls
486 shall be determined for the limit state of yielding as:
G R
487
488 Pn = As Fy (I2-16)
AU IC
490
491 I3. FLEXURE
492
PU
493 This section applies to three types of composite members subject to flexure:
494 composite beams with steel anchors consisting of steel headed stud anchors
495 or steel channel anchors, concrete encased members, and concrete filled
496 members.
497
498 1. General
499
500 1a. Effective Width
501
502 The effective width of the concrete slab shall be the sum of the effective
503 widths for each side of the beam centerline, each of which shall not exceed:
504
505 (a) one-eighth of the beam span, center-to-center of supports;
506 (b) one-half the distance to the centerline of the adjacent beam; or
507 (c) the distance to the edge of the slab.
508
509 1b. Strength During Construction
510
511 When temporary shores are not used during construction, the steel section
512 alone shall have sufficient strength to support all loads applied prior to the
513 concrete attaining 75% of its specified strength, fc′. The available flexural
514 strength of the steel section shall be determined in accordance with Chapter
515 F.
516
517 2. Composite Beams with Steel Headed Stud or Steel Channel Anchors
518
519 2a. Positive Flexural Strength
520
521 The design positive flexural strength, φb M n , and allowable positive flexural
522 strength, M n Ωb , shall be determined for the limit state of yielding as
523 follows:
524
525 φb = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωb = 1.67 (ASD)
526
527 (a) When h tw ≤ 3.76 E Fy
528
20 NE
529 Mn shall be determined from the plastic stress distribution on the com-
530 posite section for the limit state of yielding (plastic moment).
531
20 O
532 User Note: All current ASTM A6 W, S and HP shapes satisfy the
533 limit given in Section I3.2a(a) for Fy ≤ 70 ksi (485 MPa).
3, W
534
535 (b) When h tw > 3.76 E Fy
E
536
ST I
538 considering the effects of shoring, for the limit state of yielding (yield
539 moment).
G R
540
541 2b. Negative Flexural Strength
AU IC
542
543 The available negative flexural strength shall be determined for the steel
BL
547 from the plastic stress distribution on the composite section, for the limit
548 state of yielding (plastic moment), with
549
550 φb = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωb = 1.67 (ASD)
551
552 provided that the following limitations are met:
553
554 (a) The steel beam is compact and is adequately braced in accordance
555 with Chapter F.
556
557 (b) Steel headed stud or steel channel anchors connect the slab to the steel
558 beam in the negative moment region.
559
560 (c) The slab reinforcement parallel to the steel beam, within the effective
561 width of the slab, is developed.
562
563 User Note: To check compactness of a composite beam in negative
564 flexure, Case 10 in Table B4.1 is appropriate to use for flanges, and Case 16
565 of Table B4.1 is appropriate to use for webs.
566
20 NE
584 tion, shall extend not less than 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) above the top of
585 the steel deck and there shall be at least 1/2 in. (13 mm) of speci-
586 fied concrete cover above the top of the steel headed stud anchors.
20 O
587
588 (c) The slab thickness above the steel deck shall be not less than 2 in.
589 (50 mm).
3, W
590
591 (d) Steel deck shall be anchored to all supporting members at a spac-
E
592 ing not to exceed 18 in. (460 mm). Such anchorage shall be pro-
ST I
594 stud anchors and arc spot (puddle) welds, or other devices speci-
595 fied by the contract documents.
G R
596
597 2. Deck Ribs Oriented Perpendicular to Steel Beam
AU IC
598
599 Concrete below the top of the steel deck shall be neglected in deter-
600 mining composite section properties and in calculating Ac for deck ribs
BL
20 NE
640 (c) Shear strength of steel headed stud or steel channel anchors
641
V ' = ΣQn
20 O
642 (I3-1c)
643
3, W
644 where
645 Ac = area of concrete slab within effective width, in.2 (mm2)
E
646 As = cross-sectional area of steel section, in.2 (mm2)
ΣQn = sum of nominal shear strengths of steel headed stud or
ST I
647
U EV
651 The effect of ductility (slip capacity) of the shear connection at the
652 interface of the concrete slab and the steel beam shall be considered.
AU IC
653
654 2. Load Transfer for Negative Flexural Strength
BL
655
656 In continuous composite beams where longitudinal reinforcing steel in
657 the negative moment regions is considered to act compositely with the
PU
658 steel beam, the total horizontal shear between the point of maximum
659 negative moment and the point of zero moment shall be determined as
660 the lower value in accordance with the following limit states:
661
662 (a) For the limit state of tensile yielding of the slab reinforcement
663
664 V ' = Fysr Asr (I3-2a)
665 where
666 Asr = area of developed longitudinal reinforcing steel within
667 the effective width of the concrete slab, in.2 (mm2)
668 Fysr = specified minimum yield stress of the reinforcing steel,
669 ksi (MPa)
670
671 (b) For the limit state of shear strength of steel headed stud or steel
672 channel anchors
673
674 V ' = ΣQn (I3-2b)
675
676 3. Encased Composite Members
677
678 3a. Limitations
679
680 For encased composite members, the following limitations shall be met:
681
682 (a) The available flexural strength of concrete-encased members shall be
683 determined as follows:
684
685 φb = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωb = 1.67 (ASD)
686
687 The nominal flexural strength, M n , shall be determined using one of the
688 following methods:
689
690 (1) The superposition of elastic stresses on the composite section, con-
691 sidering the effects of shoring for the limit state of yielding (yield
692 moment).
693
20 NE
694 (2) The plastic stress distribution on the steel section alone, for the limit
695 state of yielding (plastic moment) on the steel section.
696
20 O
697 (3) The plastic stress distribution on the composite section or the strain-
698 compatibility method, for the limit state of yielding (plastic mo-
3, W
699 ment) on the composite section. For concrete-encased members,
700 steel anchors shall be provided.
E
701
702 (b) The total cross sectional area of the steel core shall comprise at least
ST I
U EV
712 (300 mm) on center, or a No. 4 (13 mm) bar or larger spaced at a
713 maximum of 16 in. (400 mm) on center shall be used. Deformed
714 wire or welded wire reinforcement of equivalent area are permitted.
715 (d) The minimum reinforcement ratio for continuous longitudinal
716 reinforcing, ρsr, shall be 0.004, where ρsr is given by:
A
717 ρsr = sr (I3-3)
Ag
718 where
719 Ag = gross area of composite member, in.2 (mm2)
720 Asr = area of continuous reinforcing bars, in.2 (mm2)
721
722 (e) The composite member, including the area of the steel section and
723 reinforcing steel, shall be tension controlled as defined in ACI 318.
724
725 User Note: The effect of this limitation is to restrict the reinforcement
726 ratio to mitigate brittle fracture behavior in case of an overload. Refer to
727 ACI 318 for additional longitudinal steel, lateral tie and spiral reinforcing
728 provisions. Refer to Section I4 for shear requirements.
729
730
731 3b. Detailing Requirements
732
733 Clear spacing between the steel core and longitudinal reinforcing shall be a
734 minimum of 1.5 reinforcing bar diameters, but not less than 1.5 in. (38
735 mm).
736
737 4. Filled Composite Members
738
739 4a. Limitations
740
741 (a) Filled composite sections shall be classified for local buckling
742 according to Section I1.4.
743
744 (b) The total cross sectional area of the steel core shall comprise at least
745 1% of the total composite cross section
746
20 NE
747 c) Minimum longitudinal reinforcement is not required.
748
749 Where provided, the minimum reinforcement ratio for continuous
20 O
750 longitudinal reinforcing, ρsr, shall be 0.004, where ρsr is given by:
A
751 ρsr = sr (I3-4)
3, W
Ag
752 If longitudinal reinforcement is provided, internal transverse rein-
E
753 forcement is not required for strength; however, minimum internal
ST I
760 (d) The composite member, including the area of the steel section and
761 reinforcing steel, shall be tension controlled as defined in ACI 318.
BL
762
763 User Note: The effect of this limitation is to restrict the reinforcement
PU
784
785 (b) For noncompact sections
λ −λp
786 Mn = M p – (M p – M y ) (I3-3b)
λr − λ p
787
788 where
789 λ, λp and λr are width-to-thickness ratios determined from Table
790 I1.1b.
791 My = yield moment corresponding to yielding of the tension
792 flange and first yield of the compression flange, kip-in.
793 (N-mm). The capacity at first yield shall be calculated
794 assuming a linear elastic stress distribution with the max-
795 imum concrete compressive stress limited to 0.7 f c′ and
796 the maximum steel stress limited to Fy.
797
798 (c) For slender sections, Mn, shall be determined as the first yield
20 NE
799 moment. The compression flange stress shall be limited to the local
800 buckling stress, Fcr, determined using Equation I2-10 or I2-11. The
801 concrete stress distribution shall be linear elastic with the maximum
20 O
802 compressive stress limited to 0.70f′c.
803
3, W
804 4c. Detailing Requirements
805
E
806 Clear spacing between the inside steel perimeter and longitudinal reinforc-
807 ing where provided shall be a minimum of 1.5 reinforcing bar diameters,
ST I
U EV
811
812 The available flexural strength of filled composite plate shear walls shall be
AU IC
813 determined in accordance with section I1.2a as the moment, Mp, correspond-
814 ing to plastic stress distribution over the composite cross section.
BL
815
816 φb = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωb = 1.67 (ASD)
817
PU
845 The nominal shear strength, Vn, shall account for the contributions of the
846 steel section and concrete infill as follows:
848 where
20 NE
849 Av = Shear area of the steel portion of a composite member. The shear
850 area for a circular section is equal to 2As/π, and for a rectangular
851 section is equal to the sum of the area of webs in the direction of
20 O
852 in-plane shear, in.2 (mm2)
853 Ac = Area of concrete in filled composite member, in.2 (mm2)
3, W
854 As = Area of steel section, in.2 (mm2)
855 Kc = 1 for members with shear span-to-depth (Mu/Vud) greater than or
E
856 equal to 0.7, where Mu and Vu are equal to the maximum moment
ST I
857 and shear demands, respectively, along the member length, and d is
U EV
861 Kc = 9 for members with circular compact cross sections and Mu/Vud
862 less than 0.5
AU IC
865
866 Linear interpolation between the above Kc values shall be used for members
867 with compact cross sections and Mu/Vud between 0.5 and 0.7.
PU
868
869 3. Composite Beams with Formed Steel Deck
870 The available shear strength of composite beams with steel headed stud or
871 steel channel anchors shall be determined based upon the properties of the
872 steel section alone in accordance with Chapter G.
873
874 4. Composite Plate Shear Walls
875 The design in-plane shear strength, φvVn, and allowable shear strength, Vn/Ωv,
876 of composite plate shear walls shall be determined as follows:
877
878 φv = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωv = 1.67 (ASD)
879
880 The nominal shear strength, Vn, shall account for the contributions of the
881 steel section and concrete infill as follows:
882
K s + K sc
883 Vn = Asw Fy (I4-2)
3 K s2 + K sc
2
884
885 where
886 Asw = area of steel plates in the direction of in-plane shear
887 G = shear modulus of steel, ksi (MPa)
888 K s = GAsw (I4-3)
0.7 ( Ec Ac )( Es Asw )
K sc =
889 4 Es Asw + Ec Ac (I4-4)
890
891
892 I5. COMBINED FLEXURE AND AXIAL FORCE
893
894 The interaction between flexure and axial forces in composite members shall
895 account for stability as required by Chapter C. The available compressive
20 NE
896 strength and the available flexural strength shall be determined as defined in
897 Sections I2 and I3, respectively. To account for the influence of length effects
898 on the axial strength of the member, the nominal axial strength of the member
20 O
899 shall be determined in accordance with Section I2.
900
3, W
901 (a) For encased composite members and for filled composite members with
902 compact sections, the interaction between axial force and flexure shall be
E
903 based on the interaction equations of Section H1.1 or one of the methods
904 defined in Section I1.2.
ST I
U EV
905
906 (b) For filled composite members with noncompact or slender sections, the
907 interaction between axial force and flexure shall be based either on the
G R
910
911 (1) When
Pr
≥ cp
BL
Pc
912
PU
Pr 1 − c p M r
913 + ≤ 1.0 (I5-1a)
Pc cm M c
918
919 where
920 M c = available flexural strength, determined in accordance with Section
921 I3, kip-in. (N-mm)
922 M r = required flexural strength, determined in accordance with Section
923 I1.5, using LRFD or ASD load combinations, kip-in. (N-mm)
924 Pc = available axial strength, determined in accordance with Section I2,
925 kips (N)
926 Pr = required axial strength, determined in accordance with Section
927 I1.5, using LRFD or ASD load combinations, kips (N)
928
929 For design according to Section B3.1 (LRFD):
930 M c = φb M n = design flexural strength determined in accordance
20 NE
931 with Section I3, kip-in. (N-mm)
932 M r = required flexural strength, determined in accordance with
933 Section I1.5, using LRFD load combinations, kip-in. (N-
20 O
934 mm)
935 Pc = φc Pn = design axial strength, determined in accordance
3, W
936 with Section I2, kips (N)
E
937 Pr = required axial strength, determined in accordance with
938 Section I1.5, using LRFD load combinations, kips (N)
ST I
U EV
941
942 For design according to Section B3.2 (ASD):
AU IC
965 When external forces are applied to an axially loaded encased or filled
966 composite member, the introduction of force to the member and the transfer
967 of longitudinal shear within the member shall be assessed in accordance with
968 the requirements for force allocation presented in this section.
969
970 The available strength of the applicable force transfer mechanisms as
971 determined in accordance with Section I6.3 shall equal or exceed the required
972 longitudinal shear force to be transferred, Vr′ , as determined in accordance
973 with Section I6.2. Force transfer mechanisms shall be located within the load
974 transfer region as determined in accordance with Section I6.4.
975
976 2. Force Allocation
977
978 Force allocation shall be determined based upon the distribution of external
979 force in accordance with the following requirements.
980
981 User Note: Bearing strength provisions for externally applied forces are
20 NE
982 provided in Section J8. For filled composite members, the term A2 A1 in
983 Equation J8-2 may be taken equal to 2.0 due to confinement effects.
20 O
984
985 2a. External Force Applied to Steel Section
986
3, W
987 When the entire external force is applied directly to the steel section, the force
required to be transferred to the concrete, Vr′ , shall be determined as:
E
988
ST I
989
U EV
992 where
993 Pno = nominal axial compressive strength without consideration of
AU IC
999 User Note: Equation I6-1 does not apply to slender filled composite
1000 members for which the external force is applied directly to the concrete fill in
1001 accordance with Section I6.2b, or concurrently to the steel and concrete, in
1002 accordance with Section I6.2c.
1003
1004 2b. External Force Applied to Concrete
1005
1006 When the entire external force is applied directly to the concrete encasement
1007 or concrete fill, the force required to be transferred to the steel, Vr′ , shall be
1008 determined as follows:
1009
1010 (a) For encased or filled composite members that are compact or noncompact
1011
1012 Vr′ = Pr ( Fy As / Pno ) (I6-2a)
1013
1014 (b) For slender filled composite members
1015
1016 V r′ = Pr ( Fcr A s / Pno ) (I6-2b)
1017
1018 where
1019 Fcr = critical buckling stress for steel elements of filled composite
1020 members determined using Equation I2-10 or Equation I2-11,
1021 as applicable, ksi (MPa)
1022 Pno = nominal axial compressive strength without consideration of
1023 length effects, determined by Equation I2-4 for encased compo-
1024 site members, and Equation I2-9a for filled composite mem-
1025 bers, kips (N)
1026
1027 2c. External Force Applied Concurrently to Steel and Concrete
1028
1029 When the external force is applied concurrently to the steel section and
1030 concrete encasement or concrete fill, Vr′ shall be determined as the force
1031 required to establish equilibrium of the cross section.
1032
1033 User Note: The Commentary provides an acceptable method of determining
20 NE
1034 the longitudinal shear force required for equilibrium of the cross section.
1035
1036 3. Force Transfer Mechanisms
20 O
1037
1038 The available strength of the force transfer mechanisms of direct bond
3, W
1039 interaction, shear connection, and direct bearing shall be determined in
1040 accordance with this section. Use of the force transfer mechanism providing
E
1041 the largest nominal strength is permitted. Force transfer mechanisms shall not
1042 be superimposed.
ST I
U EV
1043
1044 The force transfer mechanism of direct bond interaction shall not be used for
1045 encased composite members or for filled composite members where bond
G R
1053
1054 Rn = 1 .7 f c′ A1 (I6-3)
1055
1056 φB = 0.65 (LRFD) ΩB = 2.31 (ASD)
1057
1058 where
1059 A1 = loaded area of concrete, in.2 (mm2)
1060
1061 User Note: An example of force transfer via an internal bearing mechanism is
1062 the use of internal steel plates within a filled composite member.
1063
1064 3b. Shear Connection
1065
1066 Where force is transferred in an encased or filled composite member by shear
1067 connection, the available shear strength of steel headed stud or steel channel
1068 anchors shall be determined as:
1069
1070 Rc = ΣQcv (I6-4)
1071
1072 where
1073 ΣQcv = sum of available shear strengths, φvQnv (LRFD) or Qnv/Ωv (ASD),
1074 as applicable, of steel headed stud or steel channel anchors, de-
1075 termined in accordance with Section I8.3a or Section I8.3d, re-
1076 spectively, placed within the load introduction length as defined
1077 in Section I6.4, kips (N)
1078
1079 3c. Direct Bond Interaction
1080
1081 Where force is transferred in a filled composite member by direct bond
1082 interaction, the available bond strength between the steel and concrete shall be
1083 determined as follows:
1084
1085 Rn = pbLinFin (I6-5)
1086
1087 φd = 0.50 (LRFD) Ω d = 3.00 (ASD)
1088
20 NE
1089 where
1090 D = outside diameter of round HSS, in. (mm)
1091 Fin = nominal bond stress, ksi (MPa)
20 O
2 2
1092 = 12t H ≤ 0.1, ksi ( 2100t H ≤ 0.7, MPa) for rectangular cross
3, W
1093 sections
2 2
1094 = 30t D ≤ 0.2, ksi (5300t D ≤ 1.4, MPa) for circular cross sections
E
1096 (mm)
U EV
Rn
1100 pb = perimeter of the steel-concrete bond interface within the composite
1101 cross section, in. (mm)
AU IC
1104
1105 4. Detailing Requirements
PU
1106
1107 4a. Encased Composite Members
1108
1109 Force transfer mechanisms shall be distributed within the load introduction
1110 length, which shall not exceed a distance of two times the minimum
1111 transverse dimension of the encased composite member above and below the
1112 load transfer region. Anchors utilized to transfer longitudinal shear shall be
1113 placed on at least two faces of the steel shape in a generally symmetric
1114 configuration about the steel shape axes.
1115
1116 Steel anchor spacing, both within and outside of the load introduction length,
1117 shall conform to Section I8.3e.
1118
1119 4b. Filled Composite Members
1120
1121 Force transfer mechanisms shall be distributed within the load introduction
1122 length, which shall not exceed a distance of two times the minimum
1123 transverse dimension of a rectangular steel member or two times the diameter
1124 of a round steel member both above and below the load transfer region. For
1125 the specific case of load applied to the concrete of a filled composite member
20 NE
1143 1. General
1144
1145 The diameter of a steel headed stud anchor, dsa, shall be 3/4 in. (19 mm) or
20 O
1146 less, except where anchors are utilized solely for shear transfer in solid slabs
1147 in which case 7/8-in.- (2 mm) and 1-in.- (25 mm) diameter anchors are
3, W
1148 permitted. Additionally, dsa shall not be greater than 2.5 times the thickness
1149 of the base metal to which it is welded, unless it is welded to a flange directly
E
1150 over a web.
1151
ST I
U EV
1152 Section I8.2 applies to a composite flexural member where steel anchors are
1153 embedded in a solid concrete slab or in a slab cast on formed steel deck.
1154 Section I8.3 applies to all other cases.
G R
1155
1156 2. Steel Anchors in Composite Beams
AU IC
1157
1158 The length of steel headed stud anchors shall not be less than four stud
BL
1159 diameters from the base of the steel headed stud anchor to the top of the stud
1160 head after installation.
1161
PU
1180 (c) Any number of steel headed stud anchors welded in a row
1181 through steel deck with the deck oriented parallel to the steel
1182 shape and the ratio of the average rib width to rib depth ≥ 1.5
1183 = 0.85 for:
1184 (a) Two steel headed stud anchors welded in a steel deck rib
1185 with the deck oriented perpendicular to the steel shape
1186 (b) One steel headed stud anchor welded through steel deck
1187 with the deck oriented parallel to the steel shape and the ratio
1188 of the average rib width to rib depth < 1.5
1189 = 0.7 for three or more steel headed stud anchors welded in a
1190 steel deck rib with the deck oriented perpendicular to the steel
1191 shape
1192 Rp = 0.75 for:
1193 (a) Steel headed stud anchors welded directly to the steel
1194 shape
1195 (b) Steel headed stud anchors welded in a composite slab
1196 with the deck oriented perpendicular to the beam and emid-ht ≥
20 NE
1197 2 in. (50 mm)
1198 (c) Steel headed stud anchors welded through steel deck, or
1199 steel sheet used as girder filler material, and embedded in a
20 O
1200 composite slab with the deck oriented parallel to the beam
1201 = 0.6 for steel headed stud anchors welded in a composite slab
3, W
1202 with deck oriented perpendicular to the beam and emid-ht < 2 in.
1203 (50 mm)
E
1204 emid-ht = distance from the edge of steel headed stud anchor shank to
1205 the steel deck web, measured at mid-height of the deck rib, and
ST I
U EV
1206 in the load bearing direction of the steel headed stud anchor (in
1207 other words, in the direction of maximum moment for a simply
1208 supported beam), in. (mm)
G R
1209
1210 User Note: The table below presents values for Rg and Rp for
AU IC
1211 several cases. Available strengths for steel headed stud anchors can
1212 be found in the AISC Steel Construction Manual.
BL
1213
Condition Rg Rp
PU
1214
1215 2b. Strength of Steel Channel Anchors
1216
1217 The nominal shear strength of one hot-rolled channel anchor embedded in a
1218 solid concrete slab shall be determined as:
1219 Qn = 0.3(t f + 0.5tw )la fc′Ec (I8-2)
1220 where
1221 la = length of channel anchor, in. (mm)
1222 tf = thickness of flange of channel anchor, in. (mm)
1223 tw = thickness of channel anchor web, in. (mm)
1224
1225 The strength of the channel anchor shall be developed by welding the channel
1226 to the beam flange for a force equal to Qn, considering eccentricity on the
1227 anchor.
1228
1229 2c. Required Number of Steel Anchors
20 NE
1230
1231 The number of anchors required between the section of maximum bending
1232 moment, positive or negative, and the adjacent section of zero moment shall
20 O
1233 be equal to the horizontal shear as determined in Sections I3.2d.1 and I3.2d.2
1234 divided by the nominal shear strength of one steel anchor as determined from
3, W
1235 Section I8.2a or Section I8.2b. The number of steel anchors required between
1236 any concentrated load and the nearest point of zero moment shall be sufficient
E
1237 to develop the maximum moment required at the concentrated load point.
ST I
1238
U EV
1242
1243 (a) Steel anchors required on each side of the point of maximum bending
AU IC
1248 (b) Steel anchors shall have at least 1 in. (25 mm) of lateral concrete cover in
1249 the direction perpendicular to the shear force, except for anchors installed in
1250 the ribs of formed steel decks.
1251
1252 (c) The minimum distance from the center of a steel anchor to a free edge in the
1253 direction of the shear force shall be 8 in. (200 mm) if normal weight concrete is used
1254 and 10 in. (250 mm) if lightweight concrete is used. The provisions of ACI 318
1255 Chapter 17 are permitted to be used in lieu of these values.
1256
1257 (d) Minimum center-to-center spacing of steel headed stud anchors shall be
1258 four diameters in any direction. For composite beams that do not contain
1259 anchors located within formed steel deck oriented perpendicular to the
1260 beam span, an additional minimum spacing limit of six diameters along
1261 the longitudinal axis of the beam shall apply.
1262
1263 (e) The maximum center-to-center spacing of steel anchors shall not exceed
1264 eight times the total slab thickness or 36 in. (900 mm).
1265
1266 3. Steel Anchors in Composite Components
1267
1268 This section shall apply to the design of cast-in-place steel headed stud
1269 anchors and steel channel anchors in composite components.
1270
1271 The provisions of the applicable building code or ACI 318 Chapter 17 are
1272 permitted to be used in lieu of the provisions in this section.
1273
1274 User Note: The steel headed stud anchor strength provisions in this section
1275 are applicable to anchors located primarily in the load transfer (connection)
1276 region of composite columns and beam-columns, concrete-encased and filled
1277 composite beams, composite coupling beams, and composite walls, where the
1278 steel and concrete are working compositely within a member. They are not
1279 intended for hybrid construction where the steel and concrete are not working
1280 compositely, such as with embed plates.
1281
1282 Section I8.2 specifies the strength of steel anchors embedded in a solid
1283 concrete slab or in a concrete slab with formed steel deck in a composite
1284 beam.
20 NE
1285
1286 Limit states for the steel shank of the anchor and for concrete breakout in
1287 shear are covered directly in this Section. Additionally, the spacing and
20 O
1288 dimensional limitations provided in these provisions preclude the limit states
1289 of concrete pryout for anchors loaded in shear and concrete breakout for
1290 anchors loaded in tension as defined by ACI 318 Chapter 17.
3, W
1291
1292 For normal weight concrete: Steel headed stud anchors subjected to shear only
E
1293 shall not be less than five stud diameters in length from the base of the steel
ST I
1294 headed stud to the top of the stud head after installation. Steel headed stud
U EV
1295 anchors subjected to tension or interaction of shear and tension shall not be
1296 less than eight stud diameters in length from the base of the stud to the top of
G R
1299 For lightweight concrete: Steel headed stud anchors subjected to shear only
1300 shall not be less than seven stud diameters in length from the base of the steel
1301 headed stud to the top of the stud head after installation. Steel headed stud
BL
1302 anchors subjected to tension shall not be less than ten stud diameters in length
1303 from the base of the stud to the top of the stud head after installation. The
PU
1304 nominal strength of steel headed stud anchors subjected to interaction of shear
1305 and tension for lightweight concrete shall be determined as stipulated by the
1306 applicable building code or ACI 318 Chapter 17.
1307
1308 Steel headed stud anchors subjected to tension or interaction of shear and
1309 tension shall have a diameter of the head greater than or equal to 1.6 times the
1310 diameter of the shank.
1311
1312 User Note: The following table presents values of minimum steel headed
1313 stud anchor h/d ratios for each condition covered in this Specification.
1314
Loading Normal Weight Lightweight
Condition Concrete Concrete
Shear h d sa ≥ 5 h d sa ≥ 7
Tension h d sa ≥ 8 h d sa ≥ 10
Shear and
h d sa ≥ 8 N/A[a]
Tension
h d sa = ratio of steel headed stud anchor shank length to the top of
the stud head, to shank diameter.
[a]
Refer to ACI 318 Chapter 17 for the calculation of interaction
effects of anchors embedded in lightweight concrete.
1315
1316
1317 3a. Shear Strength of Steel Headed Stud Anchors in Composite Components
1318
1319 Where concrete breakout strength in shear is not an applicable limit state, the
1320 design shear strength, φvQnv, and allowable shear strength, Qnv/Ωv, of one steel
1321 headed stud anchor shall be determined as:
1322
1323 Qnv = Fu Asa (I8-3)
1324
1325 φv = 0.65 (LRFD) Ωv = 2.31 (ASD)
1326
1327 where
1328 Asa = cross-sectional area of a steel headed stud anchor, in.2 (mm2)
1329 = specified minimum tensile strength of a steel headed stud
20 NE
Fu
1330 anchor, ksi (MPa)
1331 Qnv = nominal shear strength of a steel headed stud anchor, kips (N)
1332
20 O
1333 Where concrete breakout strength in shear is an applicable limit state, the
1334 available shear strength of one steel headed stud anchor shall be determined
3, W
1335 by one of the following:
1336
E
1337 (a) Where anchor reinforcement is developed in accordance with ACI 318
ST I
1338 on both sides of the concrete breakout surface for the steel headed stud
U EV
1339 anchor, the minimum of the steel nominal shear strength from Equation
1340 I8-3 and the nominal strength of the anchor reinforcement shall be used
G R
1341 for the nominal shear strength, Qnv, of the steel headed stud anchor.
1342 (b) As stipulated by the applicable building code or ACI 318 Chapter 17.
1343
AU IC
1344 User Note: If concrete breakout strength in shear is an applicable limit state
1345 (for example, where the breakout prism is not restrained by an adjacent steel
BL
1346 plate, flange or web), appropriate anchor reinforcement is required for the
1347 provisions of this Section to be used. Alternatively, the provisions of the
PU
1367
1368 Where the distance from the center of an anchor to a free edge of concrete in
1369 the direction perpendicular to the height of the steel headed stud anchor is less
1370 than 1.5 times the height of the steel headed stud anchor measured to the top
1371 of the stud head, or where the center-to-center spacing of steel headed stud
1372 anchors is less than three times the height of the steel headed stud anchor
1373 measured to the top of the stud head, the nominal tensile strength of one steel
1374 headed stud anchor shall be determined by one of the following:
1375
1376 (a) Where anchor reinforcement is developed in accordance with ACI 318 on
1377 both sides of the concrete breakout surface for the steel headed stud
1378 anchor, the minimum of the steel nominal tensile strength from Equation
1379 I8-4 and the nominal strength of the anchor reinforcement shall be used
1380 for the nominal tensile strength, Qnt, of the steel headed stud anchor.
1381 (b) As stipulated by the applicable building code or ACI 318 Chapter 17.
1382
1383 User Note: Supplemental confining reinforcement is recommended around
20 NE
1384 the anchors for steel headed stud anchors subjected to tension or interaction of
1385 shear and tension to avoid edge effects or effects from closely spaced anchors.
1386 See the Commentary and ACI 318 for guidelines.
20 O
1387
1388 3c. Strength of Steel Headed Stud Anchors for Interaction of Shear and
1389 Tension in Composite Components
3, W
1390
1391 Where concrete breakout strength in shear is not a governing limit state, and
E
1392 where the distance from the center of an anchor to a free edge of concrete in
ST I
1393 the direction perpendicular to the height of the steel headed stud anchor is
U EV
1394 greater than or equal to 1.5 times the height of the steel headed stud anchor
1395 measured to the top of the stud head, and where the center-to-center spacing
G R
1396 of steel headed stud anchors is greater than or equal to three times the height
1397 of the steel headed stud anchor measured to the top of the stud head, the
AU IC
1398 nominal strength for interaction of shear and tension of one steel headed stud
1399 anchor shall be determined as:
1400
BL
5/3 5/3
Qrt Q
1401 + rv ≤ 1.0 (I8-5)
PU
Qct Qcv
1402 where
1403 Qct = available tensile strength, determined in accordance with Section
1404 I8.3b, kips (N)
1405 Qrt = required tensile strength, kips (N)
1406 Qcv = available shear strength, determined in accordance with Section
1407 I8.3a, kips (N)
1408 Qrv = required shear strength, kips (N)
1409
1410
1411 Where concrete breakout strength in shear is a governing limit state, or where
1412 the distance from the center of an anchor to a free edge of concrete in the
1413 direction perpendicular to the height of the steel headed stud anchor is less
1414 than 1.5 times the height of the steel headed stud anchor measured to the top
1415 of the stud head, or where the center-to-center spacing of steel headed stud
1416 anchors is less than three times the height of the steel headed stud anchor
1417 measured to the top of the stud head, the nominal strength for interaction of
1418 shear and tension of one steel headed stud anchor shall be determined by one
1419 of the following:
1420
1421 (a) Where anchor reinforcement is developed in accordance with ACI 318 on
1422 both sides of the concrete breakout surface for the steel headed stud
1423 anchor, the minimum of the steel nominal shear strength from Equation
1424 I8-3 and the nominal strength of the anchor reinforcement shall be used
1425 for the nominal shear strength, Qnv, of the steel headed stud anchor, and
1426 the minimum of the steel nominal tensile strength from Equation I8-4 and
1427 the nominal strength of the anchor reinforcement shall be used for the
1428 nominal tensile strength, Qnt, of the steel headed stud anchor for use in
1429 Equation I8-5.
1430 (b) As stipulated by the applicable building code or ACI 318 Chapter 17.
1431
1432 3d. Shear Strength of Steel Channel Anchors in Composite Components
1433
1434 The available shear strength of steel channel anchors shall be based on the
1435 provisions of Section I8.2b with the following resistance factor and safety
1436 factor:
1437
20 NE
1438 φv = 0.75 (LRFD) Ωv = 2.00 (ASD)
1439
1440 3e. Detailing Requirements in Composite Components
20 O
1441
1442 Steel anchors in composite components shall meet the following require-
1443 ments:
3, W
1444
1445 (a) Minimum concrete cover to steel anchors shall be in accordance with ACI
E
1446 318 provisions for concrete protection of headed shear stud reinforcement.
ST I
U EV
1447
1448 (b) Minimum center-to-center spacing of steel headed stud anchors shall be
1449 four diameters in any direction.
G R
1450
1451 (c) The maximum center-to-center spacing of steel headed stud anchors shall
AU IC
1454 (d) The maximum center-to-center spacing of steel channel anchors shall be
1455 24 in. (600 mm).
1456
PU
1457 User Note: Detailing requirements provided in this section are absolute
1458 limits. See Sections I8.3a, I8.3b, and I8.3c for additional limitations required
1459 to preclude edge and group effect considerations.
1460
1461 4. Performance Based Alternative for the Design of Shear Connection
1462
1463 In lieu of shear connection prescribed by, and the corresponding strength
1464 determined per, Sections I8.1 through I8.3, it shall be permitted to use an
1465 alternate form of shear connection and determine its strength through testing,
1466 provided its performance requirements are established in accordance with
1467 Sections I8.4a through I8.4d. The geometric limitations of Sections I8.1
1468 through I8.3 do not apply to the performance evaluated by Section I8.4.
1469
1470 4a. Test Standard
1471
1472 Shear connection strength, slip capacity, and stiffness shall be established
1473 using AISI S923. An alternative test protocol may be used in the evaluation
1474 when approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
1475
1476
20 NE
1494 configuration. Shear connection slip capacity shall be measured at no less than
1495 95% of the post-peak strength.
1496
20 O
1497 4d. Acceptance Criteria
1498
3, W
1499 The design using tested properties of the shear connection per Section I8.4a
1500 through I8.4c shall be limited to the geometric and material properties tested.
E
1501 The nominal performance characteristics are permitted to be used in design
1502 provided either the conditions (1), (2), and (3) are satisfied, or the condition
ST I
U EV
1506 tested configuration of shear connection does not exceed 0.09 established
1507 over four replicate tests, or 0.15 established over nine replicate tests. It is
AU IC
1508 permitted, for this purpose, to establish the number of tests using all tests
1509 of the same type of shear connection that exhibit the same failure mode.
BL
1510
1511 (2) The nominal shear connection slip capacity is at least 0.25 in. (6 mm).
1512
PU
1513 (3) The minimum shear elastic stiffness of the shear connection shall not be
1514 less than 2,000 kip/in. (180 N/mm).
1515
1516 (4) Shear connections corresponding to the values of shear connection elastic
1517 stiffness, coefficient of variation, and slip capacity other than those
1518 stipulated in conditions (1), (2), and (3) shall be deemed acceptable,
1519 provided their effect is captured in the design. In lieu of using in an
1520 analysis the shear connection elastic stiffness determined per this Section,
1521 it shall be permitted to establish the stiffness of a composite section,
1522 incorporating shear connection evaluated by this Section, directly through
1523 testing using AISI S924. When stiffness of a composite section is
1524 established using AISI S924, it shall be a mean tested value established
1525 using at least three tests.
1526
1 CHAPTER J
2 DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS
3
4 This chapter addresses connecting elements, connectors. and the affected elements
5 of connected members not subject to fatigue loads.
6
7 The chapter is organized as follows:
8
9 J1. General Provisions
10 J2. Welds
11 J3. Bolts and Threaded Parts
12 J4. Affected Elements of Members and Connecting Elements
13 J5. Fillers
14 J6. Splices
15 J7. Bearing Strength
20 NE
16 J8. Column Bases and Bearing on Concrete
17 J9. Anchor Rods and Embedments
18 J10. Flanges and Webs with Concentrated Forces
20 O
19
20 User Note: For cases not included in this chapter, the following sections apply:
3, W
21 • Chapter K Additional Requirements for HSS and Box-Section Connections
22 • Appendix 3 Fatigue
E
23
24 J1. GENERAL PROVISIONS
ST I
U EV
25
26 1. Design Basis
27
G R
28 The design strength, φRn, and the allowable strength, Rn/Ω, of connections
29 shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of this chapter and the
AU IC
30 provisions of Chapter B.
31
BL
55
56 User Note: See Chapter C and Appendix 7 for analysis requirements to
57 establish the required strength for the design of connections.
58
59 4. Compression Members with Bearing Joints
60
61 Compression members relying on bearing for load transfer shall meet the
62 following requirements:
63
64 (a) For columns bearing on bearing plates or finished to bear at splices, there
65 shall be sufficient connectors to hold all parts in place.
66
67 (b) For compression members other than columns finished to bear, the splice
68 material and its connectors shall be arranged to hold all parts in line and
69 their required strength shall be the lesser of:
70
71 (1) An axial tensile force equal to 50% of the required compressive
20 NE
72 strength of the member; or
73 (2) The moment and shear resulting from a transverse load equal to 2%
74 of the required compressive strength of the member. The trans-
20 O
75 verse load shall be applied at the location of the splice exclusive of
76 other loads that act on the member. The member shall be taken as
77 pinned for the determination of the shears and moments at the
3, W
78 splice.
79
E
80 User Note: All compression joints should also be proportioned to resist any
ST I
82
83 5. Splices in Heavy Sections
G R
84
85 When tensile forces due to applied tension or flexure are to be transmitted
AU IC
89 and A3.1d; (b) weld access hole details as given in Section J1.6; (c) filler
90 metal requirements as given in Section J2.6; and (d) thermal cut surface
PU
109 (b) The access hole shall have a length from the toe of the weld preparation
110 not less than 1-1/2 times the thickness of the material in which the hole is
111 made, nor less than 1-1/2 in. (38 mm).
112
113 (c) The access hole shall have a height not less than the thickness of the
114 material with the access hole, nor less than 3/4 in. (19 mm), nor does it
115 need to exceed 2 in. (50 mm).
116
117 (d) For sections that are rolled or welded prior to cutting, the edge of the web
118 shall be sloped or curved from the surface of the flange to the reentrant
119 surface of the access hole.
120
121 (e) In hot-rolled shapes, and built-up shapes with CJP groove welds that join
122 the web-to-flange, weld access holes shall be free of notches and sharp
123 reentrant corners.
124
125 (f) No arc of the weld access hole shall have a radius less than 3/8 in. (10
20 NE
126 mm).
127
128 (g) In built-up shapes with fillet or partial-joint-penetration (PJP) groove
20 O
129 welds that join the web-to-flange, weld access holes shall be free of
130 notches and sharp reentrant corners.
131
3, W
132 (h) The access hole is permitted to terminate perpendicular to the flange,
133 providing the weld is terminated at least a distance equal to the weld size
E
135
U EV
136 (i) For heavy shapes, as defined in Sections A3.1c and A3.1d, the thermally
137 cut surfaces of weld access holes shall be ground to bright metal.
G R
138
139 (j) If the curved transition portion of weld access holes is formed by predrilled
AU IC
140 or sawed holes, that portion of the access hole need not be ground.
141
142 7. Placement of Welds and Bolts
BL
143
144 Groups of welds or bolts at the ends of any member that transmit axial force
PU
145 into that member shall be sized so that the center of gravity of the group
146 coincides with the center of gravity of the member, unless provision is made
147 for the eccentricity. The foregoing provision is not applicable to end
148 connections of single-angle, double-angle and similar members.
149
150 8. Bolts in Combination with Welds
151 Bolts shall not be considered as sharing the load in combination with welds,
152 except in the design of shear connections on a common faying surface where
153 strain compatibility between the bolts and welds is considered.
160 (a) φ = 0.75 (LRFD); Ω = 2.00 (ASD) for the combined joint.
161 (b) When the high-strength bolts are pretensioned according to the
162 requirements of Table J3.1 or Table J3.1M, using the turn-of-nut or
163 combined method, the longitudinal fillet welds shall have an available
164 strength of not less than 50% of the required strength of the connection.
165 (c) When the high-strength bolts are pretensioned according to the
166 requirements of Table J3.1 or Table J3.1M, using any method other than
167 the turn-of-nut method, the longitudinal fillet welds shall have an availa-
168 ble strength of not less than 70% of the required strength of the connec-
169 tion.
170 (d) The high-strength bolts shall have an available strength of not less than
171 33% of the required strength of the connection.
172
173 In joints with combined bolts and longitudinal welds, the strength of the
174 connection need not be taken as less than either the strength of the bolts alone
175 or the strength of the welds alone.
176
177 9. Welded Alterations to Structures with Existing Rivets or Bolts
20 NE
178
179 In making welded alterations to structures, existing rivets and high-strength
180 bolts in standard or short-slotted holes transverse to the direction of load, and
20 O
181 tightened to the requirements of slip-critical connections are permitted to be
182 utilized for resisting loads present at the time of alteration, and the welding
183 need only provide the additional required strength. The weld available
3, W
184 strength shall provide the additional required strength, but not less than 25%
185 of the required strength of the connection.
E
186
ST I
187 User Note: The provisions of this section are generally recommended for
U EV
188 alteration in building designs or for field corrections. Use of the combined
189 strength of bolts and welds on a common faying surface is not recommended
G R
197
198 J2. WELDS AND WELDED JOINTS
199
200 All provisions of the Structural Welding Code—Steel (AWS D1.1/D1.1M),
201 hereafter referred to as AWS D1.1/D1.1M, apply under this Specification,
202 with the exception that the provisions of the listed Specification sections
203 apply under this Specification in lieu of the cited AWS provisions as follows:
204
205 (a) Section J1.6 in lieu of AWS D1.1/D1.1M clause 5.16
206 (b) Section J2.2a in lieu of AWS D1.1/D1.1M clauses 2.4.2.10 and 2.4.4.4
207 (c) Table J2.2 in lieu of AWS D1.1/D1.1M Table 2.1
208 (d) Table J2.5 in lieu of AWS D1.1/D1.1M Table 2.3
209 (e) Appendix 3, Table A-3.1 in lieu of AWS D1.1/D1.1M Table 2.5
210 (f) Section B3.11 and Appendix 3 in lieu of AWS D1.1/D1.1M clause 2, Part
211 C
212 (g) Section M2.2 in lieu of AWS D1.1/D1.1M clauses 5.14 and 5.15
213
214 1. Groove Welds
215
20 NE
233 indicate the effective throat required or the weld strength required, and the
234 fabricator should detail the joint based on the weld process and position to be
235 used to weld the joint.
20 O
236
237 For PJP groove welds effective throats larger than those for prequalified PJP
238 groove welds in AWS D1.1/D1.1M Figure 3.2 and flare groove welds in Table
3, W
239 J2.2 are permitted for a given welding procedure specification (WPS),
240 provided the fabricator establishes by testing the consistent production of such
E
241 larger effective throat. Testing shall consist of sectioning the weld normal to
ST I
242 its axis, at mid-length, and at terminal ends. Such sectioning shall be made on
U EV
245 throats, single pass and the root pass of multi-pass welds shall be made using a
246 mechanized, automatic, or robotic process, with no decrease in current or
AU IC
250
251 The minimum effective throat of a partial-joint-penetration groove weld shall
PU
252 not be less than the size required to transmit calculated forces nor the size
253 shown in Table J2.3. Minimum weld size is determined by the thinner of the
254 two parts joined.
255
TABLE J2.1
Effective Throat of
Partial-Joint-Penetration Groove Welds
Welding Position
F (flat),
H (horizontal), Groove Type
V (vertical), (AWS D1.1, Effective
Welding Process OH (overhead) Figure 3.3) Throat
Shielded metal arc J or U groove
(SMAW) depth of
All
Gas metal arc (GMAW) 60° V groove
Flux cored arc (FCAW)
J or U groove
Submerged arc (SAW) F
60° bevel or V
45° bevel depth of
Gas metal arc (GMAW) F, H
20 NE
General note: R = radius of joint surface (is permitted to be assumed equal to 2t for
HSS)
258
20 O
259
TABLE J2.3
3, W
Minimum Effective Throat of
E
Partial-Joint-Penetration Groove Welds
ST I
[a]
See Table J2.1.
260
PU
261
262 2. Fillet Welds
263
264 2a. Effective Area
265 The effective area of a fillet weld shall be the effective length multiplied by
266 the effective throat. The effective throat of a fillet weld shall be the shortest
267 distance from the root to the face of the diagrammatic weld. An increase in
268 effective throat is permitted if consistent penetration beyond the root of the
269 diagrammatic weld is demonstrated by tests using a given welding procedure
270 specification (WPS), provided the fabricator establishes by testing the
271 consistent production of such larger effective throat. Testing shall consist of
272 sectioning the weld normal to its axis, at mid-length, and terminal ends.
273 During production, single pass welds and the root pass of multi-pass welds
274 shall be made using a mechanized, automatic or robotic process, with no
275 decrease in current or increase in travel speed from that used for testing.
276
277 For fillet welds in holes and slots, the effective length shall be the length of
278 the centerline of the weld along the center of the plane through the throat. In
279 the case of overlapping fillets, the effective area shall not exceed the nominal
280 cross-sectional area of the hole or slot, in the plane of the faying surface.
281
282 2b. Limitations
283
284 Fillet welds shall meet the following limitations:
285
286 (a) The minimum size of fillet welds shall be not less than the size required to
287 transmit calculated forces, nor the size as shown in Table J2.4. These
288 limitations do not apply to fillet weld reinforcements of groove welds.
289
290 TABLE J2.4
291 Minimum Size of Fillet Welds
292
Material Thickness of Minimum Size of
Thinner Part Joined, in. (mm) Fillet Weld,[a] in. (mm)
To 1/4 (6) inclusive 1/8 (3)
20 NE
Over 1/4 (6) to 1/2 (13) 3/16 (5)
Over 1/2 (13) to 3/4 (19) 1/4 (6)
Over 3/4 (19) 5/16 (8)
20 O
[a]
Leg dimension of fillet welds. When non-low hydrogen electrodes are used single
pass welds must be used.
3, W
Note: See Section J2.2b for maximum size of fillet welds.
293
E
294 (b) The maximum size of fillet welds of connected parts shall be:
295
ST I
U EV
296 (1) Along edges of material less than 1/4 in. (6 mm) thick; not greater
297 than the thickness of the material.
298
G R
299 (2) Along edges of material 1/4 in. (6 mm) or more in thickness; not
300 greater than the thickness of the material minus 1/16 in. (2 mm), un-
AU IC
301 less the weld is especially designated on the design and fabrication
302 documents to be built out to obtain full-throat thickness. In the as-
BL
303 welded condition, the distance between the edge of the base metal
304 and the toe of the weld is permitted to be less than 1/16 in. (2 mm),
305 provided the weld size is clearly verifiable.
PU
306
307 (c) The minimum length of fillet welds designed on the basis of strength shall be
308 not less than four times the nominal weld size, or else the effective size of
309 the weld shall not be taken to exceed one-quarter of its length.
310
311 (d) The effective length of fillet welds shall be determined as follows:
312
313 (1) For end-loaded fillet welds with a length up to 100 times the weld
314 size, it is permitted to take the effective length equal to the actual
315 length.
316
317 (2) When the length of the end-loaded fillet weld exceeds 100 times the
318 weld size, the effective length shall be determined by multiplying
319 the actual length by the reduction factor, β, determined as:
320
321 β = 1.2 – 0.002(l/w) ≤ 1.0 (J2-1)
322
323 where
324 l = actual length of end-loaded weld, in. (mm)
20 NE
343 the joint under maximum loading.
344
345 (g) Fillet weld terminations shall be detailed in a manner that does not result
20 O
346 in a notch in the base metal subject to applied tension loads. Components
347 shall not be connected by welds where the weld would prevent the
3, W
348 deformation required to provide assumed design conditions.
349
E
350 User Note: Fillet weld terminations should be detailed in a manner that does
ST I
351 not result in a notch in the base metal transverse to applied tension loads that
U EV
354 by a length approximately equal to the size of the weld. In most welds, the
355 effect of stopping short can be neglected in strength calculations.
356
AU IC
357 There are two common details where welds are terminated short of the end of
358 the joint to permit relative deformation between the connected parts:
BL
359
360 • Welds on the outstanding legs of beam clip-angle connections are
PU
361 returned on the top of the outstanding leg and stopped no more than 4
362 times the weld size and not greater than half the leg width from the outer
363 toe of the angle.
364 • Fillet welds connecting transverse stiffeners to webs of girders that are ¾
365 in. thick or less are stopped 4 to 6 times the web thickness from the web
366 toe of the flange-to web fillet weld, except where the end of the stiffener
367 is welded to the flange.
368
369 Details of fillet weld terminations may be shown on shop standard details.
370
371
372 (h) Fillet welds in holes or slots are permitted to be used to transmit shear and
373 resist loads perpendicular to the faying surface in lap joints or to prevent the
374 buckling or separation of lapped parts and to join components of built-up
375 members. Such fillet welds are permitted to overlap, subject to the provisions
376 of Section J2. Fillet welds in holes or slots are not to be considered plug or
377 slot welds.
378
379 (i) For fillet welds in slots, the ends of the slot shall be semicircular or shall
380 have the corners rounded to a radius of not less than the thickness of the part
381 containing it, except those ends which extend to the edge of the part.
382
383 3. Plug and Slot Welds
384
385 3a. Effective Area
386
387 The effective shear area of plug and slot welds shall be taken as the nominal
388 area of the hole or slot in the plane of the faying surface.
389
390 3b. Limitations
391
392 Plug or slot welds are permitted to be used to transmit shear in lap joints, or to
393 prevent buckling or separation of lapped parts, and to join component parts of
394 built-up members, subject to the following limitations:
395
20 NE
396 (a)The diameter of the holes for a plug weld shall not be less than the
397 thickness of the part containing it plus 5/16 in. (8 mm), rounded to the next
398 larger odd 1/16 in. (even mm), nor greater than the minimum diameter plus
20 O
399 1/8 in. (3 mm) or 2-1/4 times the thickness of the weld.
400
401 (b) The minimum center-to-center spacing of plug welds shall be four times
3, W
402 the diameter of the hole.
403
E
404 (c) The length of slot for a slot weld shall not exceed 10 times the thickness of
ST I
406
407 (d) The width of the slot shall be not less than the thickness of the part
G R
408 containing it plus 5/16 in. (8 mm) rounded to the next larger odd 1/16 in.
409 (even mm), nor shall it be larger than 2-1/4 times the thickness of the weld.
AU IC
410
411 (e) The ends of the slot shall be semicircular or shall have the corners rounded
412 to a radius of not less than the thickness of the part containing it.
BL
413
414 (f) The minimum spacing of lines of slot welds in a direction transverse to
PU
415 their length shall be four times the width of the slot.
416
417 (g) The minimum center-to-center spacing in a longitudinal direction on any
418 line shall be two times the length of the slot.
419
420 (h) The thickness of plug or slot welds in material 5/8 in. (16 mm) or less in
421 thickness shall be equal to the thickness of the material. In material over 5/8
422 in. (16 mm) thick, the thickness of the weld shall be at least one-half the
423 thickness of the material, but not less than 5/8 in. (16 mm).
424
425 4. Strength
426
427 (a) The design strength, φRn and the allowable strength, Rn/Ω, of welded
428 joints shall be the lower value of the base material strength determined
429 according to the limit states of tensile rupture and shear rupture and the
430 weld metal strength determined according to the limit state of rupture as
431 follows:
432
433 For the base metal
434 Rn = FnBM ABM (J2-2)
435
436 For the weld metal
437 Rn = FnwAwe (J2-3)
438
439 where
440 ABM = area of the base metal, in.2 (mm2)
441 Awe = effective area of the weld, in.2 (mm2)
442 FnBM = nominal stress of the base metal, ksi (MPa)
443 Fnw = nominal stress of the weld metal, ksi (MPa)
444
445 The values of φ, Ω, FnBM and Fnw, and limitations thereon, are given in
446 Table J2.5.
447
448
449
450
20 NE
451
452
453
20 O
454
455
3, W
456
457
E
458
ST I
459
U EV
460
461
462
G R
463
464
AU IC
465
466
BL
467
468
PU
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
TABLE J2.5
Available Strength of Welded Joints, ksi (MPa)
Effective
Nominal Required
Area
Load Type and Direction Pertinent Stress Filler Metal
φ and Ω (ABM or
Relative to Weld Axis Metal (FnBM or Fnw), Awe), Strength
[a][b]
ksi (MPa) 2 2 Level
in. (mm )
COMPLETE-JOINT-PENETRATION GROOVE WELDS
Matching
filler metal
shall be
used. For T-
and corner-
Strength of the joint is controlled
joints with
Tension– by the base metal.
backing left
Normal to weld axis in place,
notch tough
20 NE
filler metal is
required.
See Section
20 O
J2.6.
Filler metal
3, W
with a
strength
E
level equal
Strength of the joint is controlled
to or one
by the base metal.
ST I
Compression– strength
U EV
filler metal
is permitted.
AU IC
Filler metal
with a
BL
strength
Tension or compression in parts joined parallel to level equal
Tension or compression– a weld is permitted to be neglected in design of to or less
PU
Compression–
Connections of Members Compressive stress is permitted to be neglected
designed to bear as in design of welds joining the parts.
described in Section
J1.4(b)
φ = 0.90
Base See
Ω = 1.67 Fy
Compression– J4
Connections not designed
to bear φ = 0.80
0.90 FEXX See
Weld Ω = 1.88 J2.1a
20 NE
than
Shear φ = 0.75 0.60 FEXX See matching
Weld
Ω = 2.00 J2.1a filler metal is
permitted.
20 O
FILLET WELDS INCLUDING FILLETS IN HOLES AND SLOTS AND SKEWED T-JOINTS
Base Governed by J4 Filler metal
3, W
φ = 0.75 [d] See with a
Shear Weld 0.60 FEXX
Ω = 2.00 J2.2a strength
E
level equal
to or less
ST I
than
Tension or compression– a weld is permitted to be neglected in design of matching
Parallel to weld axis welds joining the parts. filler metal is
permitted.
G R
Base Governed by J4
with a
strength
BL
level equal
Shear–
to or less
Parallel to faying surface φ = 0.75
Weld 0.60FEXX J2.3a than
PU
486
487 (b) The design strength, φRn and the allowable strength, Rn/Ω, of weld groups
488 shall be determined as follows:
489
490 (1) For a linear weld group with a uniform leg size, loaded through the
491 center of gravity, the available strength is permitted to be determined
492 accounting for a directional strength increase if strain compatibility
493 of the various weld elements is considered, using
494 Fnw (
= 0.60 FEXX 1.0 + 0.50 sin1.5 θ ) (J2-4)
495
496 where
497 FEXX = filler metal classification strength, ksi (MPa)
498 φ = 0.75 (LRFD); Ω = 2.00 (ASD)
499 θ = angle between the line of action of the required force
500 and the weld longitudinal axis, degrees
501
20 NE
502 User Note: A linear weld group is one in which all elements are
503 in a line or are parallel.
504
20 O
505
506 (2) For fillet welds to the ends of rectangular HSS where the weld ia
507 loaded in tension, the directional strength increase is not applicable.
3, W
508 Hence,
509
E
511
512 (3) For fillet weld groups concentrically loaded and consisting of
513 elements with a uniform leg size that are oriented both longitudinal-
G R
521
522 (ii) Rn = 0.85 Rnwl + 1.5Rnwt (J2-6b)
523
524 where
525 Rnwl = total nominal strength of longitudinally loaded fillet
526 welds, as determined in accordance with Table J2.5,
527 kips (N)
528 Rnwt = total nominal strength of transversely loaded fillet
529 welds, as determined in accordance with Table J2.5
530 without the increase in Section J2.4(b), kips (N)
531
532 User Note: The instantaneous center method is a valid way to calculate the
533 strength of weld groups consisting of weld elements in various directions
534 based on strain compatibility.
535
536 5. Combination of Welds
537
538 If two or more of the general types of welds (groove, fillet, plug, slot) are
539 combined in a single joint, the strength of each shall be separately computed
540 with reference to the axis of the group in order to determine the strength of
541 the combination.
542
543 6. Filler Metal Requirements
544
545 The choice of filler metal for use with CJP groove welds subject to tension
546 normal to the effective area shall comply with the requirements for matching
547 filler metals given in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
548
549 User Note: The following User Note Table summarizes the AWS
550 D1.1/D1.1M provisions for matching filler metals. Other restrictions exist.
551 For a complete list of base metals and prequalified matching filler metals, see
552 AWS D1.1/D1.1M Table 3.1 and Table 3.2.
553
Base Metal (ASTM) Matching Filler Metal
A36 ≤ 3/4 in. thick 60- and 70-ksi filler metal
SMAW: E7015, E7016, E7018,
A36 > 3/4 in. thick, A588[a], A1011,
E7028
20 NE
A572 Gr. 50 and 55, A913 Gr. 50,
Other processes: 70-ksi filler
A992, A1018
metal
A913 Gr. 60 and 65 80-ksi filler metal
20 O
A913 Gr. 70 90-ksi filler metal
[a]
For corrosion resistance and color similar to the base metal, see AWS
3, W
D1.1/D1.1M clause 3.7.3.
Notes:
E
In joints with base metals of different strengths, either a filler metal that matches the
ST I
higher strength base metal or a filler metal that matches the lower strength and
U EV
produces a low hydrogen deposit may be used when matching strength is required.
554
555
G R
556
557 Filler metal with a specified minimum Charpy V-notch toughness of 20 ft-lb
AU IC
558 (27 J) at 40°F (4°C) or lower shall be used in the following joints:
559
BL
560 (a) CJP groove welded T- and corner joints with steel backing left in place,
561 subject to tension normal to the effective area, unless the joints are
562 designed using the nominal strength and resistance factor or safety
PU
580 ASTM A307 bolts are permitted except where pretensioning is specified.
581
582 2. High-Strength Bolts
583
584 Use of high-strength bolts and bolting components shall conform to the
585 provisions of the Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength
586 Bolts, hereafter referred to as the RCSC Specification, except as modified by
587 this Specification. Major modifications include the following:
588
589 (a) This Specification allows bolt grades of ASTM F3125 Grades A325,
590 A325M, A490, A490M, F1852 F2280 ASTM F3043, F3111, F3148,
591 A354 Grade BC, A354 Grade BD, and A449 bolts.
592 (b) The RCSC Specification Section 5.2 is replaced with Section J3.7 of this
593 Specifiction
594 (c) Exceptions to the RCSC Specification associated with cyclically loaded
595 connections are contained in Appendix 3 of this Specification.
596 (d) Water-jet cutting of holes is permitted by Section M2.5 of this
20 NE
597 Specification.
598
599 High-strength bolts in this Specification are grouped according to material
20 O
600 strength as follows:
601
602 Group 120⎯ASTM F3125/F3125M Grades A325, A325M, F1852 and
3, W
603 ASTM A354 Grade BC
604 Group 144 ASTM F3148 Grade 144
E
609 Use of Group 144 bolting assemblies shall conform to the provisions of
610 ASTM F3148. Assemblies may be used in snug-tight, pretensioned or slip-
AU IC
613
614 Use of Group 200 high-strength bolting assemblies shall conform to the
615 applicable provisions of their ASTM standard. ASTM F3043 and F3111
PU
616 Grade 1 assemblies may be installed only to the snug-tight condition. ASTM
617 F3043 and F3111 Grade 2 assemblies may be used in snug-tight, preten-
618 sioned and slip-critical connections, using procedures provided in the
619 applicable ASTM standard.
620
621 User Note: The use of Group 200 bolting assemblies is limited to specific
622 building locations and noncorrosive environmental conditions by the
623 applicable ASTM standard.
624
625 When assembled, all joint surfaces, including those adjacent to the washers,
626 shall be free of scale, except tight mill scale.
627
628 (a) Bolting assemblies are permitted to be installed to the snug-tight
629 condition when used in:
630
631 (1) Bearing-type connections, except as stipulated in Section E6
632 (2) Tension or combined shear and tension applications, for Group 120
633 bolts only, where loosening or fatigue due to vibration or load fluc-
634 tuations are not design considerations
635
20 NE
653 tightened to a condition other than snug tight shall be clearly identified on the
654 design documents. (See Table J3.1 or J3.1M for minimum bolt pretension for
655 connections designated as pretensioned or slip critical.)
20 O
656
657 User Note: There are no specific minimum or maximum tension require-
658 ments for snug-tight bolts. Bolts that have been pretensioned are permitted in
3, W
659 snug-tight connections unless specifically prohibited on design documents.
660
E
661 When bolt requirements cannot be provided within the RCSC Specification
ST I
663 diameters exceeding 1-1/2 in. (38 mm), bolts or threaded rods conforming to
664 Group 120 or Group 150 materials are permitted to be used in accordance
G R
667 rods are used in pretensioned connections, the bolt geometry, including the
668 thread pitch, thread length, head and nut(s), shall be equal to or (if larger in
BL
690 (c) Finger shims up to 1/4 in. (6 mm) are permitted in slip-critical connections
691 designed on the basis of standard holes without reducing the nominal shear
692 strength of the fastener to that specified for slotted holes.
693
TABLE J3.1
Minimum Bolt Pretension,
[a] [b]
kips
Group 144
And [c]
Bolt Size, Group 120[a] Group 150[b] Group 200, Grade 2
in.
1/2 12 15 −
5/8 19 24 −
3/4 28 35 −
7/8 39 49 −
1 51 64 90
1 1/8 64 80 113
1-1/4 81 102 143
1 3/8 97 121 −
20 NE
1-1/2 118 148 −
[a]
Equal to 0.70 times the minimum tensile strength of bolts as specified in ASTM
F3125/F3125M for Grade A325 rounded off to nearest kip.
20 O
[b]
Equal to 0.70 times the minimum tensile strength of bolts as specified in ASTM
F3125/F3125M for Grade A490 rounded off to nearest kip. Group 144 (F3148) assemblies
have the same specified minimum pretension as Group 150.
3, W
[c]
Equal to 0.70 times the minimum tensile strength of bolts as specified in ASTM F3043 and
F3111 for Grade 2, rounded off to nearest kip,.
E
694
ST I
695
U EV
696
TABLE J3.1M
G R
mm
BL
M16 91 114
M20 142 179
M22 176 221
PU
708
709 (f) Long-slotted holes are permitted in only one of the connected parts of
710 either a slip-critical or bearing-type connection at an individual faying
711 surface. Long-slotted holes are permitted without regard to direction of
712 loading in slip-critical connections, but shall be normal to the direction of
713 loading in bearing-type connections.
714
715 (g) Washers shall be provided in accordance with the RCSC Specification
716 Section 6, except for Group 200 bolting assemblies, washers shall be provided
717 in accordance with the applicable ASTM standard.
718
719 User Note: When Group 200 heavy-hex bolting assemblies are used, a single
720 washer is used under the bolt head and a single washer is used under the nut.
721 When Group 200 twist-off bolting assemblies are used, a single washer is
722 used under the nut. Washers are of the type specified in the ASTM standard
723 for the bolting assembly.
724
20 NE
725 3. Minimum Spacing
726
727 The distance between centers of standard, oversized or slotted holes shall not
20 O
728 be less than 2-2/3 times the nominal diameter, d, of the fastener. However, the
729 clear distance between bolt holes or slots shall not be less than d.
730
3, W
731 User Note: A distance between centers of standard, oversize or slotted holes
732 of 3d is preferred.
E
TABLE J3.2
ST I
U EV
[a]
For high-strength bolts subject to tensile fatigue loading, see Appendix 3.
[b]
For nominal tensile strength it is permitted to use the tensile stress areaof the threaded rod or
bolt multiplied by the minimum specified tensile stress of the rod or bolt material, in lieu of the
tabulated values based on a nomnal tensile stress ares of 0.75 times the gross area
[c]
For end loaded connections with a fastener pattern length greater than 38 in. (950 mm), Fnv
shall be reduced to 83.3% of the tabulated values. Fastener pattern length is the maximum
distance parallel to the line of force between the centerline of the bolts connecting two parts with
one faying surface.
d]
For A307 bolts, the tabulated values shall be reduced by 1% for each 1/16 in. (2 mm) over five
diameters of length in the grip.
[e]
Threads assumed and permitted in shear planes in all cases.
[e]
The transition area of Group 200 bolts is considered part of the threaded section.
733
734 4. Minimum Edge Distance
735
736 The distance from the center of a standard hole to an edge of a connected part
737 in any direction shall not be less than either the applicable value from Table J3.4
738 or Table J3.4M, or as required in Section J3.10. The distance from the center of
20 NE
739 an oversized or slotted hole to an edge of a connected part shall be not less
740 than that required for a standard hole to an edge of a connected part plus the
741 applicable increment, C2, from Table J3.5 or Table J3.5M.
20 O
742
743 User Note: The edge distances in Tables J3.4 and J3.4M are minimum edge
3, W
744 distances based on standard fabrication practices and workmanship
745 tolerances. The appropriate provisions of Sections J3.10 and J4 must be
E
746 satisfied.
ST I
747
U EV
750 The maximum distance from the center of any bolt hole to the nearest edge of
751 elements in contact shall be 12 times the thickness of the connected element
752 under consideration, but shall not exceed 6 in. (150 mm). The longitudinal
AU IC
753 spacing of bolt holes between elements consisting of a plate and a shape, or
754 two plates, in continuous contact shall be as follows:
BL
755
756 (a) For painted members or unpainted members not subject to corrosion, the
PU
757 spacing shall not exceed 24 times the thickness of the thinner part or 12
758 in. (300 mm).
759
760 (b) For unpainted members of weathering steel subject to atmospheric
761 corrosion, the spacing shall not exceed 14 times the thickness of the
762 thinner part or 7 in. (180 mm).
763
764 User Note: The dimensions in (a) and (b) do not apply to elements consisting
765 of two shapes in continuous contact.
766
767 TABLE J3.3
768 Nominal Hole Dimensions, in.
Hole Dimensions
Bolt Standard Oversize Short-Slot Long-Slot
Diameter (Dia.) (Dia.) (Width x Length) (Width x Length)
1/2 9/16 5/8 9/16 x 11/16 9/16 x 1-1/4
5/8 11/16 13/16 11/16 x 7/8 11/16 x 1-9/16
3/4 13/16 15/16 13/16 x 1 13/16 x 1-7/8
7/8 15/16 1-1/16 15/16 x 1-1/8 15/16 x 2-3/16
1 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-1/8 x 1-5/16 1-1/8 x 2-1/2
≥1-1/8 d + 1/8 d + 5/16 (d + 1/8) x (d + 3/8) (d + 1/8) x 2.5d
769
770
771 TABLE J3.3M
772 Nominal Hole Dimensions, mm
Hole Dimensions
Bolt Standard Oversize Short-Slot Long-Slot
Diameter (Dia.) (Dia.) (Width x (Width x
Length) Length)
M16 18 20 18 x 22 18 x 40
M20 22 24 22 x 26 22 x 50
M22 24 28 24 x 30 24 x 55
[a]
M24 27 30 27 x 32 27 x 60
M27 30 35 30 x 37 30 x 67
M30 33 38 33 x 40 33 x 75
≥M36 d+3 d+8 (d + 3) x (d + 10) (d + 3) x 2.5d
[a]
Clearance provided allows the use of a 1-in.-diameter bolt.
20 NE
773
774 TABLE J3.4
Minimum Edge Distance [a] from
20 O
775
776 Center of Standard Hole[b] to Edge of Connected Part
3, W
777 in.
E
1/2 3/4
5/8 7/8
3/4 1
G R
7/8 1-1/8
1 1-1/4
AU IC
1-1/8 1-1/2
1-1/4 1-5/8
BL
778
779
780 TABLE J3.4M
781 Minimum Edge Distance[a] from
782 Center of Standard Hole[b] to Edge of Connected Part,
783 mm
Bolt Diameter Minimum Edge Distance
16 22
20 26
22 28
24 30
27 34
30 38
36 46
Over 36 1.25d
[a]
If necessary, lesser edge distances are permitted provided the applicable provisions from
Sections J3.10 and J4 are satisfied, but edge distances less than one bolt diameter are not
permitted without approval from the engineer of record.
[b]
For oversized or slotted holes, see Table J3.5M.
784
785 6. Tensile and Shear Strength of Bolts and Threaded Parts
786
787 The design tensile or shear strength, φRn, and the allowable tensile or shear
788 strength, Rn/Ω, of a snug-tightened or pretensioned high-strength bolt or
789 threaded part shall be determined according to the limit states of tension
790 rupture and shear rupture as:
791
792 Rn = Fn Ab (J3-1)
793
794 φ = 0.75 (LRFD) Ω = 2.00 (ASD)
795
796 where
20 NE
797 Ab = nominal unthreaded body area of bolt or threaded part, in.2 (mm2)
798 Fn = nominal tensile stress, Fnt, or shear stress, Fnv, from Table J3.2, ksi
799 (MPa)
20 O
800
801 The required tensile strength shall include any tension resulting from prying
3, W
802 action produced by deformation of the connected parts.
803
E
804 User Note: The available strength of a bolt in shear depends on whether the
ST I
805 bolt is sheared through its shank or through the threads / thread runout. Bolts
U EV
806 that are relatively short may be produced as fully threaded, without a shank,
807 and thus may not be able to be installed in the “threads excluded” condition.
808
G R
809 User Note: The force that can be resisted by a snug-tightened or preten-
810 sioned high-strength bolt or threaded part may be limited by the bearing or
AU IC
811 tearout strength at the bolt hole per Section J3.10. The effective strength of an
812 individual fastener may be taken as the lesser of the fastener shear strength
BL
813 per Section J3.6 or the bearing or tearout strength at the bolt hole per Section
814 J3.10. The strength of the bolt group is taken as the sum of the effective
815 strengths of the individual fasteners.
PU
816
817 7. Combined Tension and Shear in Bearing-Type Connections
818
819 The available tensile strength of a bolt subjected to combined tension and
820 shear shall be determined according to the limit states of tension and shear
821 rupture as:
822 Rn = Fnt′ Ab (J3-2)
823
824 φ = 0.75 (LRFD) Ω = 2.00 (ASD)
825
826 where
827 F nt′ = nominal tensile stress modified to include the effects of shear
828 stress, ksi (MPa)
Fnt
1.3 Fnt − f rv ≤ Fnt (LRFD) (J3-3a)
φFnv
Ω Fnt
1.3 Fnt − f rv ≤ Fnt (ASD) (J3-3b)
Fnv
829 F nt = nominal tensile stress from Table J3.2, ksi (MPa)
830 Fnv = nominal shear stress from Table J3.2, ksi (MPa)
831 frv = required shear stress using LRFD or ASD load combinations, ksi
832 (MPa)
833
834 The available shear stress of the fastener shall equal or exceed the required
835 shear stress, frv.
836
837 User Note: Note that when the required stress, f, in either shear or tension, is
838 less than or equal to 30% of the corresponding available stress, the effects of
839 combined stress need not be investigated. Also note that Equations J3-3a and
840 J3-3b can be rewritten so as to find a nominal shear stress, F′nv, as a function
841 of the required tensile stress, ft.
842
843 TABLE J3.5
844 Values of Edge Distance Increment C2, in.
Slotted Holes
20 NE
Nominal Long Axis Perpendicular to Long Axis
Diameter of Oversized Edge Parallel to
Fastener Holes Short Slots Long Slots[a] Edge
20 O
≤ 7/8 1/16 1/8
1 1/8 1/8 3/4d 0
≥1 1/8 1/8 3/16
3, W
[a]
When the length of the slot is less than the maximum allowable (see Table J3.3), C2 is
E
permitted to be reduced by one-half the difference between the maximum and actual slot
lengths.
ST I
845
U EV
846
847 TABLE J3.5M
G R
24 3 3 0.75d 0
≥ 27 3 5
[a]
When the length of the slot is less than the maximum allowable (see Table J3.3M), C2 is
permitted to be reduced by one-half the difference between the maximum and actual
slot lengths.
849
850 8. High-Strength Bolts in Slip-Critical Connections
851
852 Slip-critical connections shall be designed to prevent slip and for the limit
853 states of bearing-type connections. When slip-critical bolts pass through
854 fillers, all surfaces subject to slip shall be prepared to achieve design slip
855 resistance.
856
857 The single bolt available slip resistance for the limit state of slip shall be
858 determined as follows:
859
860 Rn = μDu h f Tbns (J3-4)
861
862 (a) For standard size and short-slotted holes perpendicular to the direction of
863 the load
864
865 φ = 1.00 (LRFD) Ω = 1.50 (ASD)
866
867 (b) For oversized and short-slotted holes parallel to the direction of the load
868
869 φ = 0.85 (LRFD) Ω = 1.76 (ASD)
870
871 (c) For long-slotted holes
872
873 φ = 0.70 (LRFD) Ω = 2.14 (ASD)
874
875 where
876 Du = 1.13, a multiplier that reflects the ratio of the mean installed bolt
877 pretension to the specified minimum bolt pretension. The use of
878 other values are permitted if approved by the engineer of record.
20 NE
879 Tb = minimum fastener tension given in Table J3.1, kips, or Table J3.1M,
880 kN
881 hf = factor for fillers, determined as follows:
20 O
882
883 (1) For one filler between connected parts
3, W
884
885 hf = 1.0
E
886
887 (2) For two or more fillers between connected parts
ST I
U EV
888
889 hf = 0.85
890
G R
895 (1) For Class A surfaces (unpainted clean mill scale steel surfaces or
896 surfaces with Class A coatings on blast-cleaned steel or hot-
897 dipped galvanized and roughened surfaces)
PU
898
899 μ = 0.30
900
901 (2) For Class B surfaces (unpainted blast-cleaned steel surfaces or
902 surfaces with Class B coatings on blast-cleaned steel)
903
904 μ = 0.50
905
906 9. Combined Tension and Shear in Slip-Critical Connections
907
908 When a slip-critical connection is subjected to an applied tension that reduces
909 the net clamping force, the available slip resistance per bolt from Section J3.8
910 shall be multiplied by the factor, ksc, determined as follows:
911
Tu
912 k sc = 1 − ≥0 (LRFD) (J3-5a)
Du Tb nb
1.5Ta
913 k sc = 1 − ≥0 (ASD) (J3-5b)
Du Tb nb
914 where
915 Ta = required tension force using ASD load combinations, kips (kN)
916 Tu = required tension force using LRFD load combinations, kips (kN)
917 n b = number of bolts carrying the applied tension
918
919 10. Bearing and Tearout Strength at Bolt Holes
920
921 The available strength, φRn and Rn Ω , at bolt holes shall be determined for
922 the limit states of bearing and tearout, as follows:
923
924 φ = 0.75 (LRFD) Ω = 2.00 (ASD)
925
926 The nominal strength of the connected material, Rn , is determined as follows:
927
928 (a) For connections with plies in contact:
929 1. The strength of a connected element at a bolt in a connection with
930 standard, oversized and short-slotted holes, independent of the di-
931 rection of loading, or a long-slotted hole with the slot parallel to
20 NE
932 the direction of the bearing force shall be the lesser of:
933
20 O
934 (a) Bearing
935
936 (i) When deformation at the bolt hole at service load is a de-
3, W
937 sign consideration
938
E
940
941 (ii) When deformation at the bolt hole at service load is not a
942 design consideration
G R
943
944 (J3-6b)
AU IC
20 NE
986 (b) When deformation at the bolt hole at service load is not a
987 design consideration
988
20 O
989 Rn = 1.5 lc tFu (J3-6h)
990
3, W
991 (ii) For a bolt in a connection with long-slotted holes with the slot
992 perpendicular to the direction of force:
E
993
994 (J3.6i)
ST I
Rn = 1.0 lc tFu
U EV
995
996 where
997 Fu = specified minimum tensile strength of the connected material, ksi
G R
998 (MPa)
999 d = nominal fastener diameter, in. (mm)
AU IC
1000 lc = clear distance, in the direction of the force, between the edge of the
1001 hole and the edge of the adjacent hole or edge of the material, in.
BL
1002 (mm)
1003 t = thickness of connected material, in. (mm)
PU
1004
1005 Bearing strength and tearout strength shall be checked for both bearing-type
1006 and slip-critical connections. The use of oversized holes and short- and long-
1007 slotted holes parallel to the line of force is restricted to slip-critical
1008 connections per Section J3.2.
1009
1010 11. Special Fasteners
1011
1012 The nominal strength of special fasteners other than the bolts presented in
1013 Table J3.2 shall be verified by tests.
1014
1015 12. Wall Strength at Tension Fasteners
1016
1017 When bolts or other fasteners in tension are attached to an unstiffened box or
1018 HSS wall, the strength of the wall shall be determined by rational analysis.
1019
1020 J4. AFFECTED ELEMENTS OF MEMBERS AND CONNECTING
1021 ELEMENTS
1022
20 NE
1040 Rn = Fu Ae (J4-2)
1041
1042 φ = 0.75 (LRFD) Ω = 2.00 (ASD)
20 O
1043
1044 where
3, W
1045 Ae = effective net area as defined in Section D3, in.2 (mm2)
1046
E
1047 User Note: The effects of shear lag or concentrated loads dispersed within
ST I
1048 the element may cause only a portion of the area to be effective in resisting
U EV
1052
1053 The available shear strength of affected and connecting elements in shear
AU IC
1054 shall be the lower value obtained according to the limit states of shear
1055 yielding and shear rupture:
BL
1056
1057 (a) For shear yielding of the element
PU
1058
1059 Rn = 0.60Fy Agv (J4-3)
1060
1061 φ = 1.00 (LRFD) Ω = 1.50 (ASD)
1062
1063 where
1064 Agv = gross area subject to shear, in.2 (mm2)
1065
1066 (b) For shear rupture of the element
1067
1068 Rn = 0.60 Fu Anv (J4-4)
1069
1070 φ = 0.75 (LRFD) Ω = 2.00 (ASD)
1071
1072 where
1073 Anv = net area subject to shear, in.2 (mm2)
1074
1075 3. Block Shear Strength
1076
1077 The available strength for the limit state of block shear rupture along a shear
1078 failure path or paths and a perpendicular tension failure path shall be
1079 determined as follows:
1080
1081 Rn = 0.60Fu Anv + Ubs Fu Ant ≤ 0.60Fy Agv + Ubs Fu Ant
1082 (J4-5)
1083
1084 φ = 0.75 (LRFD) Ω = 2.00 (ASD)
1085
1086 where
2 2
1087 Ant = net area subject to tension, in. (mm )
1088
1089 Where the tension stress is uniform, Ubs = 1; where the tension stress is
1090 nonuniform, Ubs = 0.5.
1091
1092 User Note: Typical cases where Ubs should be taken equal to 0.5 are
20 NE
1093 illustrated in the Commentary
1094 For connections with round holes, Aev is calculated with a shear length
1095 reduction for each hole in the shear plane, lvh, according to Equation J4-6.
20 O
1096 For connections with slotted holes, lvh is the nominal slot dimension parallel
1097 to the shear plane plus 1/16 in.
3, W
1098
lvh = d h2 − d 2
E
1099 (J4-6)
1100
ST I
U EV
1101 where
1102 Aev = effective area subjected to shear, in.2 (mm2)
1103 Ant = net area subjected to tension, in.2 (mm2)
G R
1106
1107 For concentrically loaded connections that are symmetrical about the loading
BL
1111
1112 For end connections at axially loaded angles and axially loaded tee-shape
1113 members bolted through the web, and for outstanding legs of clip angles in
1114 single-angle connections:
1115
1116 Ubs = 0.70 for connections with one bolt row parallel to the load
1117 Ubs = 0.50 for connections with two bolt rows parallel to the load
1118
1119 For beam webs at bolted end connections subjected to vertical shear and for
1120 connecting elements at these interfaces:
1121
1122 Ubs = 0.85 for connections with one vertical bolt row
1123 Ubs = 0.40 for connections with two vertical bolt rows
1124 Ubs = 0.50 for connections with two bolt rows parallel to the load
1125
1126 For beam webs at bolted end connections subjected to vertical shear and for
1127 connecting elements at these interfaces:
1128
1129 Ubs = 0.85 for connections with one vertical bolt row
1130 Ubs = 0.40 for connections with two vertical bolt rows
1131
1132 4. Strength of Elements in Compression
1133
1134 The available strength of connecting elements in compression for the limit
1135 states of yielding and buckling shall be determined as follows:
1136
1137 (a) When Lc/r ≤ 25
1138
1139 Pn = FyAg (J4-6)
1140
1141 φ = 0.90 (LRFD) Ω = 1.67 (ASD)
1142
1143 (b) When Lc/r >25, the provisions of Chapter E apply;
1144
1145 where
20 NE
1146 Lc = KL = effective length, in. (mm)
1147 K = effective length factor
1148 L = laterally unbraced length of the member, in. (mm)
20 O
1149
1150 User Note: The effective length factors used in computing compressive
3, W
1151 strengths of connecting elements are specific to the end restraint provided and
1152 may not necessarily be taken as unity when the direct analysis method is
E
1153 employed.
1154
ST I
U EV
1158 obtained according to the limit states of flexural yielding, local buckling,
1159 flexural lateral-torsional buckling, and flexural rupture.
AU IC
1160
1161 J5. FILLERS
BL
1162
1163 1. Fillers in Welded Connections
1164
PU
1185 region subjected to the applied force in the filler shall be sufficient to prevent
1186 overstressing the filler. The welds joining the filler to the inside connected
1187 base metal shall be sufficient to transmit the applied force.
1188
1189 2. Fillers in Bolted Bearing-Type Connections
1190
1191 When a bolt that carries load passes through fillers that are equal to or less
1192 than 1/4 in. (6 mm) thick, the shear strength shall be used without reduction.
1193 When a bolt that carries load passes through fillers that are greater than 1/4 in.
1194 (6 mm) thick, one of the following requirements shall apply:
1195
1196 (a) The shear strength of the bolts shall be multiplied by the factor
1197
1198 1 − 0.4(t − 0.25)
1199
1200 1 − 0.0154(t − 6) (S.I.)
1201
20 NE
1202 but not less than 0.85, where t is the total thickness of the fillers.
1203
1204 (b) The fillers shall be welded or extended beyond the joint and bolted to
20 O
1205 uniformly distribute the total force in the connected element over the
1206 combined cross section of the connected element and the fillers.
3, W
1207
1208 (c) The size of the joint shall be increased to accommodate a number of bolts
E
1209 that is equivalent to the total number required in (b).
1210
ST I
U EV
1214 strength of the smaller spliced section. Other types of splices in cross sections
1215 of plate girders and beams shall develop the strength required by the forces at
AU IC
1221 of surfaces in contact shall be determined for the limit state of bearing (local
1222 compressive yielding) as follows:
1223
1224 φ = 0.75 (LRFD) Ω = 2.00 (ASD)
1225
1226 The nominal bearing strength, Rn, shall be determined as follows:
1227
1228 (a) For finished surfaces, pins in reamed, drilled, or bored holes, bolts or rods
1229 that pass completely through an unstiffened box or HSS member, and
1230 ends of fitted bearing stiffeners
1231
1232 Rn = 1.8Fy Apb (J7-1)
1233
1234 where
1235 Apb = projected area in bearing, in.2 (mm2)
1236 Fy = specified minimum yield stress, ksi (MPa)
1237
1238 (b) For expansion rollers and rockers
1239
20 NE
1252 where
1253 d = diameter, in. (mm)
20 O
1254 lb = length of bearing, in. (mm)
1255
1256 J8. COLUMN BASES AND BEARING ON CONCRETE
3, W
1257
1258 Provisions shall be made to transfer the column loads and moments to the
E
1260
U EV
1261 In the absence of code regulations, the design bearing strength, φc Pp , and the
1262 allowable bearing strength, Pp Ωc , for the limit state of concrete crushing
G R
1266
1267 The nominal bearing strength, Pp, is determined as follows:
1268
PU
1286 Anchor rods shall be designed to provide the required resistance to loads on
1287 the completed structure at the base of columns including the net tensile
1288 components of any bending moment resulting from load combinations
1289 stipulated in Section B2. The anchor rods shall be designed in accordance
1290 with the requirements for threaded parts in Table J3.2.
1291
1292 Design of anchor rods for the transfer of forces to the concrete foundation
1293 shall satisfy the requirements of ACI 318 (ACI 318M) or ACI 349 (ACI
1294 349M).
1295
1296 User Note: Column bases should be designed considering bearing against
1297 concrete elements, including when columns are required to resist a horizontal
1298 force at the base plate. See AISC Design Guide 1, Base Plate and Anchor
1299 Rod Design, Second Edition, for column base design information.
1300
1301 When anchor rods are used to resist horizontal forces, hole size, anchor rod
1302 setting tolerance, and the horizontal movement of the column shall be
20 NE
1303 considered in the design.
1304
1305 Larger oversized holes and slotted holes are permitted in base plates when
20 O
1306 adequate bearing is provided for the nut by using ASTM F844 washers or
1307 plate washers to bridge the hole.
1308
3, W
1309 User Note: The recommended hole sizes, corresponding washer dimensions
1310 and nuts are given in the AISC Steel Construction Manual and ASTM
E
1311 F1554. ASTM F1554 anchor rods may be furnished in accordance with
ST I
1312 product specifications with a body diameter less than the nominal diameter.
U EV
1313 Load effects such as bending and elongation should be calculated based on
1314 minimum diameters permitted by the product specification. See ASTM
G R
1315 F1554 and the table, “Applicable ASTM Specifications for Various Types of
1316 Structural Fasteners,” in Part 2 of the AISC Steel Construction Manual.
AU IC
1317
1318 User Note: See ACI 318 (ACI 318M) for embedment design and for shear
BL
1319 friction design. See OSHA for special erection requirements for anchor rods.
1320
1321 J10. FLANGES AND WEBS WITH CONCENTRATED FORCES
PU
1322
1323 This section applies to single- and double-concentrated forces applied normal
1324 to the flange(s) of wide-flange sections and similar built-up shapes. A single-
1325 concentrated force is either tensile or compressive. Double-concentrated
1326 forces are one tensile and one compressive and form a couple on the same
1327 side of the loaded member.
1328
1329 When the required strength exceeds the available strength as determined for
1330 the limit states listed in this section, stiffeners and/or doublers shall be
1331 provided and shall be sized for the difference between the required strength
1332 and the available strength for the applicable limit state. Stiffeners shall also
1333 meet the design requirements in Section J10.8. Doublers shall also meet the
1334 design requirement in Section J10.9.
1335
1336 User Note: See Appendix 6, Section 6.3 for requirements for the ends of
1337 cantilever members.
1338
1339 Stiffeners are required at unframed ends of beams in accordance with the
1340 requirements of Section J10.7.
1341
1342 User Note: Design guidance for members other than wide-flange sections and
1343 similar built-up shapes, including HSS members can be found in the
1344 Commentary.
1345
1346 1. Flange Local Bending
1347
1348 This section applies to tensile single-concentrated forces and the tensile
1349 component of double-concentrated forces.
1350
1351 The design strength, φRn , and the allowable strength, Rn Ω , for the limit
1352 state of flange local bending shall be determined as:
1353
1354 Rn = 6.25Fyf t 2f (J10-1)
1355
1356 φ = 0.90 (LRFD) Ω = 1.67 (ASD)
20 NE
1357
1358 where
1359 Fyf = specified minimum yield stress of the flange, ksi (MPa)
20 O
1360 tf = thickness of the loaded flange, in. (mm)
1361
1362 If the length of loading across the member flange is less than 0.15bf, where bf
3, W
1363 is the member flange width, Equation J10-1 need not be checked.
1364
E
1365 When the concentrated force to be resisted is applied at a distance from the
ST I
U EV
1366 member end that is less than 10tf, Rn shall be reduced by 50%.
1367
1368 When required, a pair of transverse stiffeners shall be provided.
G R
1369
1370 2. Web Local Yielding
AU IC
1371
1372 This section applies to single-concentrated forces and both components of
BL
1394 Fyw = specified minimum yield stress of the web material, ksi (MPa)
1395 k = distance from outer face of the flange to the web toe of the fillet, in.
1396 (mm)
1397 lb = length of bearing, in. (mm)
1398 tw = thickness of web, in. (mm)
1399
1400 When required, a pair of transverse stiffeners or a doubler plate shall be
1401 provided.
1402
1403 3. Web Local Crippling
1404
1405 This section applies to compressive single-concentrated forces or the
1406 compressive component of double-concentrated forces.
1407
1408 The available strength for the limit state of web local crippling shall be
1409 determined as follows:
1410
20 NE
1411 φ = 0.75 (LRFD) Ω = 2.00 (ASD)
1412
1413 The nominal strength, Rn , shall be determined as follows:
20 O
1414
1415 (a) When the concentrated compressive force to be resisted is applied at a
3, W
1416 distance from the member end that is greater than or equal to d 2
l t EFywt f
1.5
E
1417 Rn = 0.80tw 2
1 + 3 b w Qf (J10-4)
d tf
ST I
tw
U EV
1418
1419 (b) When the concentrated compressive force to be resisted is applied at a
G R
EFywt f
1423 Rn = 0.40tw 2 1 + 3 b w Qf (J10-5a)
f
d t tw
PU
1424
1425 (2) For lb / d > 0.2
tw EFywt f
1.5
1 +
4lb
1426 Rn = 0.40tw 2
− 0.2 Qf (J10-5b)
d tf tw
1427 where
1428 d = full nominal depth of the member, in. (mm)
1429 Qf = 1.0 for wide-flange sections and for HSS (connecting surface) in
1430 tension
1431 = as given in Table K3.2 for all other HSS conditions
1432
1433 When required, a transverse stiffener, a pair of transverse stiffeners, or a
1434 doubler plate extending at least three quarters of the depth of the web shall be
1435 provided.
1436
1437 4. Web Sidesway Buckling
1438
1439 This section applies only to compressive single-concentrated forces applied to
1440 members where relative lateral movement between the loaded compression
1441 flange and the tension flange is not restrained at the point of application of the
1442 concentrated force.
1443
1444 The available strength of the web for the limit state of sidesway buckling shall
1445 be determined as follows:
1446
1447 φ = 0.85 (LRFD) Ω = 1.76 (ASD)
1448
1449 The nominal strength, Rn, shall be determined as follows:
1450
1451 (a) If the compression flange is restrained against rotation
1452
1453 (1) When ( h tw ) ( Lb b f ) ≤ 2.3
1454
Cr tw3 t f h tw
3
1455 Rn = 1 + 0.4 (J10-6)
h2 Lb b f
20 NE
1456
1457 (2) When ( h tw ) ( Lb b f ) > 2.3 , the limit state of web sidesway buckling
20 O
1458 does not apply.
1459
3, W
1460 When the required strength of the web exceeds the available strength, local
1461 lateral bracing shall be provided at the tension flange or either a pair of
E
1462 transverse stiffeners or a doubler plate shall be provided.
ST I
1463
U EV
1466
1467
AU IC
Cr tw3 t f h tw
3
h 2 Lb b f
1469 (2) When ( h tw ) ( Lb b f ) > 1.7 , the limit state of web sidesway buck-
PU
1488 h = clear distance between flanges less the fillet or corner radius for rolled
1489 shapes; distance between adjacent lines of fasteners or the clear dis-
1490 tance between flanges when welds are used for built-up shapes, in.
1491 (mm)
1492 αs = 1.0 (LRFD); 1.5 (ASD)
1493
1494 User Note: For determination of adequate restraint, refer to Appendix 6.
1495
1496 5. Web Compression Buckling
1497
1498 This section applies to a pair of compressive single-concentrated forces or the
1499 compressive components in a pair of double-concentrated forces, applied at
1500 both flanges of a member at the same location.
1501
1502 The available strength for the limit state of web compression buckling shall
1503 be determined as follows:
24tw3 EFyw
Rn = Qf
20 NE
1504 (J10-8)
h
1505
20 O
1506 φ = 0.90 (LRFD) Ω = 1.67 (ASD)
1507 where
3, W
1508 Qf = 1.0 for wide-flange sections and for HSS (connecting surface) in
1509 tension.
E
1510 = as given in Table K3.2 for all other HSS conditions
1511
ST I
U EV
1515
1516 When required, a single transverse stiffener, a pair of transverse stiffeners, or
AU IC
1517 a doubler plate extending the full depth of the web shall be provided.
1518
BL
αP
1540 Rn = 0.60 Fy d c tw 1.4 − r (J10-10)
Py
1541
1542 (b) When frame stability, including plastic panel zone deformation, is
1543 considered in the analysis or when the required panel-zone shear
1544 strength is determined based on the plastic bending moment, Mp, flexur-
1545 al strength of the beam:
1546
1547 (1) For αPr ≤ 0.75Py
3bcf tcf2
1548 Rn = 0.60 Fy d c t w 1 + (J10-11)
d b d c tw
1549
1550 (2) For αPr > 0.75Py
3bcf tcf2 1.2αPr
Rn = 0.60 Fy d c tw 1 + 1.9 −
d b d c tw
1551 (J10-12)
20 NE
Py
1552
1553 In Equations J10-9 through J10-12, the following definitions apply:
20 O
1554
1555 Ag = gross area of member, in.2 (mm2)
3, W
1556 Fy = specified minimum yield stress of the column web, ksi (MPa)
1557 Pr = required axial strength using LRFD or ASD load combinations, kips
E
1558 (N)
ST I
1566
1567 When required, doubler plate(s) or a pair of diagonal stiffeners shall be
1568 provided within the boundaries of the rigid connection whose webs lie in a
PU
20 NE
1605
1606 Transverse and diagonal stiffeners shall comply with the following additional
1607 requirements:
20 O
1608
1609 (a) The width of each stiffener plus one-half the thickness of the column
1610 web shall not be less than one-third of the flange or moment connection
3, W
1611 plate width delivering the concentrated force.
1612 (b) The thickness of a stiffener shall not be less than one-half the thickness
E
1615 (c) Transverse stiffeners shall extend a minimum of one-half the depth of
1616 the member except as required in Sections J10.3, J10.5 and J10.7.
G R
1617
1618 9. Additional Doubler Plate Requirements for Concentrated Forces
AU IC
1619
1620 Doubler plates required for compression strength shall be designed in
1621 accordance with the requirements of Chapter E.
BL
1622
1623 Doubler plates required for tensile strength shall be designed in accordance
PU
1633 (b) The doubler plate shall be welded to develop the proportion of the total
1634 force transmitted to the doubler plate.
1635
1636 10. Transverse Forces on Plate Elements
1637
1638 When a force is applied transverse to the plane of a plate element, the nominal
1639 strength shall consider the limit states of shear and flexure in accordance with
1640 Sections J4.2 and J4.5.
1641
1642 User Note: The flexural strength can be checked based on yield-line theory
1643 and the shear strength can be determined based on a punching shear model.
1644 See AISC Steel Construction Manual Part 9 for further discussion.
1645
1646
20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU
1 CHAPTER K
20 NE
16 K5. Welds of Plates and Branches to Rectangular HSS
17
18 K1. GENERAL PROVISIONS AND PARAMETERS FOR HSS
20 O
19 CONNECTIONS
20
3, W
21 For the purposes of this chapter, the centerlines of branch members and chord
22 members shall lie in a common plane. Rectangular HSS connections are
E
23 further limited to having all members oriented with walls parallel to the
ST I
24 plane.
U EV
25
26 The tables in this chapter are often accompanied by limits of applicability.
27 Connections complying with the limits of applicability listed can be designed
G R
28 considering the limit states provided for each joint configuration. Connec-
29 tions not complying with the limits of applicability listed are not prohibited
AU IC
54 1. Definitions of Parameters
55
56 Ag = gross cross-sectional area of member, in.2 (mm2)
57 B = overall width of rectangular HSS main member, measured 90° to the
58 plane of the connection, in. (mm)
59 Bb = overall width of rectangular HSS branch member or plate, measured 90°
60 to the plane of the connection, in. (mm)
61 Be = effective width of rectangular HSS branch member or plate for local
62 yielding of the transverse element, in. (mm)
63 Bep = effective width of rectangular HSS branch member or plate for
64 punching shear, in. (mm)
65 D = outside diameter of round HSS main member, in. (mm)
66 Db = outside diameter of round HSS branch member, in. (mm)
67 Fc = available stress in main member, ksi (MPa)
68 = Fy for LRFD; 0.60Fy for ASD
69 Fu = specified minimum tensile strength of HSS member material, ksi (MPa)
70 Fy = specified minimum yield stress of HSS main member material, ksi
20 NE
71 (MPa)
72 Fyb = specified minimum yield stress of HSS branch member or plate
73 material, ksi (MPa)
20 O
74 H = overall height of rectangular HSS main member, measured in the plane
75 of the connection, in. (mm)
3, W
76 Hb = overall height of rectangular HSS branch member, measured in the
77 plane of the connection, in. (mm)
E
78 Qf = chord stress interaction parameter
79 lend = distance from the near side of the connecting branch or plate to end of
ST I
U EV
83 (mm)
84 β = width ratio; the ratio of branch diameter to chord diameter = Db/D for
AU IC
85 round HSS; the ratio of overall branch width to chord width = Bb/B for
86 rectangular HSS
BL
87 βeff = effective width ratio; the sum of the perimeters of the two branch
88 members in a K-connection divided by eight times the chord width
89
PU
90 2. Rectangular HSS
91
92 2a. Effective Width for Connections to Rectangular HSS
93
94 For local yielding of transverse elements, the effective width of elements
95 (plates or rectangular HSS branches) perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of
96 a rectangular HSS member that deliver a force component transverse to the
97 face of the member shall be taken as:
98
99 10t Fy t (K1-1)
Be = Bb ≤ Bb
B Fyb tb
100
101 For shear yielding (punching), the effective width of the face of a rectangular
102 HSS member, adjacent to transverse element (plates or rectangular HSS
103 branches) shall be taken as:
104
10t
105 Bep = Bb ≤ Bb (K1-2)
B
106 User Note: Section J4 addresses the strength of affected elements in tension,
107 compression, flexure and shear. The effective widths above are used to
108 establish the effective areas to be used when checking these limit states. The
109 commentary provide further guidance
110
111 3. Main Member Stress Function
112
113 Where required, the main member stress function, Qf, shall be taken as:
114
115 (a) For HSS connecting surface in tension, Qf = 1
116
117 (b) For round HSS connecting surface in compression
118
119 Q f = 1 − 0.3U (1 + U ) ≤ 1.0 (K1-3)
120
121 (c) For rectangular HSS connecting surface in compression
122
20 NE
U
123 Q f = 1.3 − 0.4 ≤ 1.0 for T-, Y-, and cross connections (K1-4)
β
20 O
U
124 Q f = 1.3 − 0.4 ≤ 1.0 for gapped K-connections (K1-5)
βeff
3, W
125 Q f = 1 − U 2 for longitudinal plate connections (K1-6)
E
126
ST I
127 where
U EV
Pro M
128 U= + ro ≤ 1.0
Fc Ag Fc S
G R
129
130 where Pro and Mro are determined on the side of the joint that has lower
AU IC
131 compression stress for round HSS and higher compression stress for
132 rectangular HSS. Pro and Mro refer to required strengths in the HSS: Pro =
BL
133 Pu for LRFD, and Pa for ASD; Mro = Mu for LRFD, and Ma for ASD.
134
135 Limits of Applicability:
PU
β
154 lend ≥ D 1.25 − (K1-8)
2
155
156 When the connection occurs at a distance less than lend from an open chord
157 end, reduce the connection available strength by 50%.
158
159 K2. CONCENTRATED FORCES ON HSS
160
161 1. Definitions of Parameters
162
163 lb = bearing length of the load, measured parallel to the axis of the HSS
164 member (or measured across the width of the HSS in the case of load-
165 ed cap plates), in. (mm)
166
167 2. Round HSS
168
169 The available strength of plate-to-round HSS connections, within the limits
20 NE
170 in Table K2.1A, shall be taken as shown in Table K2.1.
171
20 O
TABLE K2.1
Available Strengths of Plate-to-Round HSS Connections
3, W
Connection Available
Connection Type Plate Bending
E
Strength
Transverse Plate T-, Y-,
ST I
and Cross-Connections
Plate Axial Load In-Plane Out-of-Plane
G R
5.5
Rn sinθ = Fy t 2 Mn = 0.5BbRn
Bb
Qf
1 − 0.81 –
(K2-1b)
D
AU IC
(K2-1a)
φ = 0.90 (LRFD) Ω = 1.67 (ASD)
BL
l Mn = 0.8 lb Rn
R n sin θ = 5 .5Fy t 2 1 + 0 .25 b Qf
D –
(K2-2a) (K2-2b)
172
173
174
TABLE K2.1A
Limits of Applicability of Table K2.1
HSS wall slenderness: D t ≤ 50 for T-connections under branch plate axial load
or bending
D t ≤ 40 for cross-connections under branch plate axial
load or bending
Width ratio: 0.2 < Bb D ≤ 1.0 for transverse branch plate connections
Material strength: Fy ≤ 52 ksi (360 MPa)
Ductility: Fy Fu ≤ 0.8 Note: ASTM A500 Gr. C is acceptable
175
176 3. Rectangular HSS
177
178 The available strength of connections to rectangular HSS with concentrated
20 NE
179 loads shall be determined based on the applicable limit states from Chapter
180 J.
181
20 O
182 K3. HSS-TO-HSS TRUSS CONNECTIONS
183
3, W
184 HSS-to-HSS truss connections are defined as connections that consist of
185 one or more branch members that are directly welded to a continuous
E
186 chord that passes through the connection and shall be classified as follows:
ST I
187
U EV
188 (a) When the punching load, Pr sinθ, in a branch member is equilibrated
189 by beam shear in the chord member, the connection shall be classi-
G R
195 connection. The relevant gap is between the primary branch mem-
196 bers whose loads equilibrate. An N-connection can be considered as
PU
216 are permitted without consideration of the resulting moments for the design
217 of the connection.
218
219 1. Definitions of Parameters
220
221 Ov = lov/lp × 100, %
222 e = eccentricity in a truss connection, positive being away from the
223 branches, in. (mm)
224 g = gap between toes of branch members in a gapped K-connection,
225 neglecting the welds, in. (mm)
226 lb = Hb / sinθ, in. (mm)
227 lov = overlap length measured along the connecting face of the chord
228 beneath the two branches, in. (mm)
229 lp = projected length of the overlapping branch on the chord, in. (mm)
230
231 γ = chord slenderness ratio; the ratio of one-half the diameter to the wall
232 thickness = D/2t for round HSS; the ratio of one-half the width to
20 NE
233 wall thickness = B/2t for rectangular HSS
234 η = load length parameter, applicable only to rectangular HSS; the ratio
235 of the length of contact of the branch with the chord in the plane of
20 O
236 the connection to the chord width = lb/B
237 θ = acute angle between the branch and chord (degrees)
3, W
238 ζ = gap ratio; the ratio of the gap between the branches of a gapped K-
239 connection to the width of the chord = g/B for rectangular HSS
E
240
241 2. Round HSS
ST I
U EV
242
243 The available strength of round HSS-to-HSS truss connections, within the
244 limits in Table K3.1A, shall be taken as the lowest value obtained accord-
G R
TABLE K3.1
Available Strengths of Round
HSS-to-HSS Truss Connections
Connection Type Connection Available Axial Strength
General Check for T-, Y-, Cross- and K- Limit State: Shear Yielding (punching)
Connections with gap, when 1 + sinθ
Pn = 0.6Fy t πDb 2
(K3-1)
2sin θ
Db (tens/comp) < ( D − 2t )
φ = 0.95 (LRFD) Ω = 1.58 (ASD)
T- and Y-Connections Limit State: Chord Plastification
20 NE
Cross-Connections Limit State: Chord Plastification
20 O 5.7
Pn sinθ = Fy t 2 Qf (K3-3)
3, W
1 − 0.81 β
E
Db comp
AU IC
= Fy t 2 2.0 + 11.33 Qg Qf
D
( Pn sin θ)tension branch
BL
(K3-5)
= ( Pn sin θ)compression branch
PU
259
TABLE K3.1A
Limits of Applicability of Table K3.1
Joint eccentricity: –0.55 ≤ e/D ≤ 0.25 for K-connections
Chord wall slenderness: D/t ≤ 50 for T-, Y- and K-connections
D/t ≤ 40 for cross-connections
Branch wall slenderness: Db t b ≤ 50 for tension and compression branch
Db t b ≤ 0.05E Fyb for compression branch
Width ratio: 0.2 ≤ Db D ≤ 1.0 for T-, Y-, cross- and overlapped
K-connections
0.4 ≤ Db D ≤ 1.0 for gapped K-connections
Gap: g ≤ tb comp + tb tens for gapped K-connections
Overlap: 25% ≤ Ov ≤ 100% for overlapped K-connections
Branch thickness: tb overlapping ≤ tb overlapped for branches in overlapped
K-connections
Material strength: Fy and Fyb ≤ 52 ksi (360 MPa)
20 NE
Ductility strength: Fy/Fu and Fyb/Fub ≤ 0.8 Note: ASTM A500 Grade C is
accpetable.
20 O
260
261 3. Rectangular HSS
3, W
262
263 The available strength, φPn and Pn/Ω, of rectangular HSS-to-HSS truss
E
264 connections within the limits in Table K3.2A, shall be taken as the lowest
265 value obtained according to limit states shown in Table K3.2 and Chapter
ST I
U EV
266 J.
267
268 User Note: Outside the limits in Table K3.2A, the limit states of Chapter J
G R
269 are still applicable and the applicable limit states of Chapter K are not
270 defined.
AU IC
271
272
BL
PU
273
274
TABLE K3.2
Available Strengths of Rectangular
HSS-to-HSS Truss Connections
Connection Type Connection Available Axial Strength
Gapped K-Connections Limit State: Chord Wall Plastification, for all β
20 NE
φ = 0.95 (LRFD) Ω = 1.58 (ASD)
20 O
Limit State: Shear of Chord Side Walls in the Gap
Region
3, W
Determine Pnsinθ in accordance with Section G4.
This limit state need not be checked for square chords.
E
ST I
(
Pn ,i = Fybi t bi 2H bi − 4t bi + Bei + Bej ) (K3-11)
Functions
20 NE
≤ 1.25 for compression branch of gapped K-,
Fyb
T-, Y- and cross-connections
20 O
≤ 35 for compression branch of gapped K-, T-, Y-
and cross-connections
3, W
E
≤ 1.1 for compression branch of overlapped K-
Fyb
E
connections
Width ratio: Bb B and H b B ≥ 0.25 for T-, Y-, cross-, and overlapped K-
ST I
U EV
connections
Aspect ratio: 0.5 ≤ H b Bb ≤ 2.0 and 0.5 ≤ H B ≤ 2.0
Overlap: 25% ≤ Ov ≤ 100% for overlapped K-connections
G R
Branch width ratio: Bbi Bbj ≥ 0.75 for overlapped K-connections, where
subscript i refers to the overlapping branch
AU IC
284 chord that passes through the connection, with the branch or branches
285 loaded by bending moments.
286
287 A connection shall be classified as:
288
289 (a) A T-connection when there is one branch and it is perpendicular to the
290 chord and as a Y-connection when there is one branch, but not per-
291 pendicular to the chord
292 (b) A cross-connection when there is a branch on each (opposite) side of
293 the chord
294
295 1. Definitions of Parameters
296
297 Zb = Plastic section modulus of branch about the axis of bending, in.3
298 (mm3)
299 β = width ratio
300 = Db/D for round HSS; ratio of branch diameter to chord diameter
301 = Bb/B for rectangular HSS; ratio of overall branch width to chord
20 NE
302 width
303 γ = chord slenderness ratio
20 O
304 = D/2t for round HSS; ratio of one-half the diameter to the wall
305 thickness
306 = B/2t for rectangular HSS; ratio of one-half the width to the wall
3, W
307 thickness
308 η = load length parameter, applicable only to rectangular HSS
E
309 = lb/B; the ratio of the length of contact of the branch with the chord in
ST I
310 the plane of the connection to the chord width, where lb=Hb /sin θ
U EV
20 NE
φ = 0.90 (LRFD) Ω = 1.67 (ASD)
Limit State: Shear Yielding
(punching), when Db < ( D − 2t )
20 O 1 + 3sinθ
3, W
M n -ip = 0.6Fy tDb2 2 (K4-2)
4sin θ
E
Mn -op = Qf (K4-3)
sinθ 1 − 0.81 β
AU IC
3 + sinθ
Mn -op = 0.6Fy tDb2 2
(K4-4)
4sin θ
φ = 0.95 (LRFD) Ω = 1.58 (ASD)
For T-, Y- and cross-connections, with branch(es) under combined axial load, in-
plane bending, and out-of-plane bending, or any combination of these load effects:
2
Pr Mr − ip Mr −op
+ + ≤ 1.0 (K4-5)
Pc Mc − ip Mc −op
Pr = required axial strength in branch using LRFD or ASD load combinations,
kips (N)
Mr-ip = required in-plane flexural strength in branch using LRFD or ASD
load combinations, kip-in (N-mm)
Mr-op= required out-of-plane flexural strength in branch using LRFD or ASD load
combinations, kip-in (N-mm)
Pc = available axial strength obtained from Table K3.1, kips (N)
Mc-ip = available strength for in-plane bending, kip-in (N-mm)
319
TABLE K4.1A
Limits of Applicability of Table K4.1
Chord wall slenderness: D t ≤ 50 for T- and Y-connections
D t ≤ 40 for cross-connections
Branch wall slenderness: Db t b ≤ 50
Db t b ≤ 0.05 E Fyb
Width ratio: 0.2 < Db D ≤ 1.0
Material strength: Fy and Fyb ≤ 52 ksi (360 MPa)
Ductility: Fy Fu and Fyb Fub ≤ 0.8 Note: ASTM A500 Gr. C is
acceptable
320
321
20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU
322 3. Rectangular
R HSS
323
324 Thhe available sttrength, φPn an
nd Pn/Ω, of recctangular HSS--to-HSS momeent
325 co
onnections witthin the limits in Table K4.2 2A shall be takken as the loweest
326 vaalue obtained according
a to liimit states show
wn in Table KK4.2 and Chaptter
327 J.
328
329 User
U Note: Outtside the limits in Table K4.2
2A, the limit staates of Chapteer J
330 arre still applicaable and the applicable
a limiit states of Chhapter K are nnot
331 deefined.
332
333
TABLE
T K4
4.2
Availa
able Strengths of Rectangu
ular HSS-to-HSS M
Moment
Connectio
C ons
Connection Type Co
onnection Ava
ailable Flexura
al Strength
20 NE
Branch((es) under Out--of-Plane Bend
ding
T-
T and Cross-C Connections Lim
mit State: Chorrd Sidewall Lo
ocal Yielding
20 O
Mn − op = Fy*t ( B − t )( H b + 5t ) (K4-6)
φ = 1.00 (LR
RFD) Ω = 1.50
0 (ASD)
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
Lim
mit State: Chorrd distortional fa
ailure, for T-
conn
nections and un nbalanced crosss-connections
G R
(K4-7)
BL
φ = 0.95 (LRF
FD) Ω = 1.5
58 (ASD)
PU
2
M n − ip = 0.5Fy*t ( H b + 5t ) (K4-8)
φ = 1.00 (LR
RFD) Ω = 1.50
0 (ASD)
Pro = Pu for LRFD, and Pa for ASD; Mro = Mu for LRFD, and Ma for ASD.
20 NE
334
335
TABLE K4.2A
20 O
Limits of Applicability of Table K4.2
3, W
Branch angle: θ ≅ 90°
B t and H t ≤ 35
E
Chord wall slenderness:
Bb t b and H b t b ≤ 35
ST I
E
≤ 1.25
Fyb
G R
Ductility: Fy Fu and Fyb Fub ≤ 0.8 Note: ASTM A500 Gr. C is acceptable
336
PU
357
358 φ = 0.80 (LRFD) Ω = 1.88 (ASD)
359
360 where
361 Fnw = nominal stress of weld metal in accordance with Chapter J, ksi
362 (MPa)
363 Sip = effective elastic section modulus of welds for in-plane bending
364 (Table K5.1), in.3 (mm3)
365 Sop = effective elastic section modulus of welds for out-of-plane bend-
366 ing (Table K5.1), in.3 (mm3)
367 le = total effective weld length of groove and fillet welds to HSS for
368 weld strength calculations, in. (mm)
369 tw = smallest effective weld throat around the perimeter of branch or
370 plate, in. (mm)
371
TABLE K5.1
Effective Weld Properties for Connections to
20 NE
Rectangular HSS
Connection Type Weld Properties
20 O
Transverse Plate T- and Cross- Effective Weld Properties
Connections under Plate Axial Load
3, W
le = 2Be (K5-4)
E
ST I
U EV
le = + 2Be (K5-5)
sinθ
BL
2
tw Hb Hb
Sip = + tw Be (K5-6)
3 sin θ sin θ
PU
3
( t 3)( Bb − Be )
Sop = tw b Bb + w ( Bb2 ) − w
H t (K5-7)
sin θ 3 Bb
2 ( Hb − 1.2tb )
le = + 2 ( Bb − 1.2tb ) (K5-8)
sinθ
When θ ≥ 60°:
2 ( Hb − 1.2tb )
le = + Bb − 1.2tb (K5-9)
sinθ
20 NE
When 25% ≤ Ov < 50%:
2Ov Ov H bi Ov Hbi
le,i = 1 − +
50 100 sinθi 100 sin ( θi + θ j )
20 O
+Bei + Bej
3, W
(K5-10)
E
When 50% ≤ Ov < 80%:
O H O
le,i = 2 1 − v bi + v
ST I
Hbi
U EV
Note that the force arrows shown for 100 sinθi 100 sin ( θi + θ j )
overlapped K-connections may be +Bei + Bej
reversed; i and j control member (K5-11)
G R
identification.
When 80% ≤ Ov ≤ 100%:
AU IC
O H Ov
le,i = 2 1 − v bi
Hbi
+
100 sinθi 100 sin ( θi + θ j )
BL
+Bbi + Bej
(K5-12)
PU
2H bj
le, j = + 2B ej (K5-13)
sinθ j
20 NE
Round HSS
Connection Type
T Weld Prope erties
20 O
T-, Y-, an
nd Cross-Connnections under Efffective Weld P
Properties
Branch Axial Load
L
When 0.1≤ β ≤ 0.5, 60⁰ ≤ θ ≤ 90⁰, and 10
3, W
≤ D/t ≤ 50
0:
E
4
le = lw ≤ lw (K5-15)
ST I
2β ( D t )
U EV
the branch
h. This may be obtained from m
3D modelss of 9ntersectio
on cylinders, orr
from:
AU IC
1 + 1 sin θ
BL
lw = πDb (K5-16)
2
PU
390
1
2 CHAPTER L
3
4 DESIGN FOR SERVICEABILITY
5
6
7 This chapter addresses the evaluation of the structure and its components for the
8 serviceability limit states of deflections, drift, vibration, wind-induced motion,
9 thermal distortion, and connection slip.
10 The chapter is organized as follows:
11 L1. General Provisions
12 L2. Deflections
13 L3. Drift
14 L4. Vibration
15 L5. Wind-Induced Motion
20 NE
16 L6. Thermal Expansion and Contraction
17 L7. Connection Slip
18
20 O
19 L1. GENERAL PROVISIONS
20
21 Serviceability is a state in which the function of a building, its appearance,
3, W
22 maintainability, durability, and the comfort of its occupants are preserved
23 under typical usage. Limiting values of structural behavior for serviceability
E
28 User Note: Serviceability limit states, service loads, and appropriate load
29 combinations for serviceability considerations can be found in Minimum
AU IC
30 Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures
31 (ASCE/SEI 7) Appendix C and its commentary. The performance
BL
35
36 Reduced stiffness values used in the direct analysis method, described in
37 Chapter C, are not intended for use with the provisions of this chapter.
38
39 L2. DEFLECTIONS
40
41 Deflections in structural members and structural systems shall be limited so
42 as not to impair the serviceability of the structure.
43
44 L3. DRIFT
45
46 Drift shall be limited so as not to impair the serviceability of the structure.
47
48 L4. VIBRATION
49
50 The effect of vibration on the comfort of the occupants and the function of
51 the structure shall be considered. The sources of vibration to be considered
52 include occupant loading, vibrating machinery and others identified for the
53 structure.
54
20 NE
72 User Note: For the design of slip-critical connections, see Sections J3.8 and
73 J3.9. For more information on connection slip, refer to the RCSC Specifica-
74 tion for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts.
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU
1 CHAPTER M
20 NE
16
20 O
18 Fabrication documents shall indicate the work to be performed, and
19 include items required by the applicable building code and the following
3, W
20 as applicable:
E
21 (a) Locations of pretensioned bolts
ST I
23 (c) Weld access hole dimensions, surface profile and finish requirements
G R
47 2. Thermal Cutting
48
49 Thermally cut edges shall meet the requirements of Structural Welding
50 Code—Steel (AWS D1.1/D1.1M) clauses 5.14.5.2, 5.14.8.3 and 5.14.8.4,
51 hereafter referred to as AWS D1.1M/D1.1M, with the exception that
52 thermally cut free edges that will not be subject to fatigue shall be free of
53 round-bottom gouges greater than 3/16 in. (5 mm) deep and sharp V-shaped
54 notches. Gouges deeper than 3/16 in. (5 mm) and notches shall be removed by
55 grinding or repaired by welding.
56
57 Reentrant corners shall be formed with a curved transition. The radius need
58 not exceed that required to fit the connection. Discontinuous corners are
59 permitted where the material on both sides of the discontinuous reentrant
60 corner are connected to a mating piece to prevent deformation and associated
61 stress concentration at the corner.
62
63 User Note: Reentrant corners with a radius of 1/2 to 3/8 in. (13 to 10 mm) are
20 NE
64 acceptable for statically loaded work. Where pieces need to fit tightly together,
65 a discontinuous reentrant corner is acceptable if the pieces are connected close
66 to the corner on both sides of the discontinuous corner. Slots in HSS for
20 O
67 gussets may be made with semicircular ends or with curved corners. Square
68 ends are acceptable provided the edge of the gusset is welded to the HSS.
69
3, W
70 Weld access holes shall meet the geometrical requirements of Section J1.6.
71 Beam copes and welds access holes in shapes that are to be galvanized shall
E
72 be ground to bright metal. For shapes with a flange thickness not exceeding 2
ST I
73 in. (50 mm), the roughness of thermally cut surfaces of copes shall be no
U EV
74 greater than a surface roughness value of 2,000 μin. (50 μm) as defined in
75 Surface Texture, Surface Roughness, Waviness, and Lay (ASME B46.1),
G R
76 hereafter referred to as ASTM B46.1. For beam copes and weld access holes
77 in which the curved part of the access hole is thermally cut in ASTM
AU IC
78 A6/A6M hot-rolled shapes with a flange thickness exceeding 2 in. (50 mm)
79 and welded built-up shapes with material thickness greater than 2 in. (50
BL
80 mm), a preheat temperature of not less than 150°F (66°C) shall be applied
81 prior to thermal cutting. The thermally cut surface of access holes in ASTM
82 A6/A6M hot-rolled shapes with a flange thickness exceeding 2 in. (50 mm)
PU
83 and built-up shapes with a material thickness greater than 2 in. (50 mm) shall
84 be ground.
85
86 User Note: The AWS Surface Roughness Guide for Oxygen Cutting (AWS
87 C4.1-77) sample 2 may be used as a guide for evaluating the surface
88 roughness of copes in shapes with flanges not exceeding 2 in. (50 mm) thick.
89
90 3. Planing of Edges
91
92 Planing or finishing of sheared or thermally cut edges of plates or shapes is not
93 required unless specifically called for in the construction documents or
94 included in a stipulated edge preparation for welding.
95
96 4. Welded Construction
97
98 Welding shall be performed in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, except as
99 modified in Section J2.
100
101 User Note: Welder qualification tests on plate defined in AWS D1.1/D1.1M
102 clause 4 are appropriate for welds connecting plates, shapes or HSS to other
103 plates, shapes or rectangular HSS. The 6GR tubular welder qualification is
104 required for unbacked complete-joint-penetration groove welds of HSS T-, Y-
105 and K-connections.
106
107 5. Bolted Construction
108
109 Parts of bolted members shall be pinned or bolted and rigidly held together
110 during assembly. Use of a drift pin in bolt holes during assembly shall not
111 distort the metal or enlarge the holes. Poor matching of holes shall be cause
112 for rejection.
113
114 Bolt holes shall comply with the provisions of the RCSC Specification for
115 Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts Section 3.3, hereafter referred to
116 as the RCSC Specification. Water jet and thermally cut holes are permittedand
117 shall have a surface roughness profile not exceeding 1,000 μin. (25 μm), as
118 defined in ASME B46.1. Gouges shall not exceed a depth of 1/16 in. (2 mm).
119
20 NE
120 User Note: The AWS Surface Roughness Guide for Oxygen Cutting (AWS
121 C4.1-77) sample 3 may be used as a guide for evaluating the surface
122 roughness of thermally cut holes.
20 O
123
124 Fully inserted finger shims, with a total thickness of not more than 1/4 in. (6
125 mm) within a joint, are permitted without changing the strength (based upon
3, W
126 hole type) for the design of connections. The orientation of such shims is
127 independent of the direction of application of the load.
E
128
ST I
U EV
129 The use of high-strength bolts shall conform to the requirements of the RCSC
130 Specification, except as modified in Section J3.
131
G R
134 Compression joints that depend on contact bearing as part of the splice
135 strength shall have the bearing surfaces of individual fabricated pieces
BL
139
140 Dimensional tolerances shall be in accordance with Chapter 6 of the AISC
141 Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, hereafter referred
142 to as the Code of Standard Practice.
143
144 8. Finish of Column Bases
145
146 Column bases and base plates shall be finished in accordance with the
147 following requirements:
148
149 (a) Steel bearing plates 2 in. (50 mm) or less in thickness are permitted
150 without milling provided a smooth and notch-free contact bearing sur-
151 face is obtained. Steel bearing plates over 2 in. (50 mm) but not over 4
152 in. (100 mm) in thickness are permitted to be straightened by pressing or,
153 if presses are not available, by milling for bearing surfaces, except as
154 stipulated in subparagraphs (b) and (c) of this section, to obtain a smooth
155 and notch-free contact bearing surface. Steel bearing plates over 4 in.
156 (100 mm) in thickness shall be milled for bearing surfaces, except as
157 stipulated in subparagraphs (b) and (c) of this section.
158
159 (b) Bottom surfaces of bearing plates and column bases that are grouted to
160 ensure full bearing contact on foundations need not be milled.
161
162 (c) Top surfaces of bearing plates need not be milled when complete-joint-
163 penetration groove welds are provided between the column and the
164 bearing plate.
165
166 9. Holes for Anchor Rods
167
168 Holes for anchor rods are permitted to be mechanically or manually thermally
169 cut, providing the quality requirements in accordance with the provisions of
170 Section M2.2 are met.
171
172 10. Drain Holes
173
174 When water can collect inside HSS or box members, either during
175 construction or during service, the member shall be sealed, provided with a
20 NE
176 drain hole at the base, or otherwise protected from water infiltration.
177
178 11. Requirements for Galvanized Members
20 O
179
180 Members and parts to be galvanized shall be designed, detailed and
181 fabricated to provide for flow and drainage of pickling fluids and zinc and to
3, W
182 prevent pressure buildup in enclosed parts.
183
E
184 User Note: Drainage and vent holes should be detailed on fabrication
ST I
188 detailing of galvanized members. See Section M2.2 for requirements for
189 copes of members that are to be galvanized.
AU IC
190
191 M3. SHOP PAINTING
BL
192
193 1. General Requirements
194
PU
195 Shop painting and surface preparation shall be in accordance with the
196 provisions in Code of Standard Practice Chapter 6.
197
198 Shop paint is not required unless specified by the contract documents.
199
200 2. Inaccessible Surfaces
201
202 Except for contact surfaces, surfaces inaccessible after shop assembly shall be
203 cleaned and painted prior to assembly, if required by the construction
204 documents.
205
206 3. Contact Surfaces
207
208 Paint is permitted in bearing-type connections. For slip-critical connections,
209 the faying surface requirements shall be in accordance with RCSC
210 Specification Section 3.2.2.
211
212 4. Finished Surfaces
213
20 NE
231
232 2. Stability and Connections
233
20 O
234 The frame of structural steel buildings shall be carried up true and plumb
235 within the limits defined in Code of Standard Practice Chapter 7. As erection
236 progresses, the structure shall be secured to support dead, erection and other
3, W
237 loads anticipated to occur during the period of erection. Temporary bracing
238 shall be provided, in accordance with the requirements of the Code of
E
239 Standard Practice, wherever necessary to support the loads to which the
ST I
240 structure may be subjected, including equipment and the operation of same.
U EV
241 Such bracing shall be left in place as long as required for safety.
242
G R
243 3. Alignment
244
AU IC
248
249 4. Fit of Column Compression Joints and Base Plates
PU
250
251 Lack of contact bearing not exceeding a gap of 1/16 in. (2 mm), regardless of
252 the type of splice used (partial-joint-penetration groove welded or bolted), is
253 permitted. If the gap exceeds 1/16 in. (2 mm), but is equal to or less than 1/4
254 in. (6 mm), and if an engineering investigation shows that sufficient contact
255 area does not exist, the gap shall be packed out with nontapered steel shims.
256 Shims need not be other than mild steel, regardless of the grade of the main
257 material.
258
259 5. Field Welding
260
261 Surfaces in and adjacent to joints to be field welded shall be prepared as
262 necessary to assure weld quality. This preparation shall include surface
263 preparation necessary to correct for damage or contamination occurring
264 subsequent to fabrication.
265
266 6. Field Painting
267
268 Responsibility for touch-up painting, cleaning, and field painting shall be
269 allocated in accordance with accepted local practices, and this allocation shall
270 be set forth explicitly in the contract documents.
271
272
273
20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU
1
2
3 CHAPTER N
4 QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE
5
6 This chapter addresses minimum requirements for quality control, quality assurance
7 and nondestructive testing for structural steel systems and steel elements of
8 composite members for buildings and other structures.
9
10 User Note: This chapter does not address quality control or quality assurance for
11 the following items:
12 (a) Steel (open web) joists and girders
13 (b) Tanks or pressure vessels
14 (c) Cables, cold-formed steel products, or gage material
15 (d) Concrete reinforcing bars, concrete materials, or placement of concrete for
16 composite members
17 (e) Surface preparations or coatings
20 NE
18
19 The Chapter is organized as follows:
20
20 O
21 N1. General Provisions
22 N2. Fabricator and Erector Quality Control Program
3, W
23 N3. Fabricator and Erector Documents
24 N4. Inspection and Nondestructive Testing Personnel
E
25 N5. Minimum Requirements for Inspection of Structural Steel Buildings
ST I
56
57 The fabricator and erector shall establish, maintain and implement QC
58 procedures to ensure that their work is performed in accordance with this
59 Specification and the construction documents.
60
61 1. Material Identification
62
63 Material identification procedures shall comply with the requirements of
64 Section 6.1 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and
65 Bridges, hereafter referred to as the Code of Standard Practice, and shall
66 be monitored by the fabricator’s quality control inspector (QCI).
67
68 2. Fabricator Quality Control Procedures
69
70 The fabricator’s QC procedures shall address inspection of the following as
71 a minimum, as applicable:
72
20 NE
73 (a) Shop welding, high-strength bolting, and details in accordance with
74 Section N5
75 (b) Shop cut and finished surfaces in accordance with Section M2
20 O
76 (c) Shop heating for cambering, curving and straightening in accordance
77 with Section M2.1
78 (d) Tolerances for shop fabrication in accordance with Code of Standard
3, W
79 Practice Section 6.4
80
E
82
U EV
85
86 (a) Field welding, high-strength bolting, and details in accordance with
AU IC
87 Section N5
88 (b) Steel deck in accordance with SDI Standard for Quality Control and
89
BL
20 NE
129 (g) Manufacturer’s product data sheets or catalog data for welding
130 filler metals and fluxes to be used. The data sheets shall describe
131 the product, limitations of use, recommended or typical welding
20 O
132 parameters, and storage and exposure requirements, including
133 baking, if applicable.
134 (h) Welding procedure specifications (WPS).
3, W
135 (i) Procedure qualification records (PQR) for WPS that are not
136 prequalified in accordance with Structural Welding Code—Steel
E
139 applicable.
140 (j) Welding personnel performance qualification records (WPQR)
G R
20 NE
184 QA bolting inspection personnel shall be qualified on the basis of docu-
185 mented training and experience in structural bolting inspection.
186
20 O
187 QA coating inspection personnel shall be qualified to the satisfaction of the
188 QA agency’s written practice, receive documented training, have experi-
189 ence in coating inspection, and be qualified in accordance with one of the
3, W
190 following:
191
E
194 Certification
195 (c) On the basis of documented training and experience in coating
G R
201 with their employer’s written practice, which shall meet or exceed the
202 criteria of AWS D1.1/D1.1M clause 6.14.6, and,
PU
203
204 (a) Personnel Qualification and Certification Nondestructive Testing
205 (ASNT SNT-TC-1A), or
206 (b) Standard for the Qualification and Certification of Nondestructive
207 Testing Personnel (ANSI/ASNT CP-189).
208
209 N5. MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR INSPECTION OF
210 STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS
211
212 1. Quality Control
213
214 QC inspection tasks shall be performed by the fabricator’s or erector’s
215 QCI, as applicable, in accordance with Sections N5.4, N5.6 and N5.7.
216
217 Tasks in Tables N5.4-1 through N5.4-3 and Tables N5.6-1 through N5.6-3
218 listed for QC are those inspections performed by the QCI to ensure that the
219 work is performed in accordance with the construction documents.
220
221 For QC inspection, the applicable construction documents are the fabrica-
222 tion documents and the erection documents, and the applicable referenced
223 specifications, codes and standards.
224
225 User Note: The QCI need not refer to the design documents and project
226 specifications. The Code of Standard Practice Section 4.2.1(a) requires the
227 transfer of information from the contract documents (design documents
228 and project specification) into accurate and complete fabrication and
229 erection documents, allowing QC inspection to be based upon fabrication
230 and erection documents alone.
231
232 2. Quality Assurance
233
234 The QAI shall review the material test reports and certifications as listed in
235 Section N3.2 for compliance with the construction documents.
236
237 QA inspection tasks shall be performed by the QAI, in accordance with
20 NE
238 Sections N5.4, N5.6 and N5.7.
239
240 Tasks in Tables N5.4-1 through N5.4-3 and N5.6-1 through N5.6-3 listed
20 O
241 for QA are those inspections performed by the QAI to ensure that the work
242 is performed in accordance with the construction documents.
243
3, W
244 Concurrent with the submittal of such reports to the AHJ, EOR or owner,
245 the QA agency shall submit to the fabricator and erector:
E
246
ST I
255 upon inspection functions performed by QC, the approval of the EOR and
256 the AHJ is required.
PU
257
258 4. Inspection of Welding
259
260 Observation of welding operations and visual inspection of in-process and
261 completed welds shall be the primary method to confirm that the materials,
262 procedures and workmanship are in conformance with the construction
263 documents.
264
265 User Note: The technique, workmanship, appearance and quality of
266 welded construction are addressed in Section M2.4.
267
268 As a minimum, welding inspection tasks shall be in accordance with
269 Tables N5.4-1, N5.4-2 and N5.4-3. In these tables, the inspection tasks are
270 as follows:
271
272 (a) Observe (O): The inspector shall observe these items on a random
273 basis. Operations need not be delayed pending these inspections.
274 (b) Perform (P): These tasks shall be performed for each welded joint or
275 member.
276
TABLE N5.4-1
20 NE
Fit-up of CJP groove welds of HSS T-, Y- and K-connections
without backing (including joint geometry)
20 O
• Joint preparations
• Dimensions (alignment, root opening, root face, bevel) P O
3, W
• Cleanliness (condition of steel surfaces)
• Tacking (tack weld quality and location)
E
a
The fabricator or erector, as applicable, shall maintain a system by which a welder
BL
who has welded a joint or member can be identified. Stamps, if used on cyclically-
loaded members, require the approval of the engineer of record and shall be the
low-stress type.
PU
277
TABLE N5.4-2
20 NE
• Travel speed
• Selected welding materials
O O
• Shielding gas type/flow rate
20 O
• Preheat applied
• Interpass temperature maintained (min./max.)
• Proper position (F, V, H, OH)
3, W
Welding techniques
E
• Interpass and final cleaning O O
• Each pass within profile limitations
ST I
U EV
278
BL
279
280
281
PU
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
TABLE N5.4-3
20 NE
k-area[a] P P
Weld access holes in rolled heavy shapes and built-up heavy
b] P P
shapes[
20 O
Backing removed and weld tabs removed (if required) P P
P P
3, W
Repair activities
Document acceptance or rejection of welded joint or member
[c] P P
E
No prohibited welds have been added without the approval of
O O
ST I
the EOR
U EV
[a]
When welding of doubler plates, continuity plates or stiffeners has been performed in the
k-area, visually inspect the web k-area for cracks within 3 in. (75 mm) of the weld.
[b]
After rolled heavy shapes (see Section A3.1c) and built-up heavy shapes (see Section
G R
A3.1d) are welded, visually inspect the weld access hole for cracks.
[c]
Stamps, if used on cyclically-loaded members, require the approval of the engineer of
record and shall be the low-stress type.
AU IC
295
296
BL
318 User Note: For structures in risk category I, NDT of CJP groove welds is
319 not required. For all structures in all risk categories, NDT of CJP groove
320 welds in materials less than 5/16 in. (8 mm) thick is not required.
321
322 5c. Welded Joints Subjected to Fatigue
323
324 When required by Appendix 3, Table A-3.1, welded joints requiring weld
325 soundness to be established by radiographic or ultrasonic inspection shall
326 be tested by QA as prescribed. Reduction in the rate of UT is prohibited.
327
328 5d. Ultrasonic Testing Rejection Rate
329
330 The ultrasonic testing rejection rate shall be determined as the number of
331 welds containing defects divided by the number of welds completed.
332 Welds that contain acceptable discontinuities shall not be considered as
333 having defects when the rejection rate is determined. For evaluating the
334 rejection rate of continuous welds over 3 ft (1 m) in length where the
20 NE
335 effective throat is 1 in. (25 mm) or less, each 12 in. (300 mm) increment or
336 fraction thereof shall be considered as one weld. For evaluating the
337 rejection rate on continuous welds over 3 ft (1 m) in length where the
20 O
338 effective throat is greater than 1 in. (25 mm), each 6 in. (150 mm) of
339 length, or fraction thereof, shall be considered one weld.
340
3, W
341 5e. Reduction of Ultrasonic Testing Rate
342
E
343 For projects that contain 40 or fewer welds, there shall be no reduction in
ST I
345 approved by the EOR and the AHJ. Where the initial rate of UT is 100%,
346 the NDT rate for an individual welder or welding operator is permitted to
G R
347 be reduced to 25%, provided the rejection rate, the number of welds
348 containing unacceptable defects divided by the number of welds complet-
AU IC
349 ed, is demonstrated to be 5% or less of the welds tested for the welder or
350 welding operator. A sampling of at least 40 completed welds shall be made
351 for such reduced evaluation on each project.
BL
352
353 5f. Increase in Ultrasonic Testing Rate
PU
354
355 For structures in risk category II and higher (where the initial rate for UT is
356 10%) the NDT rate for an individual welder or welding operator shall be
357 increased to 100% should the rejection rate (the number of welds contain-
358 ing unacceptable defects divided by the number of welds completed)
359 exceed 5% of the welds tested for the welder or welding operator. A
360 sampling of at least 20 completed welds on each project shall be made
361 prior to implementing such an increase. If the rejection rate for the welder
362 or welding operator falls to 5% or less on the basis of at least 40 completed
363 welds, the rate of UT may be decreased to 10%.
364
365 5g. Documentation
366
367 All NDT performed shall be documented. For shop fabrication, the NDT
368 report shall identify the tested weld by piece mark and location in the
369 piece. For field work, the NDT report shall identify the tested weld by
370 location in the structure, piece mark, and location in the piece.
371
372 When a weld is rejected on the basis of NDT, the NDT record shall
373 indicate the location of the defect and the basis of rejection.
374
375 6. Inspection of High-Strength Bolting
376
377 Observation of bolting operations shall be the primary method used to
378 confirm that the materials, procedures and workmanship incorporated in
379 construction are in conformance with the construction documents and the
380 provisions of the RCSC Specification.
381
382 (a) For snug-tight joints, pre-installation verification testing as specified
383 in Table N5.6-1 and monitoring of the installation procedures as
384 specified in Table N5.6-2 are not applicable. The QCI and QAI need
385 not be present during the installation of fasteners in snug-tight
386 joints.
387
388 (b) For pretensioned joints and slip-critical joints, when the installer is
389 using the turn-of-nut or combined method with matchmarking tech-
390 niques, the direct-tension-indicator method, or the twist-off-type
20 NE
391 tension control bolt method, monitoring of bolt pretensioning proce-
392 dures shall be as specified in Table N5.6-2. The QCI and QAI need
393 not be present during the installation of fasteners when these meth-
20 O
394 ods are used by the installer.
395
396 (c) For pretensioned joints and slip-critical joints, when the installer is
3, W
397 using the turn-of-nut or combined method without matchmarking, or
398 the calibrated wrench method, monitoring of bolt pretensioning pro-
E
399 cedures shall be as specified in Table N5.6-2. The QCI and QAI
ST I
401 tion of fasteners when these methods are used by the installer.
402
G R
405 follows:
406
407 (a) Observe (O): The inspector shall observe these items on a random
BL
410 tion.
411
TABLE N5.6-1
Connecting elements, including the appropriate faying surface condition and hole
O O
preparation, if specified, meet applicable requirements
20 NE
Pre-installation verification testing by installation personnel observed and
P O
documented for fastener assemblies and methods used
20 O
Protected storage provided for bolts, nuts, washers and other fastener components O O
3, W
412
E
TABLE N5.6-2
ST I
U EV
Fastener assemblies placed in all holes and washers and nuts are positioned as
O O
required
BL
TABLE N5.6-3
20 NE
434 joint details at each connection.
435
436 The erector’s QCI shall inspect the erected steel frame to verify compli-
20 O
437 ance with the field installed details shown on the erection documents.
438
439 User Note: This includes such items as braces, stiffeners, member
3, W
440 locations, and correct application of field joint details at each connection.
441
E
442 The QAI shall be on the premises for inspection during the placement of
ST I
443 anchor rods and other embedments supporting structural steel for compli-
U EV
444 ance with the construction documents. As a minimum, the diameter, grade,
445 type and length of the anchor rod or embedded item, and the extent or
G R
446 depth of embedment into the concrete, shall be verified and documented
447 prior to placement of concrete.
AU IC
448
449 The QAI shall inspect the fabricated steel or erected steel frame, as
450 applicable, to verify compliance with the details shown on the construction
BL
451 documents.
452
PU
453 User Note: This includes such items as braces, stiffeners, member
454 locations and the correct application of joint details at each connection.
455
456 The acceptance or rejection of joint details and the correct application of
457 joint details shall be documented.
458
459 N6. APPROVED FABRICATORS AND ERECTORS
460
461 When the fabricator or erector has been approved by the AHJ to perform
462 all inspections without the involvement of a third-party, independent, QAI,
463 the fabricator or erector shall perform and document all of the QA
464 inspections required by this Chapter.
465 NDT of welds completed in an approved fabricator’s shop is permitted to
466 be performed by that fabricator when approved by the AHJ. When the
467 fabricator performs the NDT, the NDT reports prepared by the fabricator’s
468 NDT personnel shall be available for review by the QA agency.
469
470 At completion of fabrication, the approved fabricator shall submit a
471 certificate of compliance to the AHJ stating that the materials supplied and
472 work performed by the fabricator are in accordance with the construction
20 NE
490 Concurrent with the submittal of such reports to the AHJ, EOR or owner,
491 the QA agency shall submit to the fabricator and erector:
492
20 O
493 (a) Nonconformance reports
494 (b) Reports of repair, replacement or acceptance of nonconforming items
495
3, W
496 N8. MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR SHOP OR FIELD APPLIED
497 COATINGS
E
498
ST I
502 in accordance with the manufacturer’s product data sheet, unless there is
503 direction to the contrary in the contract documents.
AU IC
504
505 User Note: When there is a conflict between the manufacturer’s product
506 data sheet and the contract documents for the proper application of a
BL
509
510 Observation of the coating process prior to, during, and after the applica-
511 tion of the coating shall be the primary method to confirm that the coating
512 material, procedures, and workmanship are in conformance with the
513 manufacturer’s product data sheet unless there is direction to the contrary
514 in the contract documents.
1
2 APPENDIX 1
3
4 DESIGN BY ADVANCED ANALYSIS
5
6 This Appendix permits the use of advanced methods of structural analysis to
7 directly model system and member imperfections, and/or allow for the
8 redistribution of member and connection forces and moments as a result of localized
9 yielding.
10
11 The appendix is organized as follows:
12
13 1.1 General Requirements
14 1.2 Design by Elastic Analysis
15 1.3 Design by Inelastic Analysis
16
20 NE
17 1.1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
18
19 The analysis methods permitted in this Appendix shall ensure that
20 O
20 equilibrium and compatibility are satisfied for the structure in its deformed
21 shape, including all flexural, shear, axial, and torsional deformations, and all
3, W
22 other component and connection deformations that contribute to the
23 displacements of the structure.
E
24
ST I
26 with Section B3.1, using load and resistance factor design (LRFD).
27
28 1.2. DESIGN BY ELASTIC ANALYSIS
G R
29
30 1. General Stability Requirements
AU IC
31
32 Design by a second-order elastic analysis that includes the direct modeling of
BL
55
56 The analysis of the structure shall also conform to the following require-
57 ments:
58
59 (a) Torsional member deformations shall be considered in the analysis.
60
61 (b) The analysis shall consider geometric nonlinearities, including P-Δ, P-
62 δ, and twisting effects as applicable to the structure. The use of the
63 approximate procedures appearing in Appendix 8 is not permitted.
64
65 User Note: A rigorous second-order analysis of the structure is an
66 important requirement for this method of design. Many analysis rou-
67 tines common in design offices are based on a more traditional sec-
68 ond-order analysis approach that includes only P-Δ and P-δ effects
69 without consideration of additional second-order effects related to
70 member twist, which can be significant for some members with un-
71 braced lengths near or exceeding Lr . The type of second-order analy-
20 NE
72 sis defined herein also includes the beneficial effects of additional
73 member torsional strength and stiffness due to warping restraint,
74 which can be conservatively neglected. Refer to the Commentary for
20 O
75 additional information and guidance.
76
3, W
77 (c) In all cases, the analysis shall directly model the effects of initial
78 imperfections due to both points of intersection of members displaced
E
79 from their nominal locations (system imperfections), and initial out-
80 of-straightness or offsets of members along their length (member im-
ST I
U EV
84 fect for the load combination being considered. The use of notional
85 loads to represent either type of imperfection is not permitted.
AU IC
86
87 User Note: Initial displacements similar in configuration to both dis-
BL
20 NE
128
129 The nominal compressive strength of members, Pn, may be taken as the
130 cross-section compressive strength, FyAg, or as FyAe for members with
20 O
131 slender elements, where Ae is defined in Section E7.
132
133 1.3. DESIGN BY INELASTIC ANALYSIS
3, W
134
135 User Note: Design by the provisions of this section is independent of the
E
137
U EV
140 The design strength of the structural system and its members and connections
141 shall equal or exceed the required strength as determined by the inelastic
AU IC
142 analysis. The provisions of Section 1.3 do not apply to seismic design.
143
BL
144 The inelastic analysis shall take into account: (a) flexural, shear, axial, and
145 torsional member deformations, and all other component and connection
146 deformations that contribute to the displacements of the structure; (b) second-
PU
147 order effects (including P-Δ, P-δ, and twisting effects); (c) geometric
148 imperfections; (d) stiffness reductions due to inelasticity, including partial
149 yielding of the cross section that may be accentuated by the presence of
150 residual stresses; and (e) uncertainty in system, member, and connection
151 strength and stiffness.
152
153 Strength limit states detected by an inelastic analysis that incorporates all of
154 the preceding requirements in this Section are not subject to the correspond-
155 ing provisions of this Specification when a comparable or higher level of
156 reliability is provided by the analysis. Strength limit states not detected by
157 the inelastic analysis shall be evaluated using the corresponding provisions of
158 Chapters D through K.
159
160 Connections shall meet the requirements of Section B3.4.
161
162 Members and connections subject to inelastic deformations shall be shown to
163 have ductility consistent with the intended behavior of the structural system.
164 Force redistribution due to rupture of a member or connection is not
165 permitted.
166
167 Any method that uses inelastic analysis to proportion members and
168 connections to satisfy these general requirements is permitted. A design
169 method based on inelastic analysis that meets the preceding strength
170 requirements, the ductility requirements of Section 1.3.2, and the analysis
171 requirements of Section 1.3.3 satisfies these general requirements.
20 NE
181 The specified minimum yield stress, Fy, of members subject to plastic
182 hinging shall not exceed 65 ksi (450 MPa).
20 O
183 2b. Cross Section
184
3, W
185 The cross section of members at plastic hinge locations shall be doubly
186 symmetric with width-to-thickness ratios of their compression elements not
E
187 exceeding λpd, where λpd is equal to λp from Table B4.1b, except as modified
ST I
U EV
188 below:
189
190 (a) For the width-to-thickness ratio, h tw , of webs of I-shaped members,
G R
191 rectangular HSS, and box sections subject to combined flexure and
192 compression
AU IC
193
194 (1) When Pu φc Py ≤ 0.125
BL
E 2.75Pu
195 λ pd = 3.76 1 −
φc Py
PU
Fy
196 (A-1-1)
197
198 (2) When Pu φc Py > 0.125
E Pu E
199 λ pd = 1.12 2.33 − ≥ 1.49 (A-1-2)
Fy φc Py Fy
200 where
201 Pu = required axial strength in compression, using LRFD load
202 combinations, kips (N)
203 Py = Fy Ag = axial yield strength, kips (N)
204 h = as defined in Section B4.1, in. (mm)
205 tw = web thickness, in. (mm)
206 φc = resistance factor for compression = 0.90
207
208 (b) For the width-to-thickness ratio, b t , of flanges of rectangular HSS
209 and box sections, and for flange cover plates between lines of fasteners
210 or welds
211
212 λ pd = 0.94 E Fy (A-1-3)
213 where
214 b = as defined in Section B4.1, in. (mm)
215 t = as defined in Section B4.1, in. (mm)
216
217 (c) For the diameter-to-thickness ratio, D t , of round HSS in flexure
218
219 λ pd = 0.045 E Fy (A-1-4)
220
221 where
222 D = outside diameter of round HSS, in. (mm)
20 NE
226 unbraced length, Lb, shall not exceed Lpd, determined as follows. For
227 members subject to flexure only, or to flexure and axial tension, Lb shall be
228 taken as the length between points braced against lateral displacement of the
20 O
229 compression flange, or between points braced to prevent twist of the cross
230 section. For members subject to flexure and axial compression, Lb shall be
3, W
231 taken as the length between points braced against both lateral displacement in
232 the minor axis direction and twist of the cross section.
E
233
ST I
234 (a) For I-shaped members bent about their major axis:
U EV
M′ E
235 L pd = 0.12 − 0.076 1 ry (A-1-5)
M 2 Fy
G R
236 where
237 = radius of gyration about minor axis, in. (mm)
AU IC
ry
238
239 (1) When the magnitude of the bending moment at any location within
BL
242 M 1′ M 2 = +1 (A-1-6a)
243
244 Otherwise:
245
246 (2) When M mid ≤ ( M 1 + M 2 ) 2
247
248 M 1′ = M 1 (A-1-6b)
249
250 (3) When M mid > ( M 1 + M 2 ) 2
251
252 M 1′ = ( 2M mid – M 2 )< M 2 (A-1-6c)
253 where
254 M1 = smaller moment at end of unbraced length, kip-in. (N-mm)
255 M2 = larger moment at end of unbraced length, kip-in. (N-mm)
256 (shall be taken as positive in all cases)
257 M mid = moment at middle of unbraced length, kip-in. (N-mm)
20 NE
272 minor axes shall not exceed 4.71rx E Fy and 4.71ry E Fy , respectively.
273
20 O
274 There is no Lpd limit for member segments containing plastic hinges in the
275 following cases:
3, W
276
277 (a) Members with round or square cross sections subject only to flexure or
E
278 to combined flexure and tension
279 (b) Members subject only to flexure about their minor axis or combined
ST I
U EV
288 The structural analysis shall satisfy the general requirements of Section 1.3.1.
289 These requirements are permitted to be satisfied by a second-order inelastic
290 analysis meeting the requirements of this Section.
291
292 Exception: For continuous beams not subject to axial compression, a first-
293 order inelastic or plastic analysis is permitted and the requirements of
294 Sections 1.3.3b and 1.3.3c are waived.
295
296 User Note: Refer to the Commentary for guidance in conducting a
297 traditional plastic analysis and design in conformance with these provisions.
306
307 The plastic strength of the member cross section shall be represented in the
308 analysis either by an elastic-perfectly-plastic yield criterion expressed in
309 terms of the axial force, major axis bending moment, and minor axis bending
310 moment, or by explicit modeling of the material stress-strain response as
311 elastic-perfectly-plastic.
20 NE
321 3c. Residual Stress and Partial Yielding Effects
322
323 The analysis shall include the influence of residual stresses and partial
20 O
324 yielding. This shall be done by explicitly modeling these effects in the
325 analysis or by reducing the stiffness of all structural components as specified
3, W
326 in Section C2.3.
327
E
328 If the provisions of Section C2.3 are used, then:
ST I
329
U EV
330 (a) The 0.9 stiffness reduction factor specified in Section 1.3.3a shall be
331 replaced by the reduction of the elastic modulus, E, by 0.8 as specified in
332 Section C2.3, and
G R
333
334 (b) the elastic-perfectly-plastic yield criterion, expressed in terms of the axial
AU IC
335 force, major axis bending moment, and minor axis bending moment,
336 shall satisfy the cross-section strength limit defined by Equations H1-1a
BL
20 NE
17 2.1. SIMPLIFIED DESIGN FOR PONDING
18
19 The roof system shall be considered stable for ponding and no further
20 O
20 investigation is needed if both of the following two conditions are met:
21 Formatted: Centered
22 C p + 0.9Cs ≤ 0.25 (A-2-1)
3, W
Formatted: Centered, Tab stops: 2", Left
23 Formatted: Centered
E
24 ( )
I d ≥ 25 S 4 10−6 (A-2-2)
ST I
U EV
25
26 I d ≥ 3940 S 4 (A-2-2M)
27 where
G R
32 Ls L4p
28 Cp = (A-2-3)
107 I p
AU IC
29
BL
504 Ls L4p
30 Cp = (A-2-3M)
Ip
PU
32SL4s
31 Cs = (A-2-4)
10 7 Is
32
504SL4s
33 Cs = (A-2-4M)
Is
34
35 I d = moment of inertia of the steel deck supported on secondary
36 members, in.4 per ft (mm4 per m)
4 4
37 I p = moment of inertia of primary members, in. (mm )
4 4
38 I s = moment of inertia of secondary members, in. (mm )
39 Lp = length of primary members, ft (m)
40 Ls = length of secondary members, ft (m)
41 S = spacing of secondary members, ft (m)
42
43 For trusses and steel joists, the calculation of the moments of inertia, Ip and
44 Is, shall include the effects of web member strain when used in the above
45 equation.
46
47 User Note: When the moment of inertia is calculated using only the truss
48 or joist chord areas, the reduction in the moment of inertia due to web
49 member strain can typically be taken as 15%.
50
51 A steel deck shall be considered a secondary member when it is directly
52 supported by the primary members.
53
54 2.2. IMPROVED DESIGN FOR PONDING
55
56 It is permitted to use the provisions in this section when a more accurate
57 evaluation of framing stiffness is needed than that given by Equations A-2-
58 1 and A-2-2.
59
60 Define the stress indexes
61
0.8 F y − f o
20 NE
Up = for the primary member (A-2-5)
fo p
62
0.8 F y − f o
( A-2-6 )
20 O
Us = for the secondary member
fo s
3, W
63
64 where
65 Fy = specified minimum yield stress, ksi (MPa)
E
20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
92
93
BL
96
97 Evaluate the stability against ponding of a roof consisting of a metal roof
98 deck of relatively slender depth-to-span ratio, spanning between beams
99 supported directly on columns, as follows. Use Figure A-2.1 or A-2.2,
100 using as Cs the flexibility coefficient for a one-foot (one-meter) width of
101 the roof deck (S = 1.0).
102
20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
103
104 Fig.A-2.2. Limiting flexibility coefficient for the secondary systems.
BL
105
PU
1 APPENDIX 3
2
3 FATIGUE
4
5
6 This appendix applies to members and connections subject to high-cycle loading
7 within the elastic range of stresses of frequency and magnitude sufficient to initiate
8 cracking and progressive failure.
9
10 User Note: See AISC Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings for
11 structures subject to seismic loads.
12
13 The appendix is organized as follows:
14
15 3.1. General Provisions
16 3.2. Calculation of Maximum Stresses and Stress Ranges
17 3.3. Plain Material and Welded Joints
20 NE
18 3.4. Bolts and Threaded Parts
19 3.5. Fabrication and Erection Requirements for Fatigue
20 3.6. Nondestructive Examination Requirements for Fatigue
20 O
21
22 3.1. GENERAL PROVISIONS
3, W
23
24 The fatigue resistance of members consisting of shapes or plate shall be
E
25 determined when the number of cycles of application of live load exceeds
ST I
31 The engineer of record shall provide either complete details including weld
32 sizes or shall specify the planned cycle life and the maximum range of
BL
35 basis of the applied cyclic load spectrum. The maximum permitted stress
36 due to peak cyclic loads shall be 0.66Fy. In the case of a stress reversal, the
37 stress range shall be computed as the numerical sum of maximum repeated
38 tensile and compressive stresses or the numerical sum of maximum
39 shearing stresses of opposite direction at the point of probable crack
40 initiation.
41 The cyclic load resistance determined by the provisions of this Appendix is
42 applicable to structures with suitable corrosion protection or subject only to
43 mildly corrosive atmospheres, such as normal atmospheric conditions.
44
45 The cyclic load resistance determined by the provisions of this Appendix is
46 applicable only to structures subject to temperatures not exceeding 300°F
47 (150°C).
48
49 3.2. CALCULATION OF MAXIMUM STRESSES AND STRESS
50 RANGES
51
52 Calculated stresses shall be based upon elastic analysis. Stresses shall not
53 be amplified by stress concentration factors for geometrical discontinuities.
54
55 For bolts and threaded rods subject to axial tension, the calculated stresses
56 shall include the effects of prying action, if any. In the case of axial stress
57 combined with bending, the maximum stresses of each kind shall be those
58 determined for concurrent arrangements of the applied load.
59
60 For members having symmetric cross sections, the fasteners and welds
61 shall be arranged symmetrically about the axis of the member, or the total
62 stresses including those due to eccentricity shall be included in the
63 calculation of the stress range.
64
65 For axially loaded angle members where the center of gravity of the
66 connecting welds lies between the line of the center of gravity of the angle
67 cross section and the center of the connected leg, the effects of eccentricity
68 shall be ignored. If the center of gravity of the connecting welds lies
69 outside this zone, the total stresses, including those due to joint eccentrici-
70 ty, shall be included in the calculation of stress range.
20 NE
71
72 3.3. PLAIN MATERIAL AND WELDED JOINTS
73
20 O
74 In plain material and welded joints, the range of stress due to the applied
75 cyclic loads shall not exceed the allowable stress range computed as
76 follows.
3, W
77
E
78 (a) For stress categories A, B, B′, C, D, E and E,′ the allowable stress
79 range, FSR, shall be determined by Equation A-3-1 or A-3-1M, as
ST I
U EV
80 follows:
81
0.333
Cf
G R
0.333
Cf
83 FSR = 6 900 ≥ FTH (A-3-1M)
nSR
BL
84 where
85 Cf = constant from Table A-3.1 for the fatigue category
PU
0.167
1.5
95 FSR = 100 ≥ 8 ksi (A-3-2)
nSR
96
0.167
1.5
97 FSR = 690 ≥ 55 MPa (A-3-2M)
nSR
98
99 (c) For tension-loaded plate elements connected at their end by cruciform,
100 T or corner details with partial-joint-penetration (PJP) groove welds
101 transverse to the direction of stress, with or without reinforcing or con-
102 touring fillet welds, or if joined with only fillet welds, the allowable
103 stress range on the cross section of the tension-loaded plate element
104 shall be determined as the lesser of the following:
105
106 (1) Based upon crack initiation from the toe of the weld on the ten-
107 sion-loaded plate element (i.e., when RPJP = 1.0), the allowable
20 NE
108 stress range, FSR, shall be determined by Equation A-3-1 or A-3-
109 1M for stress category C.
110
20 O
111 (2) Based upon crack initiation from the root of the weld, the allowa-
112 ble stress range, FSR, on the tension loaded plate element using
3, W
113 transverse PJP groove welds, with or without reinforcing or con-
114 touring fillet welds, the allowable stress range on the cross section
E
115 at the root of the weld shall be determined by Equation A-3-3 or
ST I
117
0.333
4.4
118 FSR = 1, 000 RPJP (A-3-3)
G R
nSR
0.333
4.4
AU IC
120
121 where
122 RPJP, the reduction factor for reinforced or nonreinforced
PU
136 If RPJP = 1.0, the stress range will be limited by the weld toe and
137 category C will control.
138
139 (3) Based upon crack initiation from the roots of a pair of transverse
140 fillet welds on opposite sides of the tension loaded plate element,
141 the allowable stress range, FSR, on the cross section at the root of
142 the welds shall be determined by Equation A-3-5 or A-3-5M, for
143 stress category C′′ as follows:
144
0.333
4.4
145 FSR = 1, 000 RFIL (A-3-5)
nSR
146
0.333
4.4
147 FSR = 6900 RFIL (A-3-5M)
nSR
148 where
20 NE
149 RFIL = reduction factor for joints using a pair of transverse fil-
150 let welds only
151
20 O
0.06 + 0.72 ( w / t p )
152 = ≤ 1.0 (A-3-6)
t 0.167
3, W p
0.103 + 1.24 ( w / t p )
153 = ≤ 1.0 (A-3-6M)
E
t 0.167
p
ST I
154
U EV
155 If RFIL = 1.0, the stress range will be limited by the weld toe and
156 category C will control.
157
G R
158 User Note: Stress categories C′ and C′′ are cases where the fatigue crack
159 initiates in the root of the weld. These cases do not have a fatigue threshold
AU IC
160 and cannot be designed for an infinite life. Infinite life can be approximated
161 by use of a very high cycle life such as 2 × 108. Alternatively, if the size of
BL
162 the weld is increased such that RFIL or RPJP is equal to 1.0, then the base metal
163 controls, resulting in stress category C, where there is a fatigue threshold and
PU
2
π 0.9743
184 At = db − (A-3-7)
4 n
185
π
186 At = ( d b − 0.9382 p )2 (A-3-7M)
4
187
188 where
189 db = nominal diameter (body or shank diameter), in. (mm)
190 n = threads per in. (per mm)
191 p = pitch, in. per thread (mm per thread)
192
193 For joints in which the material within the grip is not limited to steel or joints
194 that are not tensioned to the requirements of Table J3.1 or J3.1M, all axial
195 load and moment applied to the joint plus effects of any prying action shall
196 be assumed to be carried exclusively by the bolts or rods.
197
198 For joints in which the material within the grip is limited to steel and which
20 NE
199 are pretensioned to the requirements of Table J3.1 or J3.1M, an analysis of
200 the relative stiffness of the connected parts and bolts is permitted to be used
201 to determine the tensile stress range in the pretensioned bolts due to the total
20 O
202 applied cyclic load and moment, plus effects of any prying action.
203 Alternatively, the stress range in the bolts shall be assumed to be equal to the
3, W
204 stress on the net tensile area due to 20% of the absolute value of the applied
205 cyclic axial load and moment from dead, live and other loads.
E
206
ST I
210 (a) The Engineer’s approval for thermally cut holes is not required for
211 cyclically loaded slip critical joints.
212 (b) Both pretensioned and not pretensioned bolted connections are permitted.
AU IC
236 Reentrant corners at cuts, copes and weld access holes shall form a radius not
237 less than the prescribed radius in Table A-3.1.
238
239 For transverse butt joints in regions of tensile stress, weld tabs shall be used
240 to provide for cascading the weld termination outside the finished joint. End
241 dams shall not be used. Weld tabs shall be removed and the end of the weld
242 finished flush with the edge of the member.
243
244 Fillet welds subject to cyclic loading normal to the outstanding legs of angles
245 or on the outer edges of end plates shall have end returns around the corner
246 for a distance not less than two times the weld size; the end return distance
247 shall not exceed four times the weld size.
248
249 3.6. NONDESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION REQUIREMENTS FOR
250 FATIGUE
251
252 In the case of CJP groove welds, the maximum allowable stress range
20 NE
253 calculated by Equation A-3-1 or A-3-1M applies only to welds that have
254 been ultrasonically or radiographically tested and meet the acceptance
255 requirements of Structural Welding Code—Steel (AWS D1.1/D1.1M) clause
20 O
256 6.12.2 or clause 6.13.2.
257
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU
20 NE
1.2 Noncoated weathering
steel base metal with as- Away from all
rolled or cleaned surfaces; B 12 16 welds or
20 O
flame-cut edges with (110) structural
surface roughness value of connections
3, W
1,000 μin. (25 μm) or less,
but without reentrant
E
corners
ST I
predrilling, subpunching
and reaming water-jet
cutting or thermally cutting
PU
20 NE
side of the
hole
Holes containing C 4.4 10
20 O
pretensioned bolts (69)
D 2.2 7
3, W
Open holes without bolts
(48)
SECTION 2–CONNECTED MATERIAL IN MECHANICALLY FASTENED JOINTS
E
B 12 16 Through gross
U EV
permitted by this
specification.
BL
20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
266
PU
Remove the
note!
20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
267
268
G R
269
AU IC
BL
PU
20 NE
groove welds, back gouged
and welded from second side,
or by continuous fillet welds
20 O
3.2 Base metal and weld metal From surface
in members without or internal
3, W
attachments built up of plates B′ 6.1 12 discontinuities
or shapes, connected by (83) in weld
E
continuous longitudinal CJP
groove welds with left-in-place
ST I
U EV
20 NE
partial length welded toe of end
coverplates or other weld or in
attachments wider than the flange at
20 O
flange with welds across the termination of
ends longitudinal
weld or in
3, W
t f ≤ 0.8 in. (20 mm) E 1.1 4.5 edge of flange
(31)
E
ST I
E′ 0.39 2.6
(18)
G R
20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU
20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
273
AU IC
BL
PU
20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
274
275
BL
276
PU
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
20 NE
stress and inspected in
accordance with Section 3.6
5.2 Weld metal and base
20 O
metal in or adjacent to CJP From internal
groove welded splices with discontinuities
3, W
welds ground essentially in metal or
parallel to the direction of along the
stress at transitions in fusion
E
thickness or width made on boundary or at
ST I
6.1 12
Fy ≥ 90 ksi (620 MPa) B′
(83)
5.3 Base metal and weld
PU
20 NE
Tack welds outside the E 1.1 4.5 (31)
groove and not closer than
1/2 in. (13 mm) to the edge
20 O
of base metal
5.6 Base metal and weld
3, W
metal at transverse end
connections of tension-
E
loaded plate elements using
PJP groove welds in butt, T-
ST I
or corner-joints, with
U EV
reinforcing or contouring
fillets; FSR shall be the
G R
289
290
291
20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
295
PU
296
297
Noote
revvised
figgure ©
298
20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
299
300
BL
301
PU
302
303
304
305
306
307
20 NE
(cont’d)
20 O
metal at transverse end
connections of tension-loaded
plate elements using a pair of
3, W
fillet welds on opposite sides
of the plate; FSR shall be the
E
stress range
base metal
BL
A-3-5M
and through
weld
20 NE
2 in. ≤ R < 6 in. D 2.2 7
(50 mm ≤ R < 150 mm) (48)
20 O
3, W
R < 2 in. (50 mm) E 1.1 4.5
(31)
E
ST I
310
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU
20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU
313
314
315
316
20 NE
when the detail embodies a
transition radius, R, with the
weld termination ground
20 O
smooth and inspected in
accordance with Section 3.6
3, W
E
(a) When weld reinforcement Near point of
is removed
ST I
tangency of
U EV
radius or in
B 12 16 the weld or at
R ≥ 24 in. (600 mm)
(110) fusion
G R
boundary or
member or
AU IC
(48)
20 NE
1.1 In weld
R ≤ 2 in. (50 mm) E 4.5 termination in
small radius
20 O
(31)
(b) When reinforcement is not
3, W
removed
thinner
material
G R
317
318
AU IC
BL
PU
20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
20 NE
direction of stress when the the base
detail embodies a transition metal
radius, R, with weld
20 O
termination ground smooth
1.1 4.5
(31)
G R
20 O
2 in. (50 mm) ≤ a ≤ 4 in. (100
mm) and a > 12b
E 1.1 4.5
3, W
a> 4 in. (100 mm) and b≤ 0.8
(31)
in. (20 mm)
E
ST I
U EV
0.39 2.6
a > 4 in. (100 mm) E′
and b > 0.8 in. (20 mm) (18)
G R
AU IC
E 1.1 4.5
R ≤ 2 in. (50 mm)
(31)
[a] “Attachment,” as used herein, is defined as any steel detail welded to a member that causes a deviation
in the stress flow in the member and, thus, reduces the fatigue resistance. The reduction is due to the
presence of the attachment, not due to the loading on the attachment.
336
337
338
339
20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU
342
343
344
345
346
SECTION 8–MISCELLANEOUS
20 NE
8.1 Base metal at steel headed C 4.4 10 At toe of weld
stud anchors attached by fillet (69) in base metal
20 O
weld or automatic stud welding
3, W
8.2 Shear on throat of any fillet F See Eq. See Eq. Initiating at the
weld, continuous or A-3-2 or A-3-2 or root of the
E
intermittent, longitudinal or A-3-2M A-3-2M fillet weld,
transverse extending into
ST I
the weld
U EV
weld,
extending into
BL
the base
metal
PU
8.4 Shear on plug or slot F See Eq. See Eq. Initiating in the
welds A-3-2 or A-3-2 or weld at the
A-3-2M A-3-2M faying surface,
extending into
the weld
356
20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU
359
360
361
1
2 APPENDIX 4
3
20 NE
16
17 The appendix is organized as follows:
18
20 O
19 4.1. General Provisions
20 4.2. Structural Design for Fire Conditions by Analysis
3, W
21 4.3. Design by Qualification Testing
E
22 4.1. GENERAL PROVISIONS
23
ST I
U EV
27
28 1. Performance Objective
AU IC
29
30 Structural components, members, and building frame systems shall be
BL
34
35 Deformation criteria shall be applied where the means of providing
36 structural fire resistance, or the design criteria for fire barriers, requires
37 evaluation of the deformation of the load-carrying structure.
38
39 Within the compartment of fire origin, forces and deformations from the
40 design-basis fire shall not cause a breach of horizontal or vertical com-
41 partmentation.
42
43 2. Design by Engineering Analysis
44
45 The analysis methods in Section 4.2 are permitted to be used to document
46 the anticipated performance of steel framing when subjected to design-
47 basis fire scenarios. Methods in Section 4.2 provide evidence of compli-
48 ance with performance objectives established in Section 4.1.1.
49
50 The analysis methods in Section 4.2 are permitted to be used to demon-
51 strate an equivalency for an alternative material or method, as permitted by
52 the applicable building code (ABC).
53
54 Structural design for fire conditions using Appendix 4.2 shall be performed
55 using the load and resistance factor design method in accordance with the
56 provisions of Section B3.1 (LRFD).
57
58 3. Design by Qualification Testing
59
60 The qualification testing methods in Section 4.3 are permitted to be used to
61 document the fire resistance of steel framing subject to the standardized
62 fire testing protocols required by the ABC.
63 4. Load Combinations and Required Strength
64
65 In the absence of ABC provisions for design under fire exposures, the
66 required strength of the structure and its elements shall be determined from
67 the gravity load combination as follows:
68
69 (0.9 or 1.2) D + AT + 0.5L + 0.2S (A-4-1)
20 NE
70
71 where
72 AT = nominal forces and deformations due to the design-basis fire de-
20 O
73 fined in Section 4.2.1
74 D = nominal dead load
3, W
75 L = nominal occupancy live load
76 S = nominal snow load
E
77
ST I
78
U EV
79 User Note: ASCE/SEI 7 Section 2.5 contains this load combination for
80 extraordinary events, which includes fire. Live load reduction is permitted.
G R
85 this section.
86
PU
87 1. Design-Basis Fire
88
89 A design-basis fire shall be identified to describe the heating conditions for
90 the structure. These heating conditions shall relate to the fuel commodities
91 and compartment characteristics present in the assumed fire area. The fuel
92 load density based on the occupancy of the space shall be considered when
93 determining the total fuel load. Heating conditions shall be specified either
94 in terms of a heat flux or temperature of the upper gas layer created by the
95 fire. The variation of the heating conditions with time shall be determined
96 for the duration of the fire.
97
98 The analysis methods in Section 4.2 shall be used in accordance with the
99 provisions for alternative materials, designs, and methods as permitted by
100 the ABC. When the analysis methods in Section 4.2 are used to demon-
101 strate equivalency to hourly ratings based on qualification testing in
102 Section 4.3, the design-basis fire shall be permitted to be determined in
103 accordance with ASTM E119.
104
105 1a. Localized Fire
106
107 Where the heat release rate from the fire is insufficient to cause flashover,
108 a localized fire exposure shall be assumed. In such cases, the fuel compo-
109 sition, arrangement of the fuel array, and floor area occupied by the fuel
110 shall be used to determine the radiant heat flux from the flame and smoke
111 plume to the structure.
112
113 1b. Post-Flashover Compartment Fires
114
115 Where the heat release rate from the fire is sufficient to cause flashover, a
116 post-flashover compartment fire shall be assumed. The determination of
117 the temperature versus time profile resulting from the fire shall include fuel
118 load, ventilation characteristics of the space (natural and mechanical),
119 compartment dimensions, and thermal characteristics of the compartment
120 boundary.
121
122 The fire duration in a particular area shall be determined from the total
123 combustible mass, or fuel load in the space. In the case of either a
20 NE
124 localized fire or a post-flashover compartment fire, the fire duration shall
125 be determined as the total combustible mass divided by the mass loss rate.
126
20 O
127 1c. Exterior Fires
128
129 The exposure effects of the exterior structure to flames projecting from
3, W
130 windows or other wall openings as a result of a post-flashover compart-
131 ment fire shall be addressed along with the radiation from the interior fire
E
132 through the opening. The shape and length of the flame projection shall be
ST I
133 used along with the distance between the flame and the exterior steelwork
U EV
134 to determine the heat flux to the steel. The method identified in Section
135 4.2.1b shall be used for describing the characteristics of the interior
G R
143 Where automatic smoke and heat vents are installed in nonsprinklered
144 spaces, the resulting smoke temperature shall be determined from calcula-
145 tion.
146
147 2. Temperatures in Structural Systems under Fire Conditions
148
149 Temperatures within structural members, components and frames due to
150 the heating conditions posed by the design-basis fire shall be determined
151 by a heat transfer analysis.
152
153 3. Material Properties at Elevated Temperatures
154
155 The effects of elevated temperatures on the physical and mechanical
156 properties of materials shall be considered in the analysis and design of
157 structural members, components and systems. Any rational method that
158 establishes material properties at elevated temperatures that is based on test
159 data is permitted, including the methods defined in Sections 4.2.3a, and
160 4.2.3b.
161
162
163 3a. Thermal Elongation
164
165 The coefficients of thermal expansion shall be taken as follows:
166 (a) For structural and reinforcing steels: For calculations at temperatures
167 above 150°F (66°C), the coefficient of thermal expansion is 7.8 × 10-
6
168 /°F (1.4 × 10-5/oC).
169
170 (b) For normal weight concrete: For calculations at temperatures above
171 150°F (66°C), the coefficient of thermal expansion is 10 × 10−6/°F (1.8
172 × 10−5/oC).
173
174 (c) For lightweight concrete: For calculations at temperatures above
175 150°F (66°C), the coefficient of thermal expansion is 4.4 × 10−6/°F
176 (7.9 × 10−6/oC).
177
20 NE
178 3b. Mechanical Properties of Structural Steel, Hot-Rolled Reinforcing
179 Steel, and Concrete at Elevated Temperatures
180
20 O
181 The uniaxial engineering stress-strain-temperature relationship for
182 structural steel, hot rolled reinforcing steel, and concrete shall be deter-
3, W
183 mined using this section. This applies only to structural and reinforcing
184 steels with a specified minimum yield strength, Fy, equal to 65 ksi (450
E
185 MPa) or less, and to concrete with a specified compressive strength, f′c,
ST I
187
188 (a) Structural and Hot Rolled Reinforcing Steel
G R
189 Table A-4.2.1 provides retention factors (kE, ky, and kp) for steel which
190 are expressed as the ratio of the mechanical property at elevated tem-
AU IC
b 2
218 F ( T ) = F p (T ) − c + a 2 − ε y (T ) − ε (T ) (A-4-3)[a]
a
219
220 (c) When in the plastic range [εy(T) ≤ ε(T) ≤ εu(T)]
221
222 F (T ) = Fy (T ) (A-4-4)[a]
223 where
224 ε(T) = the engineering strain at elevated temperature, in./in.
225 (m/m)
226 εp(T) = the engineering strain at the proportional limit at elevat-
20 NE
227 ed temperature, in./in. (m/m) = Fp(T) / E(T)
228 εy(T) = the engineering yield strain at elevated temperature,
20 O
229 in./in. (m/m) = 0.02 in./in. (m/m)
c
230 a2 = ε y (T ) − ε p (T ) ε y (T ) − ε p (T ) + (A-4-5)[a]
3, W
E ( )
T
= E (T ) ε y (T ) − ε p (T ) c + c2
E
231 b2 (A-4-6)[a]
ST I
2
Fy (T ) − Fp (T )
U EV
232 c = (A-4-7)[a]
E (T ) ε y (T ) − ε p (T ) − 2 Fy (T ) − Fp (T )
G R
233
234 User Note: The equation for the plastic range conservatively neglects the
235 strain-hardening portion, but strain-hardening is permitted to be includ-
AU IC
236 edThe plateau of the plastic range does not exceed the ultimate strain,
237 εu(T), where εu(T) = 15%.
BL
238
239 User Note: This section applies to structural steel materials in Section
PU
240 A3.1 and to hot-rolled reinforcing steel with a specified minimum yield
241 strength, Fy, equal to 65 ksi or less, which includes ASTM A615/A615M
242 Gr. 60 (420) and ASTM A706/A706M Gr. 60 (420) steel reinforcement.
243
244 (b) Concrete
245
246 Table A-4.2.2 provides retention factors for concrete which are ex-
247 pressed as the ratio of the mechanical property at elevated temperature
248 with respect to the property at ambient, assumed to be 68°F (20 °C). It
249 is permitted to interpolate between these values. For lightweight con-
250 crete, values of εcu(T) shall be obtained from tests. The properties at
251 elevated temperature, T, are defined as follows:
252
a
EC4, European Committee for Standardization (CEN), Eurocode 4 Design of
Composite Steel and Concrete Structures: Part 1.2: General Rules, Structural Fire
Design, EN 1994-1-2, CEN, Brussels, 2005.
20 NE
265
266 where Fc(T) and εc(T) are the concrete compressive stress and strain,
20 O
267 respectively, at elevated temperature.
268
269 User Note: The tensile strength of concrete at elevated temperature can
3, W
270 be taken as zero, or not more than 10% of the compressive strength at
271 the corresponding temperature.
E
272
ST I
274
275 Table A-4.2.3 provides retention factors for high-strength bolts which are
G R
TABLE A-4.2.1
Properties of Steel at Elevated Temperatures
kE = E (T ) E
Steel Temperature,
= G(T) G k p = Fp (T ) Fy ky = Fy (T ) Fy
ºF (ºC)
68 (20) 1.00 1.00 1.00
200 (93) 1.00 1.00 1.00
400 (200) 0.90 0.80 1.00
600 (320) 0.78 0.58 1.00
750 (400) 0.70 0.42 1.00
800 (430) 0.67 0.40 0.94
1000 (540) 0.49 0.29 0.66
1200 (650) 0.22 0.13 0.35
a
EC4, European Committee for Standardization (CEN), Eurocode 4 Design of
Composite Steel and Concrete Structures: Part 1.2: General Rules, Structural Fire
Design, EN 1994-1-2, CEN, Brussels, 2005.
TABLE A-4.2.2
Properties of Concrete at Elevated Temperatures
Concrete kc = fc′ (T ) fc′ εcu(T),
Temperature, %
ºF (ºC) Normal Weight Lightweight Ec (T ) Ec Normal Weight
Concrete Concrete Concrete
68 (20) 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.25
200 (93) 0.95 1.00 0.93 0.34
400 (200) 0.90 1.00 0.75 0.46
550 (290) 0.86 1.00 0.61 0.58
600 (320) 0.83 0.98 0.57 0.62
20 NE
800 (430) 0.71 0.85 0.38 0.80
1000 (540) 0.54 0.71 0.20 1.06
1200 (650) 0.38 0.58 0.092 1.32
20 O
1400 (760) 0.21 0.45 0.073 1.43
1600 (870) 0.10 0.31 0.055 1.49
1800 (980) 0.05 0.18 0.036 1.50
3, W
2000 (1100) 0.01 0.05 0.018 1.50
2200 (1200) 0.00 0.00 0.000 0.00
E
284
285
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU
286
TABLE A-4.2.3
Properties of Group 120 and Group 150 High-
Strength Bolts at Elevated Temperatures
Bolt Temperature,
°F (°C) Fnt (T ) Fnt or Fnv (T ) Fnv
68 (20) 1.00
200 (93) 0.97
300 (150) 0.95
400 (200) 0.93
600 (320) 0.88
800 (430) 0.71
900 (480) 0.59
1000 (540) 0.42
1200 (650) 0.16
1400 (760) 0.08
1600 (870) 0.04
20 NE
1800 (980) 0.01
2000 (1100) 0.00
287
20 O
288 4. Structural Design Requirements
289
3, W
290 4a. General Requirements
291
E
292 The structural frame and foundation shall be capable of providing the
ST I
294 actions developed during the fire within the prescribed limits of defor-
295 mation. The structural system shall be designed to sustain local damage
296 with the structural system as a whole remaining stable. Frame stability and
G R
299
300 Continuous load paths shall be provided to transfer all forces from the
BL
321 Individual members shall have the design strength necessary to resist the
322 shears, axial forces and moments determined in accordance with these
323 provisions.
324
325 Connections shall be designed and detailed to resist the imposed loading
326 and deformation demands during a design-basis fire as required to meet the
327 performance objectives stated in Section 4.1.1. Where the means of
328 providing fire resistance requires the evaluation of deformation criteria, the
329 deformation of the structural system, or members thereof, under the
330 design-basis fire shall not exceed the prescribed limits.
331
332 User Note: Typical simple shear connections may need additional design
333 enhancements for ductility and resistance to large compression and tensile
334 forces that may develop during the design-basis fire exposure. A fire
335 exposure will not only affect the magnitude of member end reactions, but
336 may also change the nature of the reaction to a limit state different from the
337 controlling mode at ambient temperature.
20 NE
338
339 It shall be permitted to include membrane action of composite floor slabs
340 for fire resistance if the design provides for the effects of increased
20 O
341 connection tensile forces and redistributed gravity load demands on the
342 adjacent framing supports.
343
3, W
344 4c. Design by Advanced Methods of Analysis
345
E
346 Design by advanced methods of analysis is permitted for the design of all
ST I
347 steel building structures for fire conditions. The design-basis fire exposure
U EV
348 shall be that determined in Section 4.2.1. The analysis shall include both a
349 thermal response and the mechanical response to the design-basis fire.
G R
350
351 The thermal response shall produce a temperature field in each structural
AU IC
355
356 The mechanical response results in forces and deformations in the
PU
357 structural system due to the thermal response calculated from the design-
358 basis fire. The mechanical response shall take into account explicitly the
359 deterioration in strength and stiffness with increasing temperature, the
360 effects of thermal expansions, inelastic behavior and load redistribution,
361 large deformations, time-dependent effects such as creep, and uncertainties
362 resulting from variability in material properties at elevated temperature.
363 Support and restraint conditions (forces, moments, and boundary
364 conditions) shall represent the behavior of the structure during a design-
365 basis fire. Material properties shall be defined as per Section 4.2.3.
366
367 The resulting analysis shall address all relevant limit states, such as
368 excessive deflections, connection ruptures, and global or local buckling.
369
370 4d. Design by Simple Methods of Analysis
371
372 The methods of analysis in this section are permitted to be used for the
373 evaluation of the performance of individual members at elevated tempera-
374 tures during exposure to a design-basis fire. When evaluating individual
375 members, the support and restraint conditions (forces, moments and
20 NE
393 For steel temperatures less than or equal to 400°F (200°C), the member
394 and connection design strengths is permitted to be determined without
395 consideration of temperature effects on the nominal strengths.
20 O
396
397 The design strength shall be determined as in Section B3.1. The nominal
398 strength, Rn, shall be calculated using material properties, as provided in
3, W
399 Section 4.2.3b, at the temperature developed by the design-basis fire and as
400 stipulated in Sections 4.2.4d(a) through (f).
E
401
ST I
402 User Note: Lumped heat capacity analysis assumes uniform temperature
U EV
403 over the section and length of the member, which is generally a reasonable
404 assumption for many structural members exposed to post-flashover fires.
G R
407
408 At temperatures below 400°F (200°C), the reduction in steel properties
409 need not be considered in calculating member strengths despite small
BL
412
413 (a) Design for Tension
414
415 The nominal strength for tension shall be determined using the
416 provisions of Chapter D, with steel properties as stipulated in Section
417 4.2.3b(a) and assuming a uniform temperature over the cross section
418 using the temperature equal to the maximum steel temperature.
419
420 (b) Design for Compression
421
422 For nonslender-element columns, the nominal strength for flexural
423 buckling of compression members shall be determined using the pro-
424 visions of Chapter E with steel properties as stipulated in Section
425 4.2.3b(a).Equation A-4-9 shall be used in lieu of Equations E3-2 and
426 E3-3 to calculate the nominal compressive strength for flexural buck-
427 ling:
Fy (T )
F (T )
428 Fcr (T ) = 0.42 e Fy (T ) (A-4-9)
429 where Fy(T) is the yield stress at elevated temperature and Fe(T) is the
430 critical elastic buckling stress calculated from Equation E3-4 with the
431 elastic modulus, E(T), at elevated temperature. Fy(T) and E(T) are ob-
432 tained using coefficients from Table A-4.2.1.
433
434 The strength of leaning (gravity) columns may be increased by rota-
435 tional restraints from cooler columns in the stories above and below
436 the story exposed to the fire. This increased strength applies to fires on
437 only one floor and should not be used for multiple story fires. The
438 increase in design strength can be accounted for by reducing the col-
439 umn slenderness ( Lc r ) used to calculate Fe ( T ) in Equation A-4-9 to
440 ( Lc r )T as follows:
441
Lc T − 32 Lc 35
442 = 1 − − (T − 32) ≥ 0 (oF) (A-4-10)
r T n ( 3,600 ) r n ( 3,600 )
20 NE
443
Lc T Lc 35T
444 = 1 − − ≥0 (oC) (A-4-10M)
r T n ( 2,000 ) r n ( 2, 000 )
445
20 O
3, W
446 where
447 Lc = KL = effective length of member, in. (mm)
E
448 L = laterally unbraced length of the member, in. (mm)
449 = effective length factor
ST I
K
U EV
455
456 User Note: The design equations for compression predict flexural
BL
457 buckling capacities of wide flange rolled shapes, but do not consider
458 local buckling and torsional buckling. If applicable, these additional
459 limit states must be considered with an alternative method. For most
PU
460 fire conditions, uniform heating and temperatures govern the design
461 for compression. When uniform heating is not a reasonable assump-
462 tion, alternative methods must be used to account for the effects of
463 nonuniform heating and resulting thermal gradients on the design
464 strength of compression members, as the simple method assumes a
465 uniform temperature distribution.
466
467 (c) Design for Compression in Concrete-Filled Composite Columns
468
469 For concrete-filled composite columns, the nominal strength for com-
470 pression shall be determined using the provisions of Section I2.2 with
471 steel and concrete properties as stipulated in Section A-4.2.3b. Equa-
472 tion A-4-11 shall be used in lieu of Equations I2-2 and I2-3 to calcu-
473 late the nominal compressive strength for flexural buckling:
474
( ) .
478 10, I2-11, and I2-12. Pe(T) is calculated at elevated temperature using
479 Equations I2-5, I2-13, and I2-14. . Fy(T), f’c(T), Es(T), and Ec(T) are
480 obtained using coefficients from Tables A-4.2.1 and A-4.2.2.
481
482 (d) Design for Compression in Concrete-Filled Composite Plate Shear
483 Walls
484
485 For concrete-filled composite plate shear walls, the nominal strength
486 for compression shall be determined using the provisions of Section
487 I2.3 with steel and concrete properties as stipulated in Section A-
488 4.2.3b and Equation A-4-12 used in lieu of Equations I2-2 and I2-3 to
489 calculate the nominal compressive strength for flexural buckling:
490
( ) .
20 NE
494 16. Pe(T) is calculated at elevated temperature using Equations I2-5
495 and I1-1. Fy(T), f’c(Tc), Es(T), and Ec(Tc) are obtained using coeffi-
496 cients from Tables A-4.2.1 and A-4.2.2.
20 O
497
498 User Note: For composite members, the steel temperature is deter-
3, W
499 mined using heat transfer equations with heat input corresponding to
500 the design-basis fire. The temperature distribution in concrete infill
E
501 can be calculated using one- or two-dimensional heat transfer equa-
502 tions. The regions of concrete infill will have varying temperatures
ST I
U EV
508
509 (e) Design for Flexure
BL
510
511 For steel beams, the calculated bottom flange temperature shall be
512 constant over the depth of the member.
PU
513
514 (1) The nominal strength for flexure shall be determined using the
515 provisions of Chapter F with steel properties as stipulated in Section
516 4.2.3b(b).Equations A-4-13 through A-4-19 shall be used in lieu of
517 Equations F2-2 through F2-6 to calculate the nominal flexural strength
518 for lateral-torsional buckling of doubly symmetric compact rolled
519 wide-flange shapes bent about their major axis: When Lb ≤ Lr ( T )
520
𝐿
𝑀 (𝑇) = 𝐶 𝐹 (𝑇)𝑆 + 𝑀 (𝑇) − 𝐹 (𝑇)𝑆 1− ≤ 𝑀 (𝑇)
𝐿 (𝑇)
521 (A-4-13)
524 where
2
Cb π2 E (T ) Jc Lb
525 Fcr (T ) = 1 + 0.078 (A-4-15)
Lb
2
S x ho rts
r
ts
2 2
E (T ) Jc Jc FL (T )
526 Lr (T ) = 1.95rts + + 6.76 E (T )
FL (T ) S x ho x o
S h
527
528 (A-4-16)
T
531 c x = 0.53 + ≤ 3.0 where T is in °F (A-4-19)
450
20 NE
T
532 c x = 0.6 + ≤ 3.0 where T is in °C (A-4-19M)
250
20 O
533 and
534 T = elevated temperature of steel due to unintended fire, °F (°C)
3, W
535
536 The material properties at elevated temperatures, E(T) and Fy(T), and
E
541 residual stress of 0.3Fy. Alternatively, 10 ksi (69 MPa) may be used in
542 place of 0.3Fy for calculation of FL(T).
AU IC
543
544 User Note: The equations for lateral-torsional buckling do not consid-
BL
20 NE
1200 (650) 0.49
1400 (760) 0.26
1600 (870) 0.12
20 O
1800 (980) 0.05
2000 (1100) 0.00
571
3, W
572 (g) Design for Shear
573
E
578
579 User Note: Shear yielding equations do not consider shear buckling
580 or tension field action. If applicable, these limit states must be consid-
AU IC
584 The nominal strength for combinations of axial force and flexure about
585 one or both axes, with or without torsion, shall be in accordance with
586 the provisions of Chapter H with the design axial and flexural
587 strengths as stipulated in Sections 4.2.4d(a) to (d). Nominal strength
588 for torsion shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of
589 Chapter H, with the steel properties as stipulated in Section 4.2.3b(a),
590 assuming uniform temperature over the cross section.
591
592 4e. Design by Critical Temperature Method
593
594 The critical temperature of a structural member is the temperature at which
595 the demand on the member exceeds its capacity under fire conditions. The
596 evaluation methods in this section are permitted to be used in lieu of
597 Section 4.2.4d for tension members, continuously braced beams not
598 supporting concrete slabs, or compression members that are assumed to be
599 simply supported and develop a uniform temperature over the cross section
600 throughout the fire exposure.
601
602 The use of the critical temperature methods shall be limited to steel
603 members with wide-flange rolled shapes which have nonslender elements
604 per Section B4.
605
606 (a) Design for Tensile Yielding
607
608 The critical temperature of a tension member is permitted to be calcu-
609 lated as follows:
610
611 𝑇 = 816 − 306 ln in °F (A-4-21)
612
613 𝑇 = 435 − 170 ln in °C (A-4-21M)
614 where
615
616 Tcr = critical temperature in °F (°C)
20 NE
617 Rn = nominal yielding strength at ambient temperature determined
618 in accordance with the provisions in Section D2, kips (N)
619 Ru = required tensile strength at elevated temperature, determined
20 O
620 using the load combination in Equation A-4-1 and greater than
621 0.01Rn, kips (N)
3, W
622
623 User Note: Tensile rupture in the net section is not considered in this
E
624 critical temperature calculation and ought to be considered using alter-
ST I
626
627 (b) Design for Compression
628
G R
631
632 𝑇 = 1580 − 0.814 − 1300 in °F (A-4-22)
BL
633
634 𝑇 = 858 − 0.455 − 722 in °C (A-4-22M)
PU
635
636 where
637
638 Lc = effective length of member, in. (mm)
639 r = radius of gyration, in. (mm)
640 Pn = nominal compressive strength at ambient temperature determined
641 in accordance with the provisions in Section E3, kips (N)
642 Pu = required compressive strength at elevated temperature, deter-
643 mined using the load combination in Equation A-4-1, kips (N)
644
645 (c) Design for Flexural Yielding
646
647 The critical temperature of a continuously braced beam not supporting a
648 concrete slab is permitted to be calculated as follows:
649
650 𝑇 = 816 − 306 ln in °F (A-4-23)
651
652 𝑇 = 435 − 170 ln in °C (A-4-23M)
653 where
654 Tcr = critical temperature in °F (°C)
655 Mn = nominal flexural strength due to yielding at ambient temperature
656 determined in accordance with the provisions in Section F2.1, kip-
657 in. (N-mm)
658 Mu = required flexural strength at elevated temperature, determined
659 using the load combination in Equation A-4-1, kip-in. and greater
660 than 0.01Mn (N-mm)
661
662 User Note: Lateral-torsional buckling of beams is not considered in this
663 critical temperature calculation and ought to be considered using alterna-
664 tive methods.
20 NE
669 Structural members and components in steel buildings shall be qualified
670 for the rating period in conformance with ASTM E119. Demonstration of
671 compliance with these requirements using the procedures specified for
20 O
672 steel construction in Section 5 of Standard Calculation Methods for
673 Structural Fire Protection (ASCE/SEI/SFPE 29) is permitted. It is also
3, W
674 permitted to demonstrate equivalency to such standard fire resistance
675 ratings using the advanced analysis methods in Section 4.2 in combination
E
676 with the fire exposure specified in ASTM E119 as the design-basis fire.
ST I
677
U EV
678 User Note: There are other standard fire exposures which are more severe
679 than that prescribed in ASTM E119, for example the hydrocarbon pool fire
680 scenario defined in ASTM E1529 (UL 1709). Fire resistance ratings
G R
681 developed on the basis of ASTM E119 are not directly substitutable for
682 such more demanding conditions.
AU IC
683
684 The generic steel assemblies described in Table A-4.3.1 shall be deemed to
BL
688
689
Table A-4.3.1[a]
Minimum Fire Protection and Fire Resistance
Ratings of Steel Assembliese
Minimum Thickness (in.) of
Item Fire Protection Material Insulating Material for Fire-
Assembly
Number Used Resistance Times (hr.)
4 hrs 3 hrs 2 hrs 1 hr
1. Steel Carbonate, lightweight
columns and sand-lightweight
and all of aggregate concrete,
primary 1-1.1 members 6 in. × 6 in. or 2-1/2 2 1-1/2 1
trusses greater (not including
sandstone, granite and
a
siliceous gravel).
Carbonate, lightweight
and sand-lightweight
20 NE
aggregate concrete,
1-1.2 members 8 in. × 8 in. or 2 1-1/2 1 1
greater (not including
sandstone, granite and
20 O
a
siliceous gravel).
Carbonate, lightweight
3, W
and sand-lightweight
aggregate concrete,
E
1-1.3 members 12 in. × 12 in. 1-1/2 1 1 1
or greater (not including
ST I
U EV
greater.a
Siliceous aggregate
BL
greater.a
Siliceous aggregate
concrete and concrete
1-1.6 excluded in Item 1-1.1, 2 1 1 1
members 12 in.× 12 in or
greater.a
Clay or shale brick with
1-2.1 a 3-3/4 – – 2-1/4
brick and mortar fill.
690
691
a
ICC IBC-2018 International Building Code, International Code Council.
692
Table A-4.3.1[a]
Minimum Fire Protection and Fire Resistance Ratings
of Steel Assembliese (continued)
Minimum Thickness (in.) of
Item Fire Protection Material Insulating Material for Fire-
Assembly
Number Used Resistance Times (hr.)
4 hrs 3 hrs 2 hrs 1 hr
1. Steel
columns
and all of
primary
trusses Cement plaster over
metal lath wire tied to 3/4
in. cold-rolled vertical
channels with 0.049 in.
1-4.1 (No. 18 B.W. gage) wire – – 2-1/2b 7/8
20 NE
ties spaced 3 to 6 in. on
center. Plaster mixed
1:2.5 by volume, cement
20 O
to sand.
693
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU
a
ICC IBC-2018 International Building Code, International Code Council.
694
Table A-4.3.1[a]
Minimum Fire Protection and Fire Resistance Ratings
of Steel Assembliese (continued)
Minimum Thickness (in.) of
Item Fire Protection Material Insulating Material for Fire-
Assembly
Number Used Resistance Times (hr.)
4 hrs 3 hrs 2 hrs 1 hr
1. Steel Vermiculite concrete, 1:4
columns mix by volume over
and all of paperbacked wire fabric
primary lath wrapped directly
trusses around column with
additional 2 × 2 in. 0.065
/ 0.065 in. (No. 16/16
1-5.1 B.W. gage) wire fabric 2 – – –
placed 3/4 in. from outer
20 NE
concrete surface. Wire
fabric tied with 0.049 in.
(No. 18 B.W. gage) wire
spaced 6 in. on center for
20 O
inner layer and 2 in. on
center for outer layer.
3, W
Perlite or vermiculite
gypsum plaster over
E
metal lath wrapped
around column and
ST I
U EV
pushed through to
flanges.
BL
a
ICC IBC-2018 International Building Code, International Code Council.
Table A-4.3.1[a]
Minimum Fire Protection and Fire Resistance Ratings
of Steel Assembliese (continued)
Minimum Thickness (in.) of
Item Fire Protection Material Insulating Material for Fire-
Assembly
Number Used Resistance Times (hr.)
4 hrs 3 hrs 2 hrs 1 hr
1. Steel 1-6.4 Perlite or vermiculite 2-1/2 2 – –
columns gypsum plaster over two
and all of layers of 1/2 in. plain full-
primary length gypsum lath
trusses applied tight to column
flanges. Lath wrapped
with 1 in. hexagonal
mesh of No. 20 gage wire
and tied with doubled
0.035 in. diameter (No.
20 NE
18 B.W. gage) wire ties
spaced 23 in. on center.
For three-coat work, the
plaster mix for the
20 O
second coat shall not
exceed 100 pounds of
3, W
gypsum to 2.5 cubic feet
of aggregate for the 3-
E
hour system.
1-6.5 Perlite or vermiculite – 2 – –
ST I
a
ICC IBC-2018 International Building Code, International Code Council.
699
Table A-4.3.1[a]
Minimum Fire Protection and Fire Resistance Ratings
of Steel Assembliese (continued)
Minimum Thickness (in.) of
Item Fire Protection Material Insulating Material for Fire-
Assembly
Number Used Resistance Times (hr.)
4 hrs 3 hrs 2 hrs 1 hr
1. Steel 1-7.1 Multiple layers of 1/2 in. – – 2 1
c
columns gypsum wallboard
d
and all of adhesively secured to
primary column flanges and
trusses successive layers.
Wallboard applied
without horizontal joints.
Corner edges of each
layer staggered.
20 NE
Wallboard layer below
outer layer secured to
column with doubled
0.049 in. (No. 18 B.W.
20 O
gage) steel wire ties
spaced 15 in. on center.
3, W
Exposed corners taped
and treated.
E
1-7.2 Three layers of 5/8 in. – – 1-7/8 –
Type X gypsum
ST I
a
ICC IBC-2018 International Building Code, International Code Council.
702
Table A-4.3.1[a]
Minimum Fire Protection and Fire Resistance Ratings
of Steel Assembliese (continued)
Minimum Thickness (in.) of
Item Fire Protection Material Insulating Material for Fire-
Assembly
Number Used Resistance Times (hr.)
4 hrs 3 hrs 2 hrs 1 hr
1. Steel 1-7.3 Three layers of 5/8 in. – 1-7/8 – –
columns Type X gypsum
c
and all of wallboard, each layer
primary screw attached to 1-5/8
trusses in. steel studs, 0.018 in.
thick (No. 25 carbon
sheet steel gage) at each
corner of column. Middle
layer also secured with
20 NE
0.049 in. (No. 18 B.W.
gage) double-strand steel
wire ties, 24 in. on center.
Screws are No. 6 by 1 in.
20 O
spaced 24 in. on center
for inner layer, No. 6 by
3, W
1-5/8 in. spaced 12 in. on
center for middle layer
E
and No. 8 by 2-1/4 in.
spaced 12 in. on center
ST I
U EV
703
G R
704
AU IC
BL
PU
a
ICC IBC-2018 International Building Code, International Code Council.
705
Table A-4.3.1[a]
Minimum Fire Protection and Fire Resistance Ratings
of Steel Assembliese (continued)
Minimum Thickness (in.) of
Item Fire Protection Material Insulating Material for Fire-
Assembly
Number Used Resistance Times (hr.)
4 hrs 3 hrs 2 hrs 1 hr
1. Steel 1-9.1 Minimum W8×35 wide – – – See
columns flange steel column (w/d Note f
and all of ≥ 0.75) with each web
primary cavity filled even with the
trusses flange tip with normal
weight carbonate or
siliceous aggregate
concrete (3,000 psi
minimum compressive
20 NE
strength with 145 pcf ± 3
pcf unit weight).
Reinforce the concrete in
20 O
each web cavity with
minimum No. 4 deformed
reinforcing bar installed
3, W
vertically and centered in
the cavity, and secured to
E
the column web with
minimum No. 2 horizontal
ST I
U EV
As an alternative to the
No. 4 rebar, 3/4 in.
diameter by 3 in. long
AU IC
flanges.
2. Webs or 2.1-1 Carbonate, lightweight 2 1-1/2 1 1
flanges of and sand-lightweight
steel beams aggregate concrete (not
and girders including sandstone,
granite and siliceous
gravel) with 3 in. or finer
metal mesh placed 1 in.
from the finished surface
anchored to the top
flange and providing not
less than 0.025 in.2 of
steel area per foot in
each direction.
706
707
a
ICC IBC-2018 International Building Code, International Code Council.
708
Table A-4.3.1[a]
Minimum Fire Protection and Fire Resistance Ratings
of Steel Assembliese (continued)
Minimum Thickness (in.) of
Item Fire Protection Material Insulating Material for Fire-
Assembly
Number Used Resistance Times (hr.)
4 hrs 3 hrs 2 hrs 1 hr
2. Webs or 2-1.2 Siliceous aggregate 2-1/2 2 1-1/2 1
flanges of concrete and concrete
steel beams excluded in Item 2-1.1
and girders with 3 in. or finer metal
mesh placed 1 in. from
the finished surface
anchored to the top
flange and providing not
2
less than 0.025 in. of
20 NE
steel area per foot in
each direction.
2-2.1 Cement plaster on metal – – 2-1/2b 7/8
lath attached to 3/4 in.
20 O
cold-rolled channels with
0.04 in. (No. 18 B.W.
3, W
gage) wire ties spaced 3
in. to 6 in. on center.
E
Plaster mixed 1:2.5 by
volume, cement to sand.
ST I
U EV
spaced approximately 5
in. on center at cage
sides and bottom.
PU
709
710
a
ICC IBC-2018 International Building Code, International Code Council.
711
Table A-4.3.1[a]
Minimum Fire Protection and Fire Resistance Ratings of Steel
Assembliese (continued)
Minimum Thickness (in.) of
Item Insulating Material for Fire-
Assembly Fire Protection Material Used
Number Resistance Times (hr.)
4 hrs 3 hrs 2 hrs 1 hr
2. Webs or 2-4.1 Two layers of 5/8 in. Type X gypsum – – 1-1/4 –
flanges of wallboardc are attached to U-shaped
steel beams brackets spaced 24 in. on center.
and girders 0.018 in. thick (No. 25 carbon sheet
steel gage) 1-5/8 in. deep by 1 in.
galvanized steel runner channels
are first installed parallel to and on
each side of the top beam flange to
provide a 1/2 in. clearance to the
flange. The channel runners are
20 NE
attached to steel deck or concrete
floor construction with approved
fasteners spaced 12 in. on center.
20 O
U-shaped brackets are formed from
members identical to the channel
3, W
runners. At the bent portion of the U-
shaped bracket, the flanges of the
E
channel are cut out so that 1-5/8 in.
deep corner channels can be
ST I
a
ICC IBC-2018 International Building Code, International Code Council.
712
Table A-4.3.1[a]
Minimum Fire Protection and Fire Resistance Ratings
of Steel Assembliese (continued)
Minimum Thickness (in.) of
Item Insulating Material for Fire-
Assembly Fire Protection Material Used
Number Resistance Times (hr.)
4 hrs 3 hrs 2 hrs 1 hr
2. Webs or 2-4.2 Three layers of 5/8 in. Type X – 1-7/8 – –
flanges of gypsum wallboardc attached
steel beams to a steel suspension system
and girders as described immediately
above utilizing the 0.018 in.
thick (No. 25 carbon sheet
steel gage) 1 in. × 2 in. lower
corner angles. The framing is
located so that a 2-1/8 in. and
2 in. space is provided
20 NE
between the inner layer of
wallboard and the sides and
bottom of the beam,
20 O
respectively. The first two
layers of wallboard are
3, W
attached as described
immediately above. A layer of
E
0.035 in. thick (No. 20 B.W.
gage) 1 in. hexagonal
ST I
a
ICC IBC-2018 International Building Code, International Code Council.
20 NE
730
731 User Note: These procedures establish a basis for determining the fire
732 resistance rating of steel construction assemblies as a function of the
20 O
733 thickness of fire-resistant material, the weight, W, or area, A, and the
734 applicable heated perimeter, D or P, of the fire protection material or
735 structural steel member. The W/D and A/P ratios are equivalent and
3, W
736 mutually convertible section properties that represent their thermal inertia.
737 W/D has conventionally been used for open wide-flange shapes, while A/P
E
739
U EV
742 profile, together with the nature of the heat exposure on the steel member.
743 The latter is typically characterized as either an all-around exposure of the
AU IC
747 multiple sources, including AISC Design Guide 19 (a free download for
748 members from www.aisc/org/dg) and other publications.
PU
749
750 2.1 Steel Columns
751
752 The fire-resistance ratings of columns shall be based on the size of the
753 member and the type of protection provided in accordance with this
754 section.
755
756 The application of these procedures for noncomposite steel column
757 assemblies shall be limited to designs in which the fire-resistant material is
758 not designed to carry any of the load acting on the column.
759
760 Mechanical, electrical, and plumbing elements shall not be embedded in
761 required fire-resistant materials, unless fire-endurance test results are
762 available to establish the adequacy of the resulting condition.
763
764 User Note: The International Building Code requires fire resistance rated
765 columns to be protected on all sides for the full column height, including
766 connections with other structural members and protection continuity
767 through any ceilings to the top of the column.
768
769
770 2.1.1 Gypsum Wallboard Protection
771
772 The fire resistance of columns with weight-to-heated perimeter ratios
773 (W/D) less than or equal to 3.65 lb/ft/in. and protected with Type X
774 gypsum wallboard is permitted to be determined from the following
775 expression for a maximum column rating of 4-hours:
776
0.75
W′
R = 130 D
777 h (A-4-24)[a],[b]
2
778
.
779 𝑅 = 96 (A-4-24M)[a]
780
20 NE
781 where
782 D = inside heated perimeter of the gypsum board, in. (mm)
783 R = fire resistance, minutes
20 O
784 W = nominal weight of steel shape, lb/ft (kg/m)
785 h = total nominal thickness of Type X gypsum wallboard, in. (mm)
3, W
786
787 and
E
W ′ W 50 h
788 = + (A-4-25)[a],[b]
D 144
ST I
D
U EV
789
790 = + 0.0008ℎ (A-4-25M)[a]
791
G R
794 specified fire-resistance ratings shall be the same as the thickness deter-
795 mined for W/D = 3.65 lb/ft/in.
BL
796
797 User Note: This equation has been developed and long used for steel
PU
798 column fire protection with any Type X gypsum board. Since Type C
799 gypsum board has demonstrated improved fire performance relative to
800 Type X board, these provisions may also be conservatively applied to
801 column protection with any Type C gypsum board. The supporting test
802 data and accompanying gypsum board installation methods limit the
803 computed fire resistance rating of the steel column to a maximum of 3-
804 hours or 4-hours, as specified in the next section.
805
806 The gypsum board or gypsum panel products shall be installed and
807 supported as required either in UL X526 for fire-resistance ratings of four
808 hours or less, or in UL X528 for fire-resistance ratings of three hours or
809 less.
810
811 User Note: The attachment of the Type X gypsum board protection for the
812 steel columns must be done in accordance with the referenced UL assem-
a
ASCE/SEI/SFPE 29-05 Standard Calculation Methods for Structural Fire Pro
tection
b
ICC IBC-2018 International Building Code, International Code Council.
813 blies. UL X526 is applicable only when exterior steel covers are installed
814 over the gypsum board. Otherwise, UL X528 describes the more general
815 gypsum board installation.
816
817 2.1.2 Sprayed and Intumescent/Mastic Fire-Resistant Materials
818
819 The fire resistance of columns protected with sprayed or intumes-
820 cent/mastic fire-resistant coatings shall be determined on the basis of
821 standard fire-resistance rated assemblies, any associated computations and
822 limits as provided in the applicable rated assemblies.
823
824 The fire resistance of wide-flange columns protected with sprayed fire-
825 resistant materials is permitted to be determined as:
826
W
827 R = C1 + C2 h (A-4-26)[a],[b]
D
828
20 NE
829 𝑅= 𝐶 +𝐶 ℎ (A-4-26M)[a]
830
20 O
831 where
832 R = fire resistance, minutes
3, W
833 h = thickness of sprayed fire-resistant material, in.
834 D = heated perimeter of the column, in.
E
835 C1,C2 , C3, and C4= material-dependent constants prescribed in speci-
836 fied rated assembly.
ST I
U EV
840 for specific fire-resistant materials on the basis of standard fire endurance
841 tests. The computational usage for each correlation, protection product and
AU IC
844
845 User Note: The fire resistance rated steel column assemblies, published
846 by UL and by other test laboratories, will often include such interpolation
PU
847 equations and specific constants that depend on the particular fire protec-
848 tion product. The applicability limits of each given design correlation
849 relative to the column assembly, sprayed fire-resistant protection product,
850 W/D, rating duration, minimum required thickness, and the like must be
851 followed to remain within the range of the existing fire test data range.
852
853 The fire resistance of HSS columns protected with sprayed fire-resistant
854 materials is permitted to be determined from empirical correlations similar
855 to Equation A-4-25 expressed in terms of A/P values, wherein A is the area
856 in in.2 (mm2) and P is the heated perimeter. The applicability limits
857 specified in the rated column assembly for each correlation and its
858 material-dependent constants shall be followed.
859
860 User Note: A/P is a directly convertible and equivalent steel section
861 property to W/D which has traditionally been used in fire resistive compu-
a
ASCE/SEI/SFPE 29-05 Standard Calculation Methods for Structural Fire Pro
tection
b
ICC IBC-2018 International Building Code, International Code Council.
862 tations for HSS sections. Similar to W/D for open wide flange shapes,
863 tabulation of A/P values for standard closed shapes with contour and box
864 protection applications are available from multiple sources, including
865 AISC and the published literature. The applicability limits of each given
866 design correlation relative to the column assembly, sprayed fire-resistant
867 protection product, A/P, rating duration, minimum required thickness, and
868 the like must be followed to remain within the range of the existing fire test
869 result range .
870
871 2.1.3 Noncomposite Columns Encased in Concrete
872
873 The fire resistance of noncomposite columns fully encased within concrete
874 protection is permitted to be determined from the following expression:
875
876 R = Ro (1 + 0.03m) (A-4-27)[a],[b]
877
878
20 NE
879 where
h1.6
0.7 0.8
W H [a],[b]
880 Ro = 10 + 17 0.2 × 1 + 26 (A-4-28)
20 O
D 3, W kc pc cc h ( L + h )
881
. . .
882 𝑅 = 73 + 0.162 1 + 31,000 (A-4-28M)[a]
E
. ( )
883
ST I
U EV
884
885 R = fire endurance at equilibrium moisture conditions, minutes
886 Ro = fire endurance at zero moisture content, minutes
G R
891 concrete and nearest outer surface of the encased steel column sec-
892 tion, in. (mm)
893 kc = ambient temperature thermal conductivity of the concrete, Btu/hr ft
PU
a
ASCE/SEI/SFPE 29-05 Standard Calculation Methods for Structural Fire Pro
tection
b
ICC IBC-2018 International Building Code, International Code Council.
909
910
911
912 For wide-flange columns completely encased in concrete with all reentrant
913 spaces filled, the thermal capacity of the concrete within the reentrant
20 NE
914 spaces is permitted to be added to the ambient thermal capacity of the steel
915 column, as follows:
pc
20 O
916 H = 0.11W + c c ( b f d − As ) (A-4-29)[a],[b]
144
3, W
917 𝐻 = 0.46𝑊 + (𝑏 𝑑 − 𝐴 ) (A-4-29M) [a]
, ,
918
E
919 where:
ST I
924 User Note: It is conservative to neglect this additional concrete term in the
925 column fire resistance calculation.
AU IC
926
927 In the absence of more specific data for the ambient properties of the
BL
930
931
Table A-4.3.2[c]
Ambient Properties of Concrete Encasement
for Steel Column Fire Resistance
Normal Weight Light Weight
Property
Concrete Concrete
0.95 Btu/hr ·ft ·°F 0.35 Btu/hr · ft ·°F
Thermal conductivity, kc
(1.64 W/m K) (0.61 W/m K)
Specific heat, cc 0.20 Btu/lb °F 0.20 Btu/lb °F
(840 J/kg K) (840 J/kg K)
a
ASCE/SEI/SFPE 29-05 Standard Calculation Methods for Structural Fire Pro
tection
b
ICC IBC-2018 International Building Code, International Code Council.
c
ICC IBC-2018 International Building Code, International Code Council.
3 3
Density, pc 145 lb/ft 110 lb/ft
3 3
(2300 kg/m ) (1800 kg/m )
Equilibrium (free) moisture
4% 5%
content (m) by volume
932
933
934 User Note: The estimated free moisture content of concrete given in Table
935 A-4.3.2 may not be appropriate for all conditions, particularly for older
936 concrete that has already been in service for a longer time. For these and
937 similar situations of uncertainty, it is conservative to not rely on this
938 beneficial effect of the free moisture and to assume the concrete is
939 completely dry with m=0 for fire resistance of Ro.
940
941 2.1.4 Noncomposite Columns Encased in Masonry Units of Concrete
942 or Clay
943
944 The fire resistance of noncomposite columns protected by encasement with
20 NE
945 concrete masonry units or with clay masonry units is permitted to be
946 determined from the following expression:
947
20 O Te1.6 ( As d mTe )
0.7 0.8
W
948 R = 0.17 + 0.285 0.2 1.0 + 42.7
3, W
D K ( 0.25 p + Te )
E
949 (A-4-30) [a]
950
ST I
U EV
.
. .
951 𝑅 = 1.22 + 0.0027 . 1.0 + 1249 ( . )
G R
952 (A-4-30M)
953
AU IC
954 where
955 R = fire-resistance rating of column assembly, hours
BL
975
976
977 d = depth of a wide flange column, outside diameter of pipe column,
978 or outside dimension of hollow structural section column, in. (mm)
979 tw = thickness of web of wide flange column, in. (mm)
980 w = width of flange of wide flange or hollow structural section, in. (mm)
981
20 NE
Table A-4.3.3[a]
Thermal Conductivity of Masonry Units for
20 O
Steel Column Encasement
Unit Density, Unit Thermal Conductivity
3 3
3, W
dm, lb/ft (kg/m ) K, Btu/hr ft °F (W/m K)
Concrete Masonry Units
80 (1280) 0.207 (0.358)
E
85 (1360) 0.228 (0.395)
ST I
a
ICC IBC-2018 International Building Code, International Code Council.
20 NE
1007 = outside dimension for square columns, in. (mm)
1008 = least outside dimension for rectangular columns, in. (mm)
1009 C = compressive force due to unfactored dead load and live load, kips
20 O
1010 (kN)
1011
3, W
1012 The application of these equations shall be limited by all of the following
1013 conditions:
E
1014 1. The required fire resistance rating R shall be less than or equal to the
1015 limits specified in Tables A-4.3.5 or A-4.3.5M.
ST I
U EV
1023 opposite each other at the top and bottom of the column and at maxi-
1024 mum 12-ft on center spacing along the column height. Each set of vent
1025 holes should be rotated 90° relative to the adjacent set of holes to re-
PU
a
ASCE/SEI/SFPE 29-05 Standard Calculation Methods for Structural Fire Pro
tection
20 NE
20 O
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU
1047
Table A-4.3.4 Values of Constant a for Normal
Weight Concrete
Reinf. a
Aggregate Concrete Fill
Ratio
Type Type Circular Sq. or Rect.
(%)
Columns Columns
siliceous unreinforced NA 0.070 0.060
steel-fiber-
siliceous 2% 0.075 0.065
reinforced
steel-bar- 1.5 – 3 0.080 0.070
siliceous
reinforced 3–5 0.085 0.070
carbonate unreinforced NA 0.080 0.070
steel-fiber-
carbonate 2 0.085 0.075
reinforced
steel-bar- 1.5 - 3 0.090 0.080
carbonate
reinforced 3–5 0.095 0.085
1048
Table A-4.3.5 Limits for the use of Equation A-4.25
20 NE
Parameters
Parameter Concrete Fill Type
20 O
Unreinforced steel-fiber- steel-bar
reinforced reinforced
R (hours) ≤2 ≤3 ≤3
3, W
fc’ (ksi) 2.9 – 5.8 2.9 – 8.0 2.9 – 8.0
Lc (ft) 6.5 – 13.0 6.5 – 15.0 6.5 – 15.0
E
D (round) (in) 5.5 – 16.0 5.5 – 16.0 6.5 – 16.0
D (sq. or rect.) (in) 5.5 – 12.0 4.0 – 12.0 7.0 – 12.0
ST I
2% of concrete 1.5 – 5%
U EV
Reinf. (%) NA
mix by mass of section area
Concrete cover (in) NA NA ≥ 1.0
1049
G R
reinforced reinforced
R (hours) ≤2 ≤3 ≤3
fc’ (MPa) 20 – 40 20-55 20-55
PU
20 NE
1057
1058 User Note: The fire resistance ratings and requirements in Table A-4.3.7
1059 were directly adapted from the ACI 216.1 provisions for conventional bar-
20 O
1060 reinforced concrete columns. Substitution of an embedded structural steel
1061 shape for steel bar reinforcement should not reduce the fire resistance of
3, W
1062 the loadbearing concrete parts of column, and the R computed for the same
1063 but assumed non-composite steel column accordingly verifies the fire
E
1064 resistance of the loadbearing steel shape. The concrete cover, h, is defined
ST I
1065 identical to that used for non-composite steel columns encased in concrete.
U EV
1066
1067 2.3 I-Shaped Beams and Girders
1068
G R
1069 The fire-resistance ratings of beams and girders shall be based upon the
1070 size of the element and the type of protection provided in accordance with
AU IC
1076 resistant material and the weight (W) and heated perimeter (D) of the beam
1077 or girder.
1078
1079 The beams provided in approved fire-resistance-rated assemblies shall be
1080 considered to be the minimum permissible size. Other beam or girder
1081 shapes is permitted to be substituted provided that the weight-to-heated-
1082 perimeter ratio (W/D) of the substitute beam is equal to or greater than that
1083 of the minimum beam specified in the approved assembly.
1084
1085 User Note: In the past, the substitution of larger beams for the minimum
1086 required sizes has been permitted based upon the thickness of web and
1087 flange elements, W/D ratio, or the beam size designation. Extensive fire
1088 research has shown that the heat transfer to a protected steel beam or girder
1089 is actually a direct function of the W/D ratio. As a result, beam substitu-
1090 tions should be more directly based upon W/D ratios. The significance of
1091 the thickness of web and flange elements and beam size is inherently
1092 included in the determination of W/D ratios.
1093 It is acceptable and conservative to protect a larger steel beam or girder,
1094 which has a greater W/D value than the W/D of the minimum member size
20 NE
1112
1113 where:
1114 h = thickness of sprayed fire-resistant material, in. (mm)
20 O
1115 W = weight of the beam or girder, lb/ft (kg/m)
1116 D = heated perimeter of the beam, in. (mm)
3, W
1117
1118 Subscript 1 refers to the substitute beam or girder and the required
E
1119 thickness of fire-resistant material.
1120 Subscript 2 refers to the beam and fire-resistant material thickness in the
ST I
U EV
1124
1125 1. The weight-to-heated-perimeter ratio for the substitute beam or girder
AU IC
1126 (W1/D1) shall be not less than 0.37 (customary units) or 0.022 (SI
1127 units).
BL
1128 2. The thickness of fire protection materials calculated for the substitute
1129 beam or girder (T1) shall be not less than 3/8 in. (10 mm).
1130 3. The unrestrained or restrained beam rating shall be not less than 1
PU
1131 hour.
1132 4. Where used to adjust the material thickness for a restrained beam, the
1133 use of this procedure is limited to sections classified as compact.
1134
1135 User Note: This substitution equation based on W/D for beams protected
1136 with spray-applied fire resistive materials was developed by UL with the
1137 given limitations. The minimum W/D ratio of 0.37 prevents the use of this
1138 equation for determining the fire resistance of very small shapes that have
1139 not been tested. The 3/8-in. (10 mm) minimum thickness of protection is a
1140 practical application limit based upon the most commonly used spray-
1141 applied fire protection materials.
1142
1143 The fire resistance of beams and girders protected with intumescent or
1144 mastic fire-resistant coatings shall be determined on the basis of standard
a
ASCE/SEI/SFPE 29-05 Standard Calculation Methods for Structural Fire Pro
tection.
b
ICC IBC-2018 International Building Code, International Code Council.
20 NE
1162 arre predominan ntly axially loaded
l and will
w require laarger protectiion
1163 th
hicknesses thann beams. Also,, most truss ellements can bee exposed to ffire
1164 onn all four sidees simultaneou usly. As a ressult, the heateed perimeter aand
20 O
1165 prrotection thick
kness of most truss memberss should be deetermined in tthe
1166 saame manner ass for columns.. However, an n exception is included for ttop
1167 chhord elements that directly suupport floor orr roof construcction. The heatted
3, W
1168 peerimeter and protection thickkness of such elements
e may bbe determined in
1169 th
he same manneer as for beams and girders, or they may bbe conservativeely
E
1170 deetermined in th
he same manneer as for column ns.
ST I
1171
U EV
1176 th
he fire resistance rating, baseed on the therm
mal insulation criterion for tthe
1177 un
nexposed surfaace temperaturre, shall be peermitted to be calculated usiing
1178 th
he following eqquation:
BL
1179
1180 𝑅 =𝑎 +𝑎 ℎ +𝑎 ℎ +𝑎 𝑙 +𝑎 𝑙 +𝑎 𝑚+𝑎 ℎ +
PU
1181 𝑎 ℎ ℎ + 𝑎 ℎ 𝑙 + 𝑎 ℎ 𝑙 + 𝑎 ℎ 𝑚+𝑎 ℎ 𝑙 + 𝑎 ℎ 𝑙 +
1182 𝑎 ℎ 𝑚+𝑎 𝑙 𝑙 +𝑎 𝑙 𝑚+𝑎 𝑙 𝑚 (A-4-333)
1183
1184
1185
1186 where
w
1187 R = fire resistance rating in minutes
m
1188 h1 = concrete slab thickness above steel deeck, in (mm)
1189 h2 = depth of steel deck, in (mm)
(
1190 l1 = largest up
pper width of deck
d rib, in (mm
m)
1191 l2 = bottom wiidth of deck ribb, in (mm)
1192 l3 = width of deck
d upper flannge, in (mm)
20 NE
𝑎 −3.30 min/in (−0.13 min/mm) −12.70 min/in (−0.5 min/mm)
20 O
𝑎 -118.1 min
3, W -784.2 min
2 2 2 2
𝑎 4.06 min/in (0.0063 min/mm ) 8.84 min/in (0.0137 min/mm )
2 2 2 2
𝑎 1.48 min/in (0.0023 min/mm ) 3.61 min/in (0.0056 min/mm )
E
2 2 2 2
𝑎 1.87 min/in (0.0029 min/mm ) 3.68 min/in (0.0057 min/mm )
ST I
U EV
2 2
𝑎 0 -2.39 min/in (-0.0037 min/mm )
2 2 2 2
𝑎 1.16 min/in (0.0018 min/mm ) 2.06 min/in (0.0032 min/mm )
AU IC
2 2
𝑎 0 -3.42 min/in (-0.0053 min/mm )
BL
1199
1200 User Note: If moisture content values are not available, m = 4% and 5%
1201 can be used for normal-weight concrete and lightweight concrete, respec-
1202 tively, consistent with Annex D of Eurocode 4. Dry conditions (m = 0%)
1203 will yield the most conservative fire resistance rating.
1204
1205 2.6 Composite Plate Shear Walls
1206
1207 For unprotected composite plate shear walls meeting the requirements of
1208 Chapter I and Section 4.3.2.6, the fire resistance rating is permitted to be
1209 determined in accordance with Equation A-4-34.
1210
⁄
. .
1211 𝑅 = −18.5 + 15 −1 (A-4-34)
⁄
. .
1212 𝑅 = −18.5 + 15 −1 (A-4-34M)
1213
1214
1215 where R is the fire rating in hours, Pu is the applied axial load in kips (kN),
1216 and L, tsc, and Pn are as defined in Chapter I.
1217
1218 The use of Equation A-4-34 shall be limited to walls satisfying all the
1219 following conditions:
1220 1. Wall slenderness ratio (L/tsc) is less than or equal to 20
1221 2. Axial load ratio (Pu/Pn) is less than or equal to 0.2
1222 3. Wall thickness, tsc, is between 8 in. and 24 in. (200 mm and 600 mm)
1223
1224 3. Restrained Construction
1225
1226 For floor and roof assemblies and individual beams in buildings, a
1227 restrained condition exists when the surrounding or supporting structure is
1228 capable of resisting forces and accommodating deformations caused by
1229 thermal expansion throughout the range of anticipated elevated tempera-
20 NE
1230 tures. Cast-in-place or prefabricated concrete floor or roof construction
1231 secured to steel framing members, and individual steel beams and girders
1232 that are welded or bolted to integral framing members shall be considered
20 O
1233 restrained construction.
1234
1235 4. Unrestrained Construction
3, W
1236
1237 Steel beams, girders and frames that do not support a concrete slab shall be
E
1239 surrounding construction that has been specifically designed and detailed
U EV
1242 A steel member bearing on a wall in a single span or at the end span of
1243 multiple spans shall be considered unrestrained unless the wall has been
AU IC
1 APPENDIX 5
20 NE
16 5.5. Evaluation Report
17
18 5.1. GENERAL PROVISIONS
20 O
19
20 These provisions shall be applicable when the evaluation of an existing steel
3, W
21 structure is specified for (a) verification of a specific set of design loadings or
22 (b) determination of the available strength of a load-resisting member or
E
23 system. The evaluation shall be performed by structural analysis (Section
24 5.3), by load tests (Section 5.4), or by a combination of structural analysis and
ST I
U EV
25 load tests, when specified in the contract documents by the engineer of record
26 (EOR).
27
G R
30 For evaluations in accordance with this appendix, steel grades other than
31 those listed in Section A3.1 are permitted.
BL
32
33 1. Determination of Required Tests
34
PU
35 The EOR shall determine the specific tests that are required from Sections
36 5.2.2 through 5.2.6 and specify the locations where they are required. The use
37 of applicable project records is permitted to reduce or eliminate the need for
38 testing.
39
40 2. Tensile Properties
41
42 Tensile properties of members shall be established for use in evaluation by
43 structural analysis (Section 5.3) or load tests (Section 5.4). Such properties
44 shall include the yield stress, tensile strength and percent elongation. Certified
45 material test reports or certified reports of tests made by the fabricator or a
46 testing laboratory in accordance with ASTM A6/A6M or A568/A568M, as
47 applicable, are permitted for this purpose. Otherwise, tensile tests shall be
48 conducted in accordance with ASTM A370 from samples taken from
49 components of the structure.
50
51 3. Chemical Composition
52
20 NE
70 5. Weld Metal
71
72 Where structural performance is dependent on existing welded connections,
20 O
73 representative samples of weld metal shall be obtained. Chemical analysis
74 and mechanical tests shall be made to characterize the weld metal. A
75 determination shall be made of the magnitude and consequences of
3, W
76 imperfections. If the requirements of Structural Welding Code—Steel, AWS
77 D1.1/D1.1M, are not met, the EOR shall determine if remedial actions are
E
78 required.
ST I
79
U EV
89
90 5.3. EVALUATION BY STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS
91
92 1. Dimensional Data
93
94 All dimensions used in the evaluation, such as spans, column heights, member
95 spacings, bracing locations, cross-section dimensions, thicknesses, and
96 connection details, shall be determined from a field survey. Alternatively, it
97 is permitted to determine such dimensions from applicable project design or
98 fabrication documents with field verification of critical values.
99
100 2. Strength Evaluation
101
102 Forces (load effects) in members and connections shall be determined by
103 structural analysis applicable to the type of structure evaluated. The load
104 effects shall be determined for the loads and factored load combinations
105 stipulated in Section B2.
106
107 The available strength of members and connections shall be determined from
108 applicable provisions of Chapters B through K and Appendix 5 of this
109 Specification.
110
111 2a. Rivets
112
113 The design tensile or shear strength, φRn, and the allowable tensile or shear
114 strength, Rn/Ω, of a driven rivet shall be determined according Section J3.6,
115 and driven rivets under combined tension and shear shall satisfy the
116 requirements of Section J3.7,
117
118 where
119 Ab = nominal body area of undriven rivet, in.2 (mm2)
120 Fnt = nominal tensile strength of the driven rivet from Table A-5.3.1, ksi
121 (MPa)
122 Fnv = nominal shear strength of the driven rivet from Table A-5.3.1, ksi
123 (MPa)
20 NE
124
Table A-5.3.1
Design Strength of Rivets
20 O
Nominal Tensile Nominal Shear
Description of Strength, ksi (MPa) Strength, ksi (MPa)
3, W
[a] [b]
Rivet
E
A502, Grade 1, hot-
45 (310) 25 (170)
driven rivets
ST I
[a]
U EV
128 Where required, the deformations at service loads shall be calculated and
129 reported.
130
BL
152 The tested strength of the structure shall be taken as the maximum applied test
153 load plus the in-situ dead load. The live load rating of a floor structure shall
154 be determined by setting the tested strength equal to 1.2D + 1.6L, where D is
155 the nominal dead load and L is the nominal live load rating for the structure.
156 For roof structures, Lr, S or R shall be substituted for L,
157
158 where
159 Lr = nominal roof live load
160 R = nominal load due to rainwater or snow, exclusive of the ponding
161 contribution
162 S = nominal snow load
163
164 More severe load combinations shall be used where required by the applicable
165 building codes.
166
167 Periodic unloading is permitted once the service load level is attained, and
168 after the onset of inelastic structural behavior is identified, to document the
20 NE
169 amount of permanent set and the magnitude of the inelastic deformations.
170 Deformations of the structure, such as member deflections, shall be monitored
171 at critical locations during the test, referenced to the initial position before
20 O
172 loading. It shall be demonstrated, while maintaining maximum test load for
173 one hour, that the deformation of the structure does not increase by more than
174 10% above that at the beginning of the holding period. It is permissible to
3, W
175 repeat the test loading sequence if necessary to demonstrate compliance.
176
E
177 Deformations of the structure shall also be recorded 24 hours after the test
ST I
179
180 Where it is not feasible to load test the entire structure, a segment or zone of
G R
181 not less than one complete bay representative of the most critical condition
182 shall be selected.
AU IC
183
184 3. Serviceability Evaluation
185
BL
186 When load tests are prescribed, the structure shall be loaded incrementally to
187 the service load level. The service test load shall be held for a period of one
PU
188 hour, and deformations shall be recorded at the beginning and at the end of
189 the one-hour holding period.
190
191 5.5. EVALUATION REPORT
192
193 After the evaluation of an existing structure has been completed, the EOR
194 shall prepare a report documenting the evaluation. The report shall indicate
195 whether the evaluation was performed by structural analysis, by load testing,
196 or by a combination of structural analysis and load testing. Furthermore, when
197 testing is performed, the report shall include the loads and load combination
198 used and the load-deformation and time-deformation relationships observed.
199 All relevant information obtained from design documents, material test
200 reports, and auxiliary material testing shall also be reported. The report shall
201 indicate whether the structure, including all members and connections, can
202 withstand the load effects.
1 APPENDIX 6
20 NE
16 included in the analysis model of the overall structure, but is provided to stabilize
17 individual columns, beams and beam-columns. Guidance for applying these
18 provisions to stabilize trusses is provided in the Commentary.
20 O
19
20 6.1. GENERAL PROVISIONS
21
3, W
22 Bracing systems shall have the strength and stiffness specified in this
23 Appendix, as applicable. Where such a system braces more than one
E
24 member, the strength and stiffness of the bracing shall be based on the sum of
ST I
U EV
25 the required strengths of all members being braced and consider the
26 flexibility of all components in the system. The evaluation of the stiffness
27 furnished by the bracing shall include the effects of connections and
G R
28 anchoring details.
29
AU IC
30 User Note: More detailed analyses for bracing strength and stiffness are
31 presented in the Commentary.
BL
32
33 A panel brace (formerly referred to as a relative brace) controls the angular
34 deviation of a segment of the braced member between braced points (that is,
PU
35 the lateral displacement of one end of the segment relative to the other). A
36 point brace (formerly referred to as a nodal brace) controls the movement at
37 the braced point without direct interaction with adjacent braced points. A
38 continuous bracing system consists of bracing that is attached along the entire
39 member length.
40
41 The available strength and stiffness of the bracing members and connections
42 shall equal or exceed the required strength and stiffness, respectively, unless
43 analysis indicates that smaller values are justified.
44
45 Columns, beams and beam-columns with end and intermediate braced points
46 designed to meet the requirements in Sections 6.2, 6.3 and 6.4, as applicable,
47 are permitted to be designed based on lengths Lc and Lb, as defined in
48 Chapters E and F, taken equal to the distance between the braced points.
49
50 In lieu of the requirements of Sections 6.2, 6.3 and 6.4,
51
52 (a) The required brace strength and stiffness can be obtained using a second-
53 order analysis that satisfies the provisions of Chapter C or Appendix 1,
54 as appropriate, and includes brace points displaced from their nominal
55 locations in a pattern that provides for the greatest demand on the brac-
56 ing.
57 (b) The required bracing stiffness can be obtained as 2/φ (LRFD) or 2Ω
58 (ASD) times the ideal bracing stiffness determined from a buckling
59 analysis. The required brace strength can be determined using the
60 provisions of Sections 6.2, 6.3 and 6.4, as applicable.
61 (c) For either of the above analysis methods, members with end or
62 intermediate braced points meeting these requirements may be designed
63 based on effective lengths, Lc and Lb, taken less than the distance be-
64 tween braced points.
65
66 User Note: The stability bracing requirements in Sections 6.2, 6.3 and 6.4
67 are based on buckling analysis models involving idealizations of common
68 bracing conditions. Computational analysis methods may be used for greater
69 generality, accuracy and efficiency for more complex bracing conditions. The
70 Commentary to Section 6.1 provides guidance on these considerations.
71
20 NE
72 6.2. COLUMN BRACING
73
74 It is permitted to laterally brace an individual column at end and intermediate
20 O
75 points along its length using either panel or point bracing.
76
77 User Note: This section provides requirements only for lateral bracing.
3, W
78 Column lateral bracing is assumed to be located at the shear center of the
79 column. When lateral bracing does not prevent twist, the column is
E
81 lateral bracing is offset from the shear center, the column is susceptible to
82 constrained-axis torsional buckling, which is addressed in the commentary to
83 Section E4.
G R
84
85 1. Panel Bracing
AU IC
86
87 The panel bracing system shall have the strength and stiffness specified in this
BL
88 section. The connection of the bracing system to the column shall have the
89 strength specified in Section 6.2.2 for a point brace at that location.
90
PU
91 User Note: If the stiffness of the connection to the panel bracing system is
92 comparable to the stiffness of the panel bracing system itself, the panel
93 bracing system and its connection to the column function as a panel and point
94 bracing system arranged in series. Such cases may be evaluated using the
95 alternative analysis methods listed in Section 6.1.
96
97 In the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the column, the
98 required shear strength of the bracing system is:
99
100 Vbr = 0.005Pr (A-6-1)
101
102 and, the required shear stiffness of the bracing system is:
103
1 2P
104 βbr = r (LRFD) (A-6-2a)
φ Lbr
105
2P
106 β br = Ω r (ASD) (A-6-2b)
Lbr
107
108 φ = 0.75 (LRFD) Ω = 2.00 (ASD)
109
110 where
111 Lbr = unbraced length within the panel under consideration, in. (mm)
112 Pr = required axial strength of the column within the panel under consid-
113 eration, using LRFD or ASD load combinations, kips (N)
114
115 2. Point Bracing
116
117 In the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the column, the
118 required strength of end and intermediate point braces is
119
120 Pbr = 0.01 Pr (A-6-3)
121
122 and, the required stiffness of the brace is
123
20 NE
1 8P
124 βbr = r (LRFD) (A-6-4a)
φ Lbr
20 O
8P
125 βbr = Ω r (ASD) (A-6-4b)
Lbr
3, W
126
E
127 φ = 0.75 (LRFD) Ω = 2.00 (ASD)
128
ST I
U EV
129 where
130 Lbr = unbraced length adjacent to the point brace, in. (mm)
131 Pr = largest of the required axial strengths of the column within the
G R
132 unbraced lengths adjacent to the point brace using LRFD or ASD load
133 combinations, kips (N)
AU IC
134
135 When the unbraced lengths adjacent to a point brace have different Pr Lbr
BL
136 values, the larger value shall be used to determine the required brace stiffness.
137
138 For intermediate point bracing of an individual column, Lbr in Equations A-6-
PU
139 4a or A-6-4b need not be taken less than the maximum effective length, Lc,
140 permitted for the column based upon the required axial strength, Pr.
141
142 6.3. BEAM BRACING
143
144 Beams shall be restrained against rotation about their longitudinal axis at
145 points of support. When a braced point is assumed in the design between
146 points of support, lateral bracing, torsional bracing, or a combination of the
147 two shall be provided to prevent the relative displacement of the top and
148 bottom flanges (i.e., to prevent twist). In members subject to double curvature
149 bending, the inflection point shall not be considered a braced point unless
150 bracing is provided at that location.
151
152 The requirements of this section shall apply to bracing of doubly and singly
153 symmetric I-shaped members subjected to flexure within a plane of symmetry
154 and zero net axial force.
155
156 1. Lateral Bracing
157
158 Lateral bracing shall be attached at or near the beam compression flange,
159 except as follows:
160
161 (a) At the free end of a cantilevered beam, lateral bracing shall be attached at
162 or near the top (tension) flange.
163 (b) For braced beams subject to double curvature bending, bracing shall be
164 attached at or near both flanges at the braced point nearest the inflection
165 point.
166
167 It is permitted to use either panel or point bracing to provide lateral bracing
168 for beams.
169
170 1a. Panel Bracing
171
172 The panel bracing system shall have the strength and stiffness specified in this
173 section. The connection of the bracing system to the member shall have the
174 strength specified in Section 6.3.1b for a point brace at that location.
20 NE
175
176 User Note: The stiffness contribution of the connection to the panel bracing
177 system should be assessed as provided in the User Note to Section 6.2.1.
20 O
178
179 The required shear strength of the bracing system is
180
3, W
M C
181 Vbr = 0.01 r d (A-6-5)
E
ho
ST I
182
U EV
186
4M r Cd
BL
189
190 φ = 0.75 (LRFD) Ω = 2.00 (ASD)
191
192 where
193 Cd = 1.0, except in the following case:
194 = 2.0 for the brace closest to the inflection point in a beam subject to
195 double curvature bending
196 Lbr = unbraced length within the panel under consideration, in. (mm)
197 Mr = required flexural strength of the beam within the panel under
198 consideration, using LRFD or ASD load combinations, kip-in. (N-
199 mm)
200 ho = distance between flange centroids, in. (mm)
201
202 1b. Point Bracing
203
204 In the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the beam, the
205 required strength of end and intermediate point braces is
206
M C
207 Pbr = 0.02 r d (A-6-7)
ho
208
209 and, the required stiffness of the brace is
210
1 10 M r Cd
211 βbr = (LRFD) (A-6-8a)
φ Lbr ho
10 M r Cd
212 βbr = Ω (ASD) (A-6-8b)
Lbr ho
213
214 φ = 0.75 (LRFD) Ω= 2.00 (ASD)
215
216 where
217 Lbr = unbraced length adjacent to the point brace, in. (mm)
218 M r = largest of the required flexural strengths of the beam within the
20 NE
219 unbraced lengths adjacent to the point brace using LRFD or ASD
220 load combinations, kip-in. (N-mm)
221
20 O
222 When the unbraced lengths adjacent to a point brace have different M r Lbr
223 values, the larger value shall be used to determine the required brace
3, W
224 stiffness.
225
E
226 For intermediate point bracing of an individual beam, Lbr in Equations A-6-
ST I
227 8a or A-6-8b need not be taken less than the maximum effective length, Lb ,
U EV
228 permitted for the beam based upon the required flexural strength, M r .
229
G R
234
235 User Note: Torsional bracing can be provided as point bracing, such as cross-
236 frames, moment-connected beams or vertical diaphragm elements, or as
PU
252
253 where
2
1 2.4 L Mr
254 βT = (LRFD) (A-6-11a)
φ nEI yeff Cb
2
2.4 L Mr
255 βT = Ω (ASD) (A-6-11b)
nEI yeff Cb
3.3E 1.5ho tw3 tst bs3
256 βsec = + (A-6-12)
ho 12 12
257 and
258
259 φ = 0.75 (LRFD); Ω = 3.00 (ASD)
260
261 User Note: Ω = 1.52 φ = 3.00 in Equations A-6-11a or A-6-11b, because the
262 moment term is squared.
20 NE
263
264 βsec can be taken equal to infinity, and β br = βT , when a cross-frame is
20 O
265 attached near both flanges or a vertical diaphragm element is used that is
266 approximately the same depth as the beam being braced.
3, W
267
268 E = modulus of elasticity of steel = 29,000 ksi (200 000 MPa)
Iyeff = effective out-of-plane moment of inertia, in.4 (mm4)
E
269
270 = Iyc + (t/c)Iyt
ST I
U EV
271 I yc = moment of inertia of the compression flange about the y-axis, in.4
272 (mm4)
273 I yt = moment of inertia of the tension flange about the y-axis, in.4
G R
274 (mm4)
275 L = length of span, in. (mm)
AU IC
276 M r = largest of the required flexural strengths of the beam within the
BL
277 unbraced lengths adjacent to the point brace, using LRFD or ASD
278 load combinations, kip-in. (N-mm)
Mr
PU
297 User Note: If βsec < βT, Equation A-6-10 is negative, which indicates that
298 torsional beam bracing will not be effective due to inadequate web
299 distortional stiffness.
300
301 User Note: For doubly symmetric members, c = t and Iyeff = out-of-plane
302 moment of inertia, Iy, in.4 (mm4).
303
304 When required, a web stiffener shall extend the full depth of the braced
305 member and shall be attached to the flange if the torsional brace is also
306 attached to the flange. Alternatively, it is permissible to stop the stiffener
307 short by a distance equal to 4tw from any beam flange that is not directly
308 attached to the torsional brace.
309
310 In Equation A-6-9, Lb need not be taken less than the maximum unbraced
311 length permitted for the beam based upon the required flexural strength, Mr.
312
313 2b. Continuous Bracing
20 NE
314
315 For continuous torsional bracing:
316
20 O
317 (a) The brace strength requirement per unit length along the beam shall be
318 taken as Equation A-6-9 divided by the maximum unbraced length
319 permitted for the beam based upon the required flexural strength, M r .
3, W
320 The required flexural strength, M r , shall be taken as the maximum
E
321 value throughout the beam span.
322 (b) The brace stiffness requirement per unit length shall be given by
ST I
U EV
3.3 Et w3
326 β sec = (A-6-13)
AU IC
12ho
327
BL
331 force shall be determined as specified in Section 6.2, and the required strength
332 and stiffness for flexure shall be determined as specified in Section 6.3. The
333 values so determined shall be combined as follows:
334
335 (a) When panel bracing is used, the required strength shall be taken as the
336 sum of the values determined using Equations A-6-1 and A-6-5, and the
337 required stiffness shall be taken as the sum of the values determined
338 using Equations A-6-2 and A-6-6.
339
340 (b) When point bracing is used, the required strength shall be taken as the
341 sum of the values determined using Equations A-6-3 and A-6-7, and the
342 required stiffness shall be taken as the sum of the values determined
343 using Equations A-6-4 and A-6-8. In Equations A-6-4 and A-6-8, Lbr
344 for beam-columns shall be taken as the actual unbraced length; the
345 provisions in Sections 6.2.2 and 6.3.1b, that Lbr need not be taken less
346 than the maximum permitted effective length based upon Pr and M r ,
347 shall not be applied.
348
349 (c) When torsional bracing is provided for flexure in combination with panel
350 or point bracing for the axial force, the required strength and stiffness
351 shall be combined or distributed in a manner that is consistent with the
352 resistance provided by the element(s) of the actual bracing details.
353
354 (d) When the combined stress effect from axial force and flexure results in
355 compression to both flanges, either lateral bracing shall be added to both
356 flanges or both flanges shall be laterally restrained by a combination of
357 lateral and torsional bracing.
358
359 User Note: For case (d), additional guidelines are provided in the Com-
360 mentary.
361
362
363
20 NE
364
365
20 O
366
3, W
E
ST I
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU
1 APPENDIX 7
20 NE
16 7.1. GENERAL STABILITY REQUIREMENTS
17
18 The general requirements of Section C1 shall apply. As an alternative to the
20 O
19 direct analysis method (defined in Sections C1 and C2), it is permissible to
20 design structures for stability in accordance with either the effective length
3, W
21 method, specified in Section 7.2, or the first-order analysis method, specified
22 in Section 7.3, subject to the limitations indicated in those sections.
E
23
ST I
25
26 1. Limitations
27
G R
28 When using the effective length method, the following conditions shall be
29 met:
AU IC
30
31 (a) The structure supports gravity loads primarily through nominally vertical
BL
54
55 3. Available Strengths
56
57 The available strengths of members and connections shall be calculated in
58 accordance with the provisions of Chapters D through K, as applicable.
59
60 For flexural buckling, the effective length, Lc, of members subject to
61 compression shall be taken as KL, where K is as specified in (a) or (b), in the
62 following, as applicable, and L is the laterally unbraced length of the
63 member.
64
65 (a) In braced-frame systems, shear-wall systems, and other structural
66 systems where lateral stability and resistance to lateral loads does not
67 rely on the flexural stiffness of columns, the effective length factor, K, of
68 members subject to compression shall be taken as unity unless a smaller
69 value is justified by rational analysis.
70
20 NE
71 (b) In moment-frame systems and other structural systems in which the
72 flexural stiffnesses of columns are considered to contribute to lateral
73 stability and resistance to lateral loads, the effective length factor, K, or
20 O
74 elastic critical buckling stress, Fe, of those columns whose flexural
75 stiffnesses are considered to contribute to lateral stability and resistance
76 to lateral loads shall be determined from a sidesway buckling analysis of
3, W
77 the structure; K shall be taken as 1.0 for columns whose flexural stiff-
78 nesses are not considered to contribute to lateral stability and resistance
E
79 to lateral loads.
ST I
80
U EV
83 (both determined for LRFD load combinations or 1.6 times ASD load
84 combinations) in all stories is equal to or less than 1.1.
AU IC
85
86 User Note: Methods of calculating the effective length factor, K, are
87 discussed in the Commentary.
BL
88
89 Bracing intended to define the unbraced lengths of members shall have
PU
108 (b) The axial forces in nominally horizontal members in moment frames are
109 not larger than 0.1FeAg with Lc taken as the unbraced length of the
110 member.
111
112 (c) The ratio of maximum second-order drift to maximum first-order drift
113 (both determined for LRFD load combinations or 1.6 times ASD load
114 combinations, with stiffness not adjusted as specified in Section C2.3) in
115 all stories is equal to or less than 1.5.
116
117 User Note: The ratio of second-order drift to first-order drift in a story
118 may be taken as the B2 multiplier, calculated as specified in Appendix 8.
119
120 (d) The required axial compressive strengths of all members whose flexural
121 stiffnesses are considered to contribute to the lateral stability of the
122 structure satisfy the limitation:
123
124 αPr ≤ 0.5Pns (A-7-1)
20 NE
125
126 where
127 α = 1.0 (LRFD); α = 1.6 (ASD)
20 O
128 Pr = required axial compressive strength under LRFD or ASD load
129 combinations, kips (N)
3, W
130 Pns = cross-section compressive strength; for nonslender-element
131 sections, Pns = Fy Ag , and for slender-element sections,
E
132 Pns = Fy Ae , where Ae is as defined in Section E7, kips (N)
ST I
133
U EV
141 (a) All load combinations shall include an additional lateral load, Ni, applied
142 in combination with other loads at each level of the structure:
PU
143
144 Ni = 2.1α( Δ L)Yi ≥ 0.0042Yi (A-7-2)
145
146 where
147 α = 1.0 (LRFD); α = 1.6 (ASD)
148 Yi = gravity load applied at level i from the LRFD load combina-
149 tion or ASD load combination, as applicable, kips (N)
150 Δ L = maximum ratio of Δ to L for all stories in the structure
151 Δ = first-order interstory drift due to the LRFD or ASD load
152 combination, as applicable, in. (mm). Where Δ varies over
153 the plan area of the structure, Δ shall be the average drift
154 weighted in proportion to vertical load or, alternatively, the
155 maximum drift.
156 L = height of story, in. (mm)
157
158 The additional lateral load at any level, Ni, shall be distributed over that
159 level in the same manner as the gravity load at the level. The additional
160 lateral loads shall be applied in the direction that provides the greatest
161 destabilizing effect.
162
163 User Note: For most building structures, the requirement regarding the
164 direction of Ni may be satisfied as follows: (a) For load combinations
165 that do not include lateral loading, consider two alternative orthogonal
166 directions for the additional lateral load in a positive and a negative
167 sense in each of the two directions, same direction at all levels; (b) for
168 load combinations that include lateral loading, apply all the additional
169 lateral loads in the direction of the resultant of all lateral loads in the
170 combination.
171
172 (b) The nonsway amplification of beam-column moments shall be included
173 by applying the B1 amplifier of Appendix 8 to the total member mo-
174 ments.
175
176 User Note: Since there is no second-order analysis involved in the first-
177 order analysis method for design by ASD, it is not necessary to amplify ASD
178 load combinations by 1.6 before performing the analysis, as required in the
20 NE
179 direct analysis method and the effective length method.
180
181 3. Available Strengths
20 O
182
183 The available strengths of members and connections shall be calculated in
184 accordance with the provisions of Chapters D through K, as applicable.
3, W
185
186 The effective length for flexural buckling of all members shall be taken as
E
187 the unbraced length unless a smaller value is justified by rational analysis.
ST I
188
U EV
189 Bracing intended to define the unbraced lengths of members shall have
190 sufficient stiffness and strength to control member movement at the braced
G R
191 points.
192
AU IC
193 User Note: Methods of satisfying this requirement are provided in Appendix
194 6. The requirements of Appendix 6 are not applicable to bracing that is
195 included in the analysis of the overall structure as part of the overall force-
BL
1 APPENDIX 8
2 APPROXIMATE ANALYSIS
3
4
5 This appendix provides approximate analysis procedures for determining the
6 required strength of structural members and connections.
7 The appendix is organized as follows:
8
9 8.1. Approximate Second-Order Elastic Analysis
10 8.2. Approximate Inelastic Moment Redistribution
11
12 8.1. APPROXIMATE SECOND-ORDER ELASTIC ANALYIS
13
14 Second-order effects in structures may be approximated by amplifying the
15 required strengths determined by two first-order elastic analyses. The use of
20 NE
16 this procedure is limited to structures that support gravity loads primarily
17 through nominally vertical columns, walls or frames, except that it is
18 permissible to use the procedure specified for determining P-δ effects for any
20 O
19 individual compression member. This method is not permitted for design by
20 advanced analysis using the provisions of Appendix 1.
3, W
21
22 1. Calculation Procedure
E
23
24 The required second-order flexural strength, Mr, and axial strength, Pr, of all
ST I
U EV
28
29 Pr = Pnt + B2Plt (A-8-2)
AU IC
30
31 where
BL
20 NE
71 (a) For beam-columns not subject to transverse loading between
72 supports in the plane of bending
73
20 O
74 Cm = 0.6 − 0.4 ( M1 M 2 ) (A-8-4)
3, W
75
76 where M1 and M2, calculated from a first-order analysis, are
E
77 the smaller and larger moments, respectively, at the ends of
78 that portion of the member unbraced in the plane of bending
ST I
U EV
82
83 (b) For beam-columns subject to transverse loading between
AU IC
86
87 Pe1 = elastic critical buckling strength of the member in the plane of
88 bending, calculated based on the assumption of no lateral transla-
PU
20 NE
119 Pe story = elastic critical buckling strength for the story in the direction
120 of translation being considered, kips (N), determined by side-
121 sway buckling analysis or as:
20 O
H L
122 = RM (A-8-7)
ΔH
3, W
123 and
124 H = total story shear, in the direction of translation being consid-
E
125 ered, produced by the lateral forces used to compute ΔH, kips
ST I
126 (N)
U EV
129 Pmf = total vertical load in columns in the story that are part of
130 moment frames, if any, in the direction of translation being
131 considered (= 0 for braced-frame systems), kips (N)
AU IC
136 cording to Section C2.3.) Where ΔH varies over the plan area
137 of the structure, it shall be the average drift weighted in pro-
138 portion to vertical load or, alternatively, the maximum drift.
139
140 User Note: RM can be taken as 0.85 as a lower bound value for stories
141 that include moment frames, and RM = 1 if there are no moment frames
142 in the story. H and ΔH in Equation A-8-7 may be based on any lateral
143 loading that provides a representative value of story lateral stiffness, H
144 /ΔH.
145
146 8.2. APPROXIMATE INELASTIC MOMENT REDISTRIBUTION
147
148 The required flexural strength of indeterminate beams comprised of compact
149 sections, as defined in Section B4.1, carrying gravity loads only, and
150 satisfying the unbraced length requirements provided below, is permitted to
151 be taken as nine-tenths of the negative moments at the points of support,
152 produced by the gravity loading and determined by an elastic analysis
153 satisfying the requirements of Chapter C, provided that the maximum
154 positive moment is increased by one-tenth of the average negative moment
155 determined by an elastic analysis. This moment redistribution is not
156 permitted for moments in members with Fy exceeding 65 ksi (450 MPa), for
157 moments produced by loading on cantilevers, for design using partially
158 restrained (PR) moment connections, or for design by inelastic analysis using
159 the provisions of Appendix 1.2. This moment redistribution is permitted for
160 design according to Section B3.1 (LRFD) and for design according to
161 Section B3.2 (ASD). The required axial strength shall not exceed 0.15φcFyAg
162 for LRFD or 0.15FyAg/Ωc for ASD, where φc and Ωc are determined from
163 Section E1, Ag = gross area of member, in.2 (mm2), and Fy = specified
164 minimum yield stress, ksi (MPa).
165
166 The laterally unbraced length, Lb, of the compression flange adjacent to the
167 redistributed end moment locations shall not exceed Lm determined as
168 follows.
169
170 (a) For doubly symmetric and singly symmetric I-shaped beams with the
171 Iyc of the compression flange equal to or larger than the Iyt of the tension
172 flange loaded in the plane of the web
20 NE
173
M E
174 Lm = 0.12 + 0.076 1 ry (A-8-9)
M 2 Fy
20 O
175
176 (b) For solid rectangular bars and symmetric box beams bent about
3, W
177 their major axis
178
E
M E E
ST I
M 2 Fy Fy
180
G R
181 where
182 Fy =specified minimum yield stress of the compression flange, ksi (MPa)
AU IC
20 NE
17
18 (a) The area of the steel section shall comprise at least 1% of the total
19 composite cross section.
20
20 O
(b) Concrete shall be normal weight, and compressive strength, fc' , shall not
3, W
21 exceed 15 ksi (103 MPa).
E
22 (c) The specified minimum yield stress of steel shall not exceed 100 ksi (690
23 MPa).
ST I
U EV
28 strength.
29
BL
30 2. Compressive Strength
31
PU
20 NE
2
Fy f c'
max
P B
63 cm = 0.6 + 0.3 n + 0.6λ (A-X-4)
Pno H Fy Fy
64 where
20 O
65 B = flange width of rectangular cross section
66 H = web depth of rectangular cross section
3, W
67 Fymax = maximum permitted yield stress of steel = 100 ksi (690 MPa)
68 Pn = nominal axial strength calculated in accordance with Section X.1.1
E
69 t = flange thickness
ST I
70
U EV
G R
AU IC
BL
PU